3900 Series Base Station Technical Description (13)(PDF)-En

3900 Series Base Station

V100R007C00

Technical Description

Issue 13

Date 2014-02-24

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 13 (2014-02-24) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

OverviewThis document describes the 3900 series base stations in terms of the logical structure,networking, transmission and clock scheme, technical specification, and operation andmaintenance.

Product VersionThe following table provides the mapping between a product name and product version.

Product Name Product Version

BTS3900 MBTS: V100R007C00l GSM: V100R014C00l WCDMA: V200R014C00l LTE: V100R005C00

BTS3900A

BTS3900L

BTS3900AL

DBS3900

BTS3900C MBTS: V100R007C00l WCDMA: V200R014C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Network planning engineers

l Field engineers

l System engineers

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description About This Document


ii

Organization1 Changes in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description

This section describes changes in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description of eachversion.

2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family

Huawei 3900 series base stations adopt a uniform modular design for multiple radio networksystems. These base stations support the co-existence of devices serving different modes at thesame site, sharing of base station resources, and the unified operation and maintenance method.With these merits, operators' requirement of evolution to multi-mode base stations becomesfeasible.

3 Network Structure

This section describes the position of a 3900 series base station in a network.

4 About 3900 Series Base Stations

The 3900 series base stations include macro base stations (BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A,and BTS3900AL), a distributed base station (DBS3900), micro base stations (BTS3900C,BTS3900E, and BTS3902E), and a Pico base station (BTS3900B). Different types of basestations can be used in various scenarios to achieve fast deployment and low operatingexpenditure (OPEX). This technical description focuses on macro base stations, the distributedbase station DBS3900, and the micro base station BTS3900C. For a description of the othertypes of 3900 series base stations, see the production documentation of the base station inquestion.

5 Logical Structure

A 3900 series base station mainly consists of BBUs, RF modules, and the antenna system. Itsfunctional subsystem includes the control system, transport system, baseband system,monitoring system, RF system, antenna system, and power supply system.

6 Clock Synchronization

Synchronization refers to that within a specific time, the phase variation or frequency variationbetween two or more signals stays within the specified range. Clock synchronization refers tothat a base station synchronizes its clock signals with a reference clock source. Through clocksynchronization, the variation in the clock frequency between a base station and other devicesin the related network and the variation in the clock signals between the base station and otherdevices in the network are within the specified range. This prevents transmission performancefrom deteriorating due to such variations.

7 Transport Network Topologies

The 3900 series base stations support multiple transmission schemes and transport networktopologies in various scenarios.

8 CPRI-based Topologies

This section describes CPRI-based topologies for 3900 series base stations and specificationsof CPRI ports on boards or modules. CPRI stands for common public radio interface.

9 Operation and Maintenance



iii

The 3900 series base stations are managed by an operation and maintenance (O&M) systemusing either man-machine language (MML) commands or a graphical user interface (GUI). Thissystem is hardware-independent and provides comprehensive functions to meet users' variousO&M requirements.

10 Product Specifications

Product specifications of the 3900 series base stations include technical specifications of theBBU3900, radio frequency unit (RFU), and remote radio unit (RRU) and engineeringspecifications of each type of cabinet.

11 Reliability

3900 series base stations use the Huawei SingleBTS platform, support hardware sharing, andprovide mature communications technologies and stable transmission reliability.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personalinjury.

Calls attention to important information, best practices andtips.NOTE is used to address information not related to personalinjury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.



iv

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations



v

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



vi

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description..........................................1

2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family.................................................................................26

3 Network Structure.......................................................................................................................283.1 GBTS in the Network...................................................................................................................................................293.2 NodeB in the Network..................................................................................................................................................303.3 eNodeB in the Network................................................................................................................................................323.4 MBTS in the Network..................................................................................................................................................33

4 About 3900 Series Base Stations...............................................................................................364.1 Basic Modules..............................................................................................................................................................384.1.1 BBU3900...................................................................................................................................................................384.1.2 RFU...........................................................................................................................................................................424.1.3 RRU...........................................................................................................................................................................474.1.4 AAU...........................................................................................................................................................................514.2 BTS3900.......................................................................................................................................................................524.3 BTS3900L....................................................................................................................................................................554.4 BTS3900A....................................................................................................................................................................604.5 BTS3900AL..................................................................................................................................................................674.6 DBS3900......................................................................................................................................................................704.7 BTS3900C....................................................................................................................................................................74

5 Logical Structure..........................................................................................................................795.1 GBTS Logical Structure...............................................................................................................................................805.2 NodeB Logical Structure..............................................................................................................................................815.3 eNodeB Logical Structure............................................................................................................................................855.4 MBTS Logical Structure..............................................................................................................................................865.4.1 Related Concepts.......................................................................................................................................................875.4.2 Logical Structure of a Dual-Mode Base Station .......................................................................................................895.4.3 Logical Structure of a Triple-Mode Base Station......................................................................................................93

6 Clock Synchronization.............................................................................................................1016.1 GBTS Clock Synchronization Modes........................................................................................................................103

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description Contents


vii

6.2 NodeB Clock Synchronization Modes.......................................................................................................................1046.3 eNodeB Clock Synchronization Modes.....................................................................................................................1056.4 MBTS Clock Synchronization Modes........................................................................................................................1076.4.1 Independent Reference Clock Mode.......................................................................................................................1076.4.2 Common Reference Clock Mode............................................................................................................................108

7 Transport Network Topologies..............................................................................................1137.1 GBTS Transport Network Topologies.......................................................................................................................1147.2 NodeB Transport Network Topologies......................................................................................................................1227.3 eNodeB Transport Network Topologies.....................................................................................................................1267.4 MBTS Transport Network Topologies.......................................................................................................................1297.4.1 Transport Network Topology..................................................................................................................................1297.4.2 Independent Transmission.......................................................................................................................................1327.4.3 Co-Transmission......................................................................................................................................................133

8 CPRI-based Topologies............................................................................................................1478.1 GBTS CPRI-based Topologies...................................................................................................................................1498.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies..................................................................................................................................1538.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies................................................................................................................................1588.4 MBTS CPRI-based Topologies..................................................................................................................................1688.4.1 CPRI-based Topologies...........................................................................................................................................1698.4.2 CPRI Specifications.................................................................................................................................................1728.4.3 CPRI MUX Specifications......................................................................................................................................176

9 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................1789.1 GBTS Operation and Maintenance.............................................................................................................................1799.1.1 GBTS Operation & Maintenance Modes................................................................................................................1799.1.2 GBTS Operation & Maintenance Functions...........................................................................................................1809.2 NodeB Operation and Maintenance...........................................................................................................................1819.2.1 NodeB Operation & Maintenance Modes...............................................................................................................1819.2.2 NodeB Operation & Maintenance Functions..........................................................................................................1839.3 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance..........................................................................................................................1849.3.1 eNodeB Operation & Maintenance Modes.............................................................................................................1849.3.2 eNodeB Operation & Maintenance Functions.........................................................................................................1859.4 MBTS Operation and Maintenance............................................................................................................................1879.4.1 MBTS Operation & Maintenance Modes................................................................................................................1889.4.2 MBTS Operation & Maintenance Functions...........................................................................................................1899.4.3 Maintenance Between Modes..................................................................................................................................207

10 Product Specifications............................................................................................................22210.1 Technical Specifications of the BBU3900...............................................................................................................22310.1.1 Capacity Specifications.........................................................................................................................................22310.1.2 Baseband Specifications........................................................................................................................................22510.1.3 Signaling Specifications........................................................................................................................................232



viii

10.1.4 Transmission Port Specifications..........................................................................................................................23610.1.5 Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................................23710.2 Technical Specifications of RFUs............................................................................................................................24210.2.1 GRFU Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................24210.2.2 DRFU Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................25010.2.3 WRFU Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................25410.2.4 WRFUa Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................26110.2.5 WRFUd Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................26510.2.6 WRFUe Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................27310.2.7 MRFU Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................28010.2.8 MRFUd Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................29610.2.9 MRFUe Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................31010.2.10 CRFUd Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................31810.2.11 LRFU Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................32210.2.12 LRFUe Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................................32510.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs............................................................................................................................32810.3.1 RRU3004 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................32910.3.2 RRU3008 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................33510.3.3 RRU3804 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................34610.3.4 RRU3805 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................35510.3.5 RRU3806 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................36410.3.6 RRU3808 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................37310.3.7 RRU3824 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................39010.3.8 RRU3826 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................39610.3.9 RRU3828 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................40310.3.10 RRU3829 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................41310.3.11 RRU3832 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................42310.3.12 RRU3838 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................44110.3.13 RRU3839 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................45110.3.14 RRU3801E Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................46110.3.15 RRU3908 Technical Specifications ....................................................................................................................46810.3.16 RRU3926 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................48610.3.17 RRU3928 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................49510.3.18 RRU3929 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................50610.3.19 RRU3936 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................51910.3.20 RRU3938 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................53210.3.21 RRU3939 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................54410.3.22 RRU3942 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................55210.3.23 RRU3201 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................56910.3.24 RRU3203 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................57510.3.25 RRU3220 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................580



ix

10.3.26 RRU3221 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................58510.3.27 RRU3222 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................59210.3.28 RRU3229 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................59710.3.29 RRU3240 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................60410.3.30 RRU3841 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................61110.4 Technical Specifications of an AAU........................................................................................................................61910.4.1 AAU3902 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................61910.5 Engineering Specifications.......................................................................................................................................63110.5.1 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................63110.5.2 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................63710.5.3 BTS3900A Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................64110.5.4 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications..............................................................................................................64610.5.5 DBS3900 Engineering Specifications...................................................................................................................65110.5.6 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................654

11 Reliability..................................................................................................................................65911.1 GBTS Reliability......................................................................................................................................................66011.2 NodeB Reliability.....................................................................................................................................................66111.3 eNodeB Reliability...................................................................................................................................................66311.4 MBTS Reliability.....................................................................................................................................................665

Index................................................................................................................................................667



x

1 Changes in the 3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description

This section describes changes in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description of eachversion.

13 (2014-02-24)

This is Issue 13.

Compared with Issue 12 (2013-11-28), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with Issue 12 (2013-11-28), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Topic Change Description

10.2.7 MRFU Technical Specifications Modified the output power for the MRFU V2/MRFU V2a (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GLMSR).

10.3.19 RRU3936 Technical Specifications Added specifications when the RRU3936operates in the 850 MHz and 1900 MHzfrequency bands.

10.4.1 AAU3902 Technical Specifications Modified equipment specifications when theAAU3902 works in active mode.

10.5.2 BTS3900L EngineeringSpecifications

Modified the equipment specifications of aBTS3900L cabinet.

Compared with Issue 12 (2013-11-28), this issue does not exclude any topics.

12 (2013-11-28)

This is issue 12.

Compared with issue 11 (2013-08-20), this issue includes the following new topics:

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description

1 Changes in the 3900 Series Base Station TechnicalDescription


1

l 4.1.4 AAU

l 10.2.4 WRFUa Technical Specifications

l 10.3.13 RRU3839 Technical Specifications


l 10.4 Technical Specifications of an AAU

Compared with issue 11 (2013-08-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:


4.1.1 BBU3900 Added description about the UTRPa.

4.1.2 RFU Added description about the WRFUa.

4.1.3 RRU Added description about the RRU3839 andRRU3939.

8.1 GBTS CPRI-based Topologies Added CPRI specifications of the RRU3939.

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies Added CPRI specifications of the RRU3839and WRFUa.

8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies Added CPRI specifications of the RRU3939.

8.4.2 CPRI Specifications Added CPRI specifications of the RRU3939.

10.1.4 Transmission Port Specifications Added description about the UTRPa.

Compared with issue 11 (2013-08-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.

11 (2013-08-20)

This is issue 11.







4.1.3 RRU Added description about the RRU3936,RRU3938, RRU3832, and RRU3838.

8.1 GBTS CPRI-based Topologies l Added CPRI specifications of theRRU3936 and RRU3938.

l Modified CPRI data rates of theRRU3928, RRU3929, and RRU3942.




2


8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies l Added CPRI specifications of theMRFUe, RRU3938, RRU3832, andRRU3838.


8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies l Added CPRI specifications of theMRFUe, RRU3832, RRU3926,RRU3936, and RRU3938.

l Modified the CPRI data rate of theMRFUd.

l Modified the maximum distance betweenthe BBU and the RRU.

8.4.2 CPRI Specifications l Added CPRI specifications of theRRU3938 and RRU3832.


10.1.1 Capacity Specifications Added board configuration descriptions.

10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUs and10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs

l Added CPRI specifications of RFmodules.

l Modified port names in the table of surgeprotection specifications.

10.2.3 WRFU Technical Specifications l Modified the weight specifications.l Modified the power consumption

specifications.

10.2.5 WRFUd Technical Specifications Modified the power consumptionspecifications when the WRFUd is used withthe BTS3900L cabinet.

10.2.6 WRFUe Technical Specifications Modified the power consumptionspecifications.

10.2.11 LRFU Technical Specifications Removed the power consumption for a singlemodule.

10.2.12 LRFUe Technical Specificationsand 10.2.10 CRFUd TechnicalSpecifications

l Removed the power consumption for asingle module.

l Added typical output powerconfigurations for RF modules.




3


10.2.7 MRFU Technical Specifications l Modified the RX and TX frequency bandsof the MRFU V2 working at the 1800MHz frequency band.

l Added the power consumptionspecifications when the MRFU V2 orMRFU V2a is used with the BTS3900ALAC (Ver.A) cabinet.

10.3.1 RRU3004 Technical Specifications Added the size and weight without thehousing.

10.3.2 RRU3008 Technical Specifications l Added the frequency band of theRRU3008 V1 working at the 900 MHzfrequency band.

l Added the size and weight without thehousing and modified the weight with thehousing.

10.3.6 RRU3808 Technical Specifications l Removed specifications of the 2100 MHzRRU3808 working in LTE mode.

l Added the table of carrier configurationswhen the RRU3808 works in UMTSmode and uses the combination of thesingle output configurations and MIMO.

l Removed the power consumption of asingle RRU3808 working in LTE mode.

l Modified the power consumption of theAWS RRU3808 working in LTE mode ina whole site.

10.3.7 RRU3824 Technical Specificationsand 10.3.8 RRU3826 TechnicalSpecifications

Removed the size and weight with thehousing.

10.3.23 RRU3201 TechnicalSpecifications, 10.3.25 RRU3220Technical Specifications, and 10.3.27RRU3222 Technical Specifications

Removed the power consumption for a singlemodule.

10.3.24 RRU3203 Technical Specifications l Modified the weight specifications.l Removed the power consumption for a

single module.

10.3.26 RRU3221 TechnicalSpecifications, 10.3.28 RRU3229Technical Specifications, 10.3.29RRU3240 Technical Specifications, and10.3.30 RRU3841 Technical Specifications

l Added typical output powerconfigurations for RF modules.

l Removed the power consumption for asingle module.




4


10.3.17 RRU3928 TechnicalSpecifications, 10.3.18 RRU3929Technical Specifications, and 10.3.22RRU3942 Technical Specifications

Added the size and weight without thehousing.

10.3.19 RRU3936 Technical Specifications Modified the weight specifications.

10.5.1 BTS3900 EngineeringSpecifications

l Divided the Input power supported bythe BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900(Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D)cabinets table into three tables: Inputpower supported by the BTS3900(Ver.B) cabinet, Input powersupported by the BTS3900 (Ver.C)cabinet, and Input power supported bythe BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet.

l Modified the weight of the BTS3900(Ver.D) cabinet.

l Added the safety standards, workingenvironment standards, and noisestandards that a cabinet must comply with.

10.5.2 BTS3900L EngineeringSpecifications, 10.5.4 BTS3900ALEngineering Specifications, 10.5.5DBS3900 Engineering Specifications, and10.5.6 BTS3900C EngineeringSpecifications

Added the safety standards, workingenvironment standards, and noise standardsthat a cabinet must comply with.

10.5.3 BTS3900A EngineeringSpecifications

l Modified the base size.l Added the safety standards, working

environment standards, and noisestandards that a cabinet must comply with.


10 (2013-05-27)

This is issue 10.


l 10.1.1 Capacity Specifications

l 10.1.2 Baseband Specifications

l 10.1.3 Signaling Specifications

l 10.1.4 Transmission Port Specifications

l 10.1.5 Engineering Specifications




5




8.4.2 CPRI Specifications l Added the maximum number of 2T2Rcells supported by the UMTS mode.

l Added specifications for CPRI ports onthe RRU3936.

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies Added the maximum number of 2T2R cellssupported by the UMTS mode.

10.1 Technical Specifications of theBBU3900

This section is divided into the followingparts:l Capacity specifications. For detailed

information, see 10.1.1 CapacitySpecifications.

l Signaling specifications. For detailedinformation, see 10.1.2 BasebandSpecifications.

l Transmission port specifications. Fordetailed information, see 10.1.4Transmission Port Specifications.

l Input power, equipment, environment,and surge protection specifications. Fordetailed information, see 10.1.5Engineering Specifications.

10.2.8 MRFUd Technical Specifications Modified the Output power of MRFUd(900/1800 MHz, GL MSR) table.

10.3.18 RRU3929 Technical Specifications Modified the Output power of RRU3929(900/1800 MHz, GL MSR) table.


09 (2013-04-30)

This is issue 09.

Compared with issue 08 (2013-02-20), this issue does not include any new topics.



4.4 BTS3900A Added the IBBS700T and IBBS700D to thebattery cabinets of the BTS3900A (Ver.D).




6


8.4.2 CPRI Specifications Added the following description: In a GUdual-mode base station, the UMTS sidereserves CPRI bandwidth for a TX and an RXchannel of the GSM side in case thatbandwidth on the GSM side is insufficient. Asa result, the cell number supported by theUMTS side is reduced.

10.3.3 RRU3804 Technical Specifications Deleted the power backup duration in tablesPower consumption of DBS3900 withRRU3804 (AC) operating in the 2100 MHzfrequency band and Power consumption ofDBS3900 with RRU3804 (AC) operating inthe 850 MHz frequency band.

10.3.5 RRU3806 Technical Specifications Deleted the power backup duration in thetable Power consumption of DBS3900 withRRU3806 (AC).

10.3.14 RRU3801E TechnicalSpecifications

Deleted the power backup duration in thetable Power consumption of DBS3900 withRRU3801E (AC).

10.3.15 RRU3908 Technical Specifications Added specifications related to the RRU3908(AC).


08 (2013-02-20)This is issue 08.




4.1.1 BBU3900 Added the UMPTb1 board.


Updated LTE capacity specifications.

10.2.1 GRFU Technical Specifications Added output power and power consumptionspecifications for the GRFU V2a.

10.2.7 MRFU Technical Specifications Added output power and power consumptionspecifications for the MRFU V2a.


Updated power specifications.




7




10.5.4 BTS3900AL EngineeringSpecifications



07 (2012-12-30)This is issue 07.




5 Logical Structure In the logical structure, replaced the Filter inthe RF system with a Duplexer and changedthe bidirectional arrow between the PA/LNAand the signal processing unit, between thePA/LNA and the filter to a unidirectionalarrow. PA is short for power amplifier andLNA is short for low noise amplifier.

10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUs Added the maximum output power supportedby the RF modules.

10.2.1 GRFU Technical Specifications Modified power consumption of the GRFU.

10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs Added the maximum output power supportedby the RF modules.

10.3.3 RRU3804 Technical Specifications Added specifications of the RRU3804 (AC)working in the 850 MHz frequency band.

10.3.30 RRU3841 Technical Specifications Modified the combination of ports fortransmitting RF signals when the RRU3841uses the 1T2R, 2T2R, and 2T4Rconfigurations, respectively.

10.3.22 RRU3942 Technical Specifications Modified the data in the Output power ofRRU3942 (1900 MHz, UL MSR) table.





8

06 (2012-11-10)

This is issue 06.




2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family Optimized figures and descriptions.

4.1.2 RFU Modified the hybrid configuration rule forradio frequency (RF) modules.

4.1.3 RRU Modified the hybrid configuration rule for RFmodules.

4.2 BTS3900 Modified the maximum configurations of aBTS3900 using RFUs and RRUs and detailedthe configurations based on the type of theconfigured cabinet.

4.3 BTS3900L Modified the maximum configurations of aBTS3900L using RFUs and RRUs anddetailed the configurations based on the typeof the configured cabinet.

4.4 BTS3900A l Removed description about theBTS3900A (Ver.D1) cabinets, andrenamed the BTS3900A (Ver.D2)cabinets BTS3900A (Ver.D).

l Modified the maximum configurations ofa BTS3900A using RFUs and RRUs anddetailed the configurations based on thetype of the configured cabinet.

4.5 BTS3900AL Modified the maximum configurations of asingle-mode BTS3900AL using RFUs andRRUs and the maximum configurations of adual-mode BTS3900AL using RFUs andRRUs.

4.6 DBS3900 l Removed description about the APM30H(Ver.D1) and TMC11H (Ver.D1)cabinets.

l Renamed the APM30H (Ver.D2) andTMC11H (Ver.D2) cabinets APM30H(Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.D),respectively.

10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUs Modified the RET antenna support capabilityof each type of RFUs and specified whethereach of them complies with AISG1.1.




9


10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs Modified the RET antenna support capabilityof each type of RRUs and specified whethereach of them complies with AISG1.1.

10.2.10 CRFUd Technical Specifications Added power consumption for the whole basestation.

10.2.11 LRFU Technical Specifications Added power consumption for the whole basestation.

10.2.12 LRFUe Technical Specifications Added power consumption for the whole basestation.

10.3.6 RRU3808 Technical Specifications Added power consumption for the whole basestation when RRU3808s work in LTE mode.

10.3.23 RRU3201 Technical Specifications Added power consumption for the whole basestation.









The following note is added to the standardswith which the BTS3900 complies with: TheBTS3900 complies with the followingstandards. If interference exists because theBTS3900 is installed near antennas or otherradio receive devices, you are advised toextend the distance between them or adjustthe location and direction of antennas.




10



The following note is added to the standardswith which the BTS3900L complies with:The BTS3900L complies with the followingstandards. If interference exists because theBTS3900L is installed near antennas or otherradio receive devices, you are advised toextend the distance between them or adjustthe location and direction of antennas.


l Removed description about theBTS3900A (Ver.D1) cabinets, andrenamed the BTS3900A (Ver.D2)cabinets BTS3900A (Ver.D).

l Added the heat dissipation capability ofthe BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A(Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D)cabinets.

l The following note is added to thestandards with which the BTS3900Acomplies with: The BTS3900A complieswith the following standards. Ifinterference exists because theBTS3900A is installed near antennas orother radio receive devices, you areadvised to extend the distance betweenthem or adjust the location and directionof antennas.

10.5.4 BTS3900AL EngineeringSpecifications

l Added the heat dissipation capability ofthe BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.

l The following note is added to thestandards with which the BTS3900ALcomplies with: The BTS3900ALcomplies with the following standards. Ifinterference exists because theBTS3900AL is installed near antennas orother radio receive devices, you areadvised to extend the distance betweenthem or adjust the location and directionof antennas.

10.5.5 DBS3900 EngineeringSpecifications

The following note is added to the standardswith which the DBS3900 complies with: TheDBS3900 complies with the followingstandards. If interference exists because theDBS3900 is installed near antennas or otherradio receive devices, you are advised toextend the distance between them or adjustthe location and direction of antennas.




11


10.5.6 BTS3900C EngineeringSpecifications

l Added the heat dissipation capability ofthe BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet.

l The following note is added to thestandards with which the BTS3900Ccomplies with: The BTS3900C complieswith the following standards. Ifinterference exists because theBTS3900C is installed near antennas orother radio receive devices, you areadvised to extend the distance betweenthem or adjust the location and directionof antennas.


05 (2012-09-15)

This is issue 05.






4.1.1 BBU3900 Deleted the LBBPb.

4.1.2 RFU l Modified the limitations on using RFUstogether with cabinets.

l Added the hybrid configuration rule toradio frequency (RF) modules.

4.1.3 RRU l Added description about the RRU3824and RRU3826.

l Modified the limitations on using RRUstogether with cabinets.

l Added the hybrid configuration rule toradio frequency (RF) modules.

4.2 BTS3900 Added description about the BTS3900(Ver.D) cabinet.

4.3 BTS3900L Added description about the BTS3900L(Ver.D) cabinet.




12


4.4 BTS3900A Added description about the BTS3900A(Ver.D1) and BTS3900A (Ver.D2) cabinets.

4.6 DBS3900 Added description about the Ver.D seriescabinets.

8.1 GBTS CPRI-based Topologies l Removed MRFU V3 modules.l Added specifications for CPRI ports on

the UBRI board.

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies Added specifications for CPRI ports on theRRU3824 and RRU3826.

8.4.2 CPRI Specifications Removed MRFU V3 modules.

Commissioning Mode Optimized the MBTS Commissioningmode table.

10.2.1 GRFU Technical Specifications Added power consumption for GRFU V2modules if these modules work with theBTS3900AL cabinet.

10.2.3 WRFU Technical Specifications Added the Power Backup DurationEstimated Based on Typical PowerConsumption of New Batteries (Hours)column to the Power consumption table.

10.3.3 RRU3804 Technical Specifications Added the Power Backup DurationEstimated Based on Typical PowerConsumption of New Batteries (Hours)column to the Power consumption ofDBS3900 with RRU3804 (AC) and Powerconsumption of BTS3900C with RRU3804(DC) tables.

10.3.5 RRU3806 Technical Specifications Added the Power Backup DurationEstimated Based on Typical PowerConsumption of New Batteries (Hours)column to the Power consumption ofDBS3900 with RRU3806 (AC) and Powerconsumption of BTS3900C with RRU3806(DC) tables.

10.3.14 RRU3801E TechnicalSpecifications

Added the Power Backup DurationEstimated Based on Typical PowerConsumption of New Batteries (Hours)column to the Power consumption ofDBS3900 with RRU3801E (AC) and Powerconsumption of BTS3900C withRRU3801E (DC) tables.




13



l Added engineering specifications for theBTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet.

l Modified the surge protectionspecifications of DC power supply ports.


l Added engineering specifications for theBTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet.

l Modified the surge protectionspecifications of DC power supply ports.


Added engineering specifications for theBTS3900A (Ver.D1) and BTS3900A(Ver.D2) cabinets.


l Modified the weight of the BTS3900C(Ver.C) cabinet.

l Modified the surge protectionspecifications of DC power supply portson a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet.


04 (2012-08-05)

This is issue 04.




About This Document For the BTS3900C, added an MBTS versionin the column Product Version.

2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family Classified the BTS3900C as an MBTSmember.

4.1.1 BBU3900 For the UTRPb4, LTE is removed fromSupported Mode.

4.1.3 RRU For the RRU3942, added UL to the columnSupported Mode.

4.7 BTS3900C Added description about the BTS3900C(Ver.C) cabinet.

IP-based Co-Transmission Removed description about the UTRPb4(LTE).




14


5.4.2 Logical Structure of a Dual-ModeBase Station

l Added UL to Working Mode of RFModules for the UL scenario.

l Added RXU (UL) to Logical structureof a dual-mode base station (UL).

5.4.3 Logical Structure of a Triple-ModeBase Station

l Added UL to Working Mode of RFModules.

l Added RXU (UL) to Logical structureof a triple-mode base station (GU+L)with BBU interconnection and Logicalstructure of a triple-mode base station(GU+UL) with BBU interconnection.

9.3.2 eNodeB Operation & MaintenanceFunctions

Added description about board-in-cabinettransportation.

9.4.3 Maintenance Between Modes Updated the table Maintenance operationsthat may affect services of other modes.

10.2.10 CRFUd Technical Specifications l Modified the receiver sensitivity.l Changed the upper limit for the total

bandwidth between the maximumfrequency and the minimum frequency ofthe spectrums for two carriers from 40MHz to 45 MHz.

10.3.28 RRU3229 Technical Specifications Modified dimensions.

10.2.11 LRFU Technical Specifications Removed description about the AWSfrequency band.

10.3.22 RRU3942 Technical Specifications Added UL-related specifications.

10.3.24 RRU3203 Technical Specifications Modified weights.


For LTE, removed UTRPb4 informationfrom the column Transmission Port.


Added specifications for the BTS3900C(Ver.C) cabinet.


03 (2012-06-29)

This is issue 03.

Compared with 02 (2012-06-20), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 10.2.6 WRFUe Technical Specifications




15

Compared with 02 (2012-06-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:


4.1.1 BBU3900 Added the USCUb14 and USCUb22.

4.1.2 RFU Added the WRFUe.

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies Added specifications for CPRI ports on theWRFUe.

10.3.22 RRU3942 Technical Specifications Updated the table Output power ofRRU3942 (850/1900 MHz, GU MSR, 40 W+ 80 W).

Compared with 02 (2012-06-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2012-06-20)This is issue 02.

Compared with 01 (2012-04-25), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with 01 (2012-04-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:


4.1.1 BBU3900 Optimized the description.

7.1 GBTS Transport Network Topologies Added the networking with IP over E1/T1.

IP-based Co-Transmission Optimized the figures.

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies Removed the Number of Cells Supported(Without MIMO or Four Antennas)column from the CPRI port specificationsof the WBBP board table.

8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies Modified the specifications of CPRI ports.

8.4 MBTS CPRI-based Topologies l Modified the number of cascading levelssupported by the CPRI MUX topology.

l Modified the Number of LTE CellsSupported when the CPRI data rate is 4.9Gbit/s.


Updated GSM capacity.




16


10.2.7 MRFU Technical Specifications l For the MRFU V1: modified the receiversensitivity when it works in LTE mode.

l For the MRFU V2: removed the receiversensitivity when it works in UMTS modeand operates in the 1800 MHz frequencyband; modified the receiver sensitivitywhen it works in LTE mode.

10.2.8 MRFUd Technical Specifications Modified the receiver sensitivity when itworks in UMTS mode and operates in the1800 MHz frequency band; modified thereceiver sensitivity when it works in LTEmode.

10.2.9 MRFUe Technical Specifications l Modified the receiver sensitivity when itworks in UMTS mode and operates in the1800 MHz frequency band; modified thereceiver sensitivity when it works in LTEmode.

l Updated the Output power of MRFUe(900/1800 MHz, GL MSR) table.

10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs Updated the operating environment standardsfor RRUs.

10.3.15 RRU3908 Technical Specifications l For the RRU3908 V1: modified thereceiver sensitivity when it works in LTEmode; added the power consumptionwhen it operates in the 1800 MHzfrequency band.

l For the RRU3908 V2: modified thereceiver sensitivity when it works in GSMmode and operates in the 850 MHzfrequency band; modified the receiversensitivity when it works in LTE mode;updated the Output power of RRU3908V2 (850/900 MHz, GU MSR) table.

10.3.16 RRU3926 Technical Specifications l Modified the receiver sensitivity when itworks in UMTS mode and operates in the1800 MHz frequency band.

l Added the note "hardware ready" to radiofrequency (RF) modules that support fiveor six UMTS carriers.

l Added the power consumption.




17


10.3.17 RRU3928 Technical Specifications Modified the receiver sensitivity when itworks in UMTS mode and operates in the1800 MHz frequency band; modified thereceiver sensitivity when it works in LTEmode.

10.3.18 RRU3929 Technical Specifications Modified the receiver sensitivity when itworks in UMTS mode and operates in the1800 MHz frequency band; modified thereceiver sensitivity when it works in LTEmode.

10.3.22 RRU3942 Technical Specifications l Added specifications when it operates inthe 850 MHz frequency band.

l Modified the receiver sensitivity when itworks in UMTS mode and operates in the1800 MHz frequency band; modified thereceiver sensitivity when it works in LTEmode.

l Updated the Output power of RRU3942(850/1900 MHz, single-mode, 40 W + 80W) table.

l Modified the power consumption.

10.3.30 RRU3841 Technical Specifications l Updated the output power.l Updated the environmental specifications

of an RRU3841.

Compared with 01 (2012-04-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2012-04-25)This is issue 01.

Compared with Draft B (2012-03-20), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with Draft B (2012-03-20), this issue incorporates the following changes:


4.1.3 RRU Removed UL from Applicable Mode for theRRU3942.

4.6 DBS3900 Optimized the description.




18


5.4.2 Logical Structure of a Dual-ModeBase Station

l Adjusted the table Typical scenarios fora dual-mode base station.

l Removed RXU (UL) from Logicalstructure of a dual-mode base station(UL).

5.4.3 Logical Structure of a Triple-ModeBase Station

l Removed UL from Working Mode of RFModules.

l Removed RXU (UL) from Logicalstructure of a triple-mode base station(GU+L) with BBU interconnection andLogical structure of a triple-mode basestation (GU+UL) with BBUinterconnection.

6.3 eNodeB Clock Synchronization Modes Added the note: When the Clock WorkingMode is set to AUTO(Auto), it does not takeeffect on an eNodeB, and each eNodeB canbe configured with only one type of externalclock source.

6.4 MBTS Clock Synchronization Modes Added the note: In an MBTS, the ClockWorking Mode cannot be set to AUTO(Auto), and each SiteUnit can be configuredwith only one type of external clock source.

6.4.2 Common Reference Clock Mode Optimized the description.

TDM-based Co-Transmission Changed the title to TDM-based co-transmission.

IP-based Co-Transmission Modified the description about co-transmission through backplaneinterconnection. Added the figure IP-basedco-transmission (Single BBU, GUbackplane interconnection), the figure IP-based co-transmission (Single BBU, ULbackplane interconnection), and the figureIP-based co-transmission (BBUinterconnection).

9.1.2 GBTS Operation & MaintenanceFunctions

Added the note: The security of the USBloading port is ensured by encryption.

9.3.2 eNodeB Operation & MaintenanceFunctions

Added the note: The security of the USBloading port is ensured by encryption.




19


Common Part Management Added the notes:l For the UTRPc board, the SiteUnit

priority descends from eNodeB, toNodeB, and then to GBTS.

l Loading control rights cannot take effectand none of the SiteUnits of an MBTSmanages software of common parts if thefollowing configuration conflicts ariseand each SiteUnit does not work inengineering mode.

Software Upgrade l Added the note: The security of the USBloading port is ensured by encryption.

l Added the note: During a one-sidedupgrade, start event of common parts canbe reported only by the SiteUnit that isbeing upgraded.

Commissioning Mode Added the note: The security of the USBloading port is ensured by encryption.

Alarm Management l Added the description: Alarms reportedby unilaterally managed common partsmay affect the operation of otherSiteUnits. On the Browse CurrentAlarm tab page, the AdditionalInformation column lists theRAT_INFO and AFFECTED_INFOinformation. With the information,maintenance personnel can know themode information about the base stationwhere the alarm is generated and themodes that are affected by the alarm.

l Added the Browse Current Alarm tabpage of the M2000.




20


9.4.3 Maintenance Between Modes l Modified the operation impact forResetting a board and Resetting a boardin power-off mode: When the CPRI-based topology on an MBTS uses thedual-star topology, services of the othermodes may be interrupted if one maincontrol board is abnormally reset or theboard is removed and inserted again.

l Added the operation impact for Resettinga base station: During an MBTS reset,start event of common parts can beobserved by the related managingSiteUnits.


Updated the maximum number of UEs inRRC_CONNECTED mode per eNodeB.

10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUs Added the size and weight of the RFU.

10.2.5 WRFUd Technical Specifications Updated the output power.

10.2.12 LRFUe Technical Specifications Updated the power consumption.

10.3.22 RRU3942 Technical Specifications Removed UL-related specifications.

10.3.23 RRU3201 Technical Specifications Updated the receiver sensitivity.

10.3.30 RRU3841 Technical Specifications l Updated the receiver sensitivity.l Updated the weight.

Compared with Draft B (2012-03-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft B (2012-03-20)

This is the release of Draft B.

Compared with Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:


4.1.3 RRU Removed RRU3223.

8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies Removed RRU3223 specifications.

8.4 MBTS CPRI-based Topologies Updated the specifications of the CPRI MUXtopology.


Updated the operating temperatures andsurge protection specifications.




21


10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUs Added receiver sensitivity and powerconsumption specifications for LTE.

10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs Added receiver sensitivity and powerconsumption specifications for LTE.

10.5 Engineering Specifications Updated the input power values, weights,operating temperatures and surge protectionspecifications.

Compared with Draft A (2012-02-10), this issue excludes the following topic:

l RRU3223 technical specifications

Draft A (2012-02-10)

This is the release of Draft A.

This issue includes the following new topics, compared with issue 05 (2011-11-30) of MBTSV100R004, issue 07 (2011-11-30) of GSM V100R013C00, issue 07 (2011-11-30) of WCDMAV200R013C00, and issue 03 (2011-12-24) of LTE V100R004C00:

l 2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family

l 4 About 3900 Series Base Stations

l 10.1 Technical Specifications of the BBU3900

l 10.2.10 CRFUd Technical Specifications






l RRU3223 technical specifications

l 10.5 Engineering Specifications

l 11.1 GBTS Reliability

Compared with issue 05 (2011-11-30) of MBTS V100R004, this issue incorporates the followingchanges:


5.4 MBTS Logical Structure l Added the description about BBUinterconnection and inter-BBU SDR.

l Added the description about logicalstructures when BBU interconnection isapplied.




22


6.4 MBTS Clock Synchronization Modes l Optimized the description.l Added the description about the common

reference clock mode when BBUinterconnection is applied.

IP-based Co-Transmission l Optimized the description.l Added the description about IP-based co-

transmission through backplaneinterconnection.

8.4 MBTS CPRI-based Topologies l Added the figure for the dual-startopology with inter-BBU SDR applied.

l Added the description about the CPRIMUX topology.

l Added the number of supported cellswhen different CPRI data rates are used.

10.2.7 MRFU Technical Specifications Updated the supported modes, frequencybands, and RF specifications.

10.2.8 MRFUd Technical Specifications Updated RF specifications.

10.2.9 MRFUe Technical Specifications Updated the supported modes, frequencybands, and RF specifications.

10.3.15 RRU3908 Technical Specifications Updated the supported modes, frequencybands, and RF specifications.

10.3.17 RRU3928 Technical Specifications Updated RF specifications.

10.3.18 RRU3929 Technical Specifications Updated the supported modes, frequencybands, and RF specifications.

Common Part Management l Optimized the description.l Added the description about mode

priority.

Configuration Management Updated the initial configuration methods.

Software Upgrade Updated the upgrade scenarios.

Commissioning Mode Updated the commissioning methods.

Alarm Management l Optimized the description.l Updated the alarm management methods.

Mode Evolution Updated typical evolution scenarios.

9.4.3 Maintenance Between Modes Added the operations: modifying/removing/adding control links to the maintenanceoperations performed at all SiteUnits.




23


11.4 MBTS Reliability Updated the description about reliability.

Compared with issue 07 (2011-11-30) of GSM V100R013C00, this issue incorporates thefollowing changes:


6.1 GBTS Clock Synchronization Modes Optimized the GBTS clock synchronizationmode.

Compared with issue 07 (2011-11-30) of WCDMA V200R013C00, this issue incorporates thefollowing changes:


5.2 NodeB Logical Structure l Added the description about BBUinterconnection.

l Added the description about logicalstructures when BBU interconnection isapplied.

6.2 NodeB Clock Synchronization Modes Optimized the NodeB clock synchronizationmode.

7.2 NodeB Transport Network Topologies l Optimized the description.l Added restrictions to transport network

topologies when BBU interconnection isapplied.

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies l Optimized the description.l Added the description about the inter-

board cold backup ring topology.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-12-24) of LTE V100R004C00, this issue incorporates thefollowing changes:


5.3 eNodeB Logical Structure Removed the logical structure of the TDDeNodeB.

6.3 eNodeB Clock Synchronization Modes Optimized the eNodeB clock synchronizationmode.




24


8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies l Optimized the description about CPRI-based topologies.

l Removed the description about TDD-specific CPRI-based topologies.

l Added specifications for CPRI ports.

Compared with issue 05 (2011-11-30) of MBTS V100R004, this issue excludes the followingtopics:

l Overview

l MBTS products

l MBTS hardware configurations

l MBTS surge protection specifications

Compared with issue 07 (2011-11-30) of GSM V100R013C00, this issue excludes the followingtopics:

l RXU Configuration

l Logical Structure of the BBU

l BBU Transmission Ports

l Logical Structure of the RRU

l Logical Structure of the RFU

l Antenna System

Compared with issue 07 (2011-11-30) of WCDMA V200R013C00, this issue excludes thefollowing topics:

l Logical Structure of the BBU3900

l Logical Structure of the RRU

l Logical Structure of the RFU

l Logical Structure of the RHUB3808

l Logical Structure of the pRRU3801

l Hardware Configurations of the NodeB

l NodeB Configuration Management

Compared with issue 03 (2011-12-24) of LTE V100R004C00, this issue excludes the followingtopics:

l Environmental Monitoring Principles of the eNodeB

l Functions of the eNodeB

l Typical Hardware Configurations of the eNodeB

l Technical Specifications for RRU3232




25

2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family

Huawei 3900 series base stations adopt a uniform modular design for multiple radio networksystems. These base stations support the co-existence of devices serving different modes at thesame site, sharing of base station resources, and the unified operation and maintenance method.With these merits, operators' requirement of evolution to multi-mode base stations becomesfeasible.

Figure 2-1 shows the 3900 series base station product family.

Figure 2-1 3900 series base station product family

3900 series base stations can be classified into single- and multi-mode base stations based onthe mode that they support.

l Single-mode base stations: One such base station provides only one type of the GSM,UMTS, and LTE services.

l Multi-mode base stations: One such base station provides two or all three types of theGSM, UMTS, and LTE services. Multi-mode base stations are further classified into thefollowing:

– Dual-mode base stations: One such base station provides two types of the GSM,UMTS, and LTE services, such as GSM and UMTS (GU), GSM and LTE (GL), orUMTS and LTE (UL) services.

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family


26

– Triple-mode base stations: One such base station provides all three types of the GSM,UMTS, and LTE (GUL) services.

Based on application scenarios and installed hardware, 3900 series base stations can be classifiedinto indoor macro base stations (BTS3900 and BTS3900L), outdoor macro base stations(BTS3900A and BTS3900AL), a distributed base station (DBS3900), micro base stations(BTS3900C, BTS3900E, and BTS3902E), and a Pico base station (BTS3900B). Figure 2-2shows the appearance of all types of 3900 series base stations.

Figure 2-2 Appearance of all types of 3900 series base stations

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 2 3900 Series Base Station Product Family


27

3 Network Structure

About This Chapter

This section describes the position of a 3900 series base station in a network.

3.1 GBTS in the NetworkThe base station subsystem (BSS) consists of the base station controller (BSC), GSM basetransceiver station (GBTS), and operation and maintenance center (OMC). This sectiondescribes the position of the GBTS in the network and functions of each network element (NE).

3.2 NodeB in the NetworkThe radio access network (RAN) system consists of the NodeB, radio network controller (RNC),and operation and maintenance center (OMC). This section describes the position of NodeBsand functions of network elements (NEs).

3.3 eNodeB in the NetworkThe Long Term Evolution - System Architecture Evolution (LTE-SAE) system consists of theevolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) and evolved packet core (EPC).This section describes the position of E-UTRAN NodeBs (eNodeBs) and the functions ofnetwork elements (NEs).

3.4 MBTS in the NetworkThe SingleRAN system includes the multi-mode base station controller (MBSC), multi-modebase transceiver station (MBTS), and operation and maintenance center (OMC). This sectiondescribes the position of an MBTS in the network and functions of each network element (NE).

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 3 Network Structure


28

3.1 GBTS in the NetworkThe base station subsystem (BSS) consists of the base station controller (BSC), GSM basetransceiver station (GBTS), and operation and maintenance center (OMC). This sectiondescribes the position of the GBTS in the network and functions of each network element (NE).

GBTS in the network

Figure 3-1 shows the position of the GBTS in the network.

Figure 3-1 GBTS in the network

GBTS: GSM base transceiver station BSC: base station controller BSS: base station subsystem

MS: mobile station OMC: operation and maintenance center -

Functions of each NE are as follows:



29

GBTSControlled by the BSC, the GBTS is a base transceiver station that serves a cell. The GBTScommunicates with the BSC through the Abis interface, over which radio channels are converted,and communicates with MSs through the Um interface, over which user data and controllingsignals are transmitted and relevant control functions are implemented. The GBTS providesinterfaces for communicating with the BSC, manages radio resources, provides operation andmaintenance functions, and processes signaling.

BSCThe BSC manages radio resources and GBTSs, controls power and handovers, and performtraffic measurements.

OMCThe OMC includes the M2000, Configuration Management Express (CME), local maintenanceterminal (LMT), and site maintenance terminal (SMT). The OMC allows you to centrallymanage and maintain GBTSs and BSCs.

3.2 NodeB in the NetworkThe radio access network (RAN) system consists of the NodeB, radio network controller (RNC),and operation and maintenance center (OMC). This section describes the position of NodeBsand functions of network elements (NEs).

NodeB in the NetworkFigure 3-2 shows the position of NodeBs in the network.



30

Figure 3-2 NodeB in the network

NodeB: WCDMA base station RAN: radio access network RNC: radio network controller

OMC: operation and maintenance center UE: user equipment -

As shown in Figure 3-2, NodeBs communicate with the UEs, RNC, and OMC over differentinterfaces.

The functions of each NE are as follows:

NodeBAs a WCDMA base station, a NodeB consists of the wireless transceiver and basebandprocessing unit. The NodeB communicates with the RNC and UEs over the Iub interface andUu interface, respectively. It performs physical layer protocol processing, including frequencyspreading and despreading, modulation and demodulation, channel coding and decoding, andconversion between baseband and radio frequency (RF) signals.

RNCAn RNC performs radio resource control (RRC) on the establishment and removal of RRCconnections, handover, and macro diversity combining.



31

OMC

The OMC includes the M2000, Configuration Management Express (CME), and localmaintenance terminal (LMT). Users can use the OMC to centrally manage and maintain NodeBs.

3.3 eNodeB in the NetworkThe Long Term Evolution - System Architecture Evolution (LTE-SAE) system consists of theevolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) and evolved packet core (EPC).This section describes the position of E-UTRAN NodeBs (eNodeBs) and the functions ofnetwork elements (NEs).

eNodeB in the Network

Figure 3-3 shows the position of eNodeBs in the network.

Figure 3-3 eNodeB in the network

MME: mobility management entity S-GW: serving gateway UE: user equipment

As shown in Figure 3-3, an eNodeB is radio access equipment in the LTE-SAE system. One ormore eNodeBs constitute an E-UTRAN. An eNodeB communicates with a UE, another eNodeB,or the EPC through the Uu, X2, or S1 interface, respectively.

The following sections describe functions of each network element (NE).

eNodeB

An eNodeB has the following functions:



32

l Radio resource management, including radio bearer control, radio admission control,connection mobility control, and scheduling

l Packet compression and cipheringl Routing of user-plane data towards an S-GWl MME selectionl Scheduling and transmission of broadcast information and paging messagesl Measurement and measurement reporting configuration

MMEAn MME has the following functions:l Paging message distributionl Security controll Mobility management in idle model SAE bearer controll Ciphering and integrity protection of non-access stratum (NAS) signaling

S-GWAn S-GW has the following functions:l Termination of user-plane packets that are generated for paging reasonl Support for user-plane handovers caused by UE mobility

OMCThe operation and maintenance center (OMC) includes the M2000, Configuration ManagementExpress (CME), and local maintenance terminal (LMT). Users can use the OMC to manage andmaintain eNodeBs.

3.4 MBTS in the NetworkThe SingleRAN system includes the multi-mode base station controller (MBSC), multi-modebase transceiver station (MBTS), and operation and maintenance center (OMC). This sectiondescribes the position of an MBTS in the network and functions of each network element (NE).

MBTS in the networkFigure 3-4 shows the position of an MBTS in the network.



33

Figure 3-4 MBTS in the network

MBTS: multi-mode base transceiverstation

MBSC: multi-mode base stationcontroller

OMC: operation and maintenancecenter

MME: mobility management entity S-GW: serving gateway UE: user equipment

MS: mobile station - -

As shown in Figure 3-4, the MBTS communicates with the UE, MS, MBSC, MME or S-GWand OMC using different interfaces.

The following describes functions of each NE:

MBTS

The MBTS incorporates functions of the GBTS, NodeB and eNodeB. The MBTS is connectedto a network where GSM, UMTS, and LTE services co-exist as an independent NE. An MBTSconsists of multiple SiteUnits. Physically, each SiteUnit corresponds to the related boards andmodules. Logically, each SiteUnit corresponds to the related NE. As shown in Figure 3-4, theMBTS consists of three SiteUnits, which logically correspond to GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB,respectively. Physically, the three SiteUnits correspond to GSM boards and modules, UMTSboards and modules, and LTE boards and modules, respectively. In this technical description,SiteUnits in a triple-mode base station are GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB.



34

MBSCThe MBSC incorporates functions of the radio network controller (RNC) and base stationcontroller (BSC). The MBSC is connected to a network where GSM and UMTS services co-exist as an independent NE. The MBSC is connected to the GBTS and NodeB using the Abisand Iub interfaces, respectively.

MME/S-GWThe MME or S-GW is located in the evolved packet core (EPC) and is connected to the eNodeBusing the S1 interface.

OMCThe OMC includes the M2000, Configuration Management Express (CME), local maintenanceterminal (LMT), Service Maintenance Terminal (SMT), and so on. Users can use the OMC tocentrally manage and maintain MBTSs and MBSCs.



35

4 About 3900 Series Base Stations

About This Chapter

The 3900 series base stations include macro base stations (BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A,and BTS3900AL), a distributed base station (DBS3900), micro base stations (BTS3900C,BTS3900E, and BTS3902E), and a Pico base station (BTS3900B). Different types of basestations can be used in various scenarios to achieve fast deployment and low operatingexpenditure (OPEX). This technical description focuses on macro base stations, the distributedbase station DBS3900, and the micro base station BTS3900C. For a description of the othertypes of 3900 series base stations, see the production documentation of the base station inquestion.

4.1 Basic ModulesWith a modular design, 3900 series base stations consist of three basic modules: the BBU3900,radio frequency unit (RFU), and remote radio unit (RRU). Radio frequency (RF) modulesinclude RFUs and RRUs.

4.2 BTS3900As an indoor macro base station, the BTS3900 is characterized by a large capacity and smallsize and can be easily expanded.

4.3 BTS3900LAs an indoor macro base station, the BTS3900L is characterized by a large capacity and highintegration and can be easily expanded.

4.4 BTS3900AAs an outdoor macro base station, the BTS3900A is applicable to the outdoor centralizedinstallation scenario.

4.5 BTS3900ALAs an outdoor macro base station, the BTS3900AL is characterized by space saving and highintegration and can be easily evolved.

4.6 DBS3900As a distributed base station, the DBS3900 is applicable to installation scenarios where widecoverage is required or base station deployment is difficult.

4.7 BTS3900C

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 4 About 3900 Series Base Stations


36

The BTS3900C is a mini outdoor base station and applies to hot spots, tunnels, and borders.



37

4.1 Basic ModulesWith a modular design, 3900 series base stations consist of three basic modules: the BBU3900,radio frequency unit (RFU), and remote radio unit (RRU). Radio frequency (RF) modulesinclude RFUs and RRUs.

4.1.1 BBU3900The BBU3900 (BBU for short) is a baseband processing unit and centrally manages an entirebase station.

FunctionThe BBU provides the following functions:

l Centrally manages an entire base station in terms of operation and maintenance (O&M)and signaling processing, and provides the system clock.

l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals and provides common public radiointerface (CPRI) ports for communication with radio frequency (RF) modules.

l Provides ports for communication with environment monitoring devices, and receives andforwards signals from the environment monitoring devices.

l Provides physical ports for communication between a base station and the transportnetwork.

l Provides the O&M channel connecting a base station to the Operation and MaintenanceCenter (OMC).

Boards and modules in the BBUWith a case structure, the BBU can house different types of boards and modules, as shown inTable 4-1.

Table 4-1 Boards and modules in the BBU

Type

Function Board ApplicableMode

Remarks

Mainprocessingtransmissionunit

Transmits signals,manages an entirebase station,monitors powersupply situation,provides thereference clockand O&M ports.

GSM Transmission &Timing &Management Unit(GTMU) falls into thefollowing types:l GTMUl GTMUb

GSM Unless otherwisespecified, theGTMU in thisdocumentindicates theGTMU orGTMUb.

WCDMA MainProcessing &Transmission unit(WMPT)

UMTS N/A



38

Type


Remarks

LTE Main Processing& Transmission unit(LMPT)

LTE N/A

Universal MainProcessing &Transmission unit(UMPT) falls into thefollowing types:l UMPTa1l UMPTa2l UMPTa6l UMPTb1

l UMPTa1 andUMPTb1:UMTS

l UMPTa2 andUMPTa6: LTE

Unless otherwisespecified, theUMPT in thisdocumentindicates theUMPTa1,UMPTa2,UMPTa6, orUMPTb1. Whenrequired, * inUMPT (*) is usedto indicate theworking mode ofthe UMPT. Forexample, UMPT(UMTS).

Basebandprocessingboard

Processesbaseband signals.

WCDMA BaseBandProcessing Unit(WBBP) falls into thefollowing types:l WBBPal WBBPbl WBBPdl WBBPf

UMTS Unless otherwisespecified, theWBBP in thisdocumentindicates theWBBPa, WBBPb,WBBPd, orWBBPf.

LTE BaseBandProcessing Unit(LBBP) falls into thefollowing types:l LBBPcl LBBPd

LTE Unless otherwisespecified, theLBBP in thisdocumentindicates theLBBPc or LBBPd.

Universalbasebandradiointerfaceunit

Provides CPRI-extension-capableoptical orelectrical ports,and converge ordistribute CPRIsignals.

Universal BaseBandRadio InterfaceBoard (UBRI)

GSM N/A



39

Type


Remarks

Universalinterconnectedinterfaceunit

Makes two BBUsinterconnected forthe exchange ofcontrol andsynchronizationdata.

Universal inter-ConnectionInfrastructure Unit(UCIU)

GSM, UMTS(supported onlyby MBTSsworking inmultiple modes),and LTE(supported onlyby MBTSsworking inmultiple modes)

N/A

Universaltransmissionprocessingunit

Expandstransmissioncapabilities.

UniversalTransmissionProcessing unit(UTRP) falls into thefollowing types:

l UTRP2

l UTRP3

l UTRP4

l UTRP6

l UTRP9

l UTRPb4

l UTRPc

l UTRPa

l UTRPa,UTRP2,UTRP3,UTRP4,UTRP6, andUTRP9:UMTS

l UTRPb4:GSM

l UTRPc: GSM,UMTS, andLTE

Unless otherwisespecified, theUTRP in thisdocumentindicates theUTRP2, UTRP3,UTRP4, UTRP6,UTRP9, UTRPb4,or UTRPc. Whenrequired, * inUTRP (*) is usedto indicate theworking mode ofthe UTRP. Forexample, UTRP(UMTS).

Universalsatellitecardandclockunit

Provides ports toreceive GPS,RGPS, TOD,M-1PPS, andBITS signals.

Universal Satellitecard and Clock Unit(USCU) falls into thefollowing types:l USCUb11l USCUb12l USCUb14l USCUb21l USCUb22

l USCUb11:LTE

l USCUb12,USCUb14,andUSCUb22:GSM andUMTS

l USCUb21:GSM, UMTS,and LTE

Unless otherwisespecified, theUSCU in thisdocumentindicates theUSCUb11,USCUb12,USCUb14,USCUb21, orUSCUb21.



40

Type


Remarks

Lightningprotectionunit

Provides lightningprotection for E1/T1, FE, and drycontact signals.

l Universal E1/T1LightningProtection unit(UELP)

l Universal FELightningProtection unit(UFLP)

l Universal SignalLightningProtection unit 2(USLP2)

GSM, UMTS, andLTE

N/A

Powersupplymodule

Converts -48 VDC or +24 V DCinput power into+12 V DC.

Universal Power andEnvironmentInterface Unit(UPEU) falls into thefollowing types:l UPEUal UPEUbl UPEUcl UPEUd

GSM, UMTS, andLTE

Unless otherwisespecified, theUPEU in thisdocumentindicates theUPEUa, UPEUb,UPEUc, orUPEUd.

Universalenvironmentinterfaceunit

Sends informationaboutenvironmentmonitoringdevices and alarminformation to themain controlboard.

UniversalEnvironmentInterface Unit(UEIU)

GSM, UMTS, andLTE

N/A

Fanmodule

Controls the fanspeed, detects thefan temperature,and dissipate heatfor the BBU.

FAN falls into thefollowing types:l FANl FANc

GSM, UMTS, andLTE

Unless otherwisespecified, theFAN in thisdocumentindicates the FANor FANc.

For configurations principles and functions of boards and modules, see the DBS3900 HardwareDescription, which also provides information about ports, indicators, and DIP switches on theseboards and modules.

The BBU supports plug-and-play and therefore it can be configured as required.

l When equipped with boards of one mode, the BBU serves this mode.



41

l When equipped with boards of two different modes, the BBU serves any two modes amongGSM, UMTS, and LTE at the same time, achieving dual-mode application, such as GU,GL, or UL.

l The use of two BBUs achieves triple-mode application.

Currently, only up to two BBUs can be used in a base station at the same time.

4.1.2 RFURadio frequency units (RFUs) are used in a macro base station to perform modulation,demodulation, data processing and power amplification of RF and baseband signals, and conductvoltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection.

Type

Table 4-2 lists RFU types.

Table 4-2 RFU types

Module Applicable Mode

DRFU GSM

GRFU GSM

WRFU UMTS

WRFUa UMTS

WRFUd UMTS

WRFUe UMTS

CRFUd LTE

LRFU LTE

LRFUe LTE

MRFU GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, and GL

MRFUd GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, and GL

MRFUe GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, and GL

For functions and the logical structure of an RFU, see the Hardware Description of the basestation in question. This document also provides details about ports and indicators on the RFU.For technical specifications of an RFU, see 10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUs.

Cabinets That Can Work with RFUs

Restrictions on using RFUs together with cabinets are as follows:



42

l The WRFUd, WRFUe, CRFUd, MRFUd, and MRFUe must be used together with Ver.Ccabinets, Ver.D cabinets, and BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinets.

l For other types of RFUs, there are no restrictions on which types of base stations can beused with.

Hybrid Configuration RuleYou can use two RFUs to expand system capacity or to achieve mode evolution.

Table 4-3 provides the hybrid configuration rule for RFUs.

NOTE

In the following table, nTmR indicates that the related RF module has n transmit channels and m receivechannels.

Table 4-3 Hybrid configuration rule for RFUs

Differentfrequency bands

All types of RFUs support hybrid configuration.

Samefrequencyband

Different sectors

All types of RFUs support hybrid configuration.

Samesector

For RFUs supporting the GSM mode:l All types of RFUs except DRFUs support hybrid configuration.l When different types of RFUs are used together, you must upgrade

the software of the base station, base station controller, and CME tothe required version.

l When an MRFUd is used together with a 1T2R RFU of another type:

– The MRFUd does not work with the RFU to achieve the inter-module radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping function.

– The MRFUd does not work with the RFU to achieve the dual-PApower sharing function. PA stands for power amplifier.

l When a GRFU is used together with an MRFU or MRFUe:

– If the MRFU or MRFUe is working in GSM mode, it can workwith the GRFU to achieve the inter-module RF frequencyhopping and dual-PA power sharing functions. In this case, theMRFUe supports a maximum of 6 carriers, and the differencebetween the number of carriers on the GRFU and the number ofcarriers on the MRFUe must not exceed 1.

– If the MRFU or MRFUe is working in GU or GL mode, it cannotwork with the GRFU to achieve the inter-module RF frequencyhopping or dual-PA power sharing function.

Figure 4-1 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode basestation that is upgraded from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station.



43

For RFUs supporting the UMTS mode:l Two 1T2R RFUs can be used together.l Single-mode RF modules cannot be used together with multi-mode

RF modules.l When multiple multi-mode RF modules are used together, UMTS

carriers must be configured on one module.l When MRFU V1 or MRFU V2 modules are used together with other

types of RFUs, the software of the base station must be upgraded tothe required version if the DC and MIMO functions are to besupported across these modules.

Figure 4-2 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a base station whosecapacity is to be expanded.

For RFUs supporting the LTE mode:l For RFUs working in LTE mode: Two 1T2R RFUs of the same type

and can work together to support the 2T configuration. Two 2T2RRFUs of the same type can work together to support the 4Tconfiguration.

l For RFUs working in multi-mode: Two 1T2R RFUs can worktogether to support the 2T configuration.

l When different types of RFUs are used together, you must upgradethe software of the base station to the required version.

Figure 4-3 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode basestation that is upgraded from a GO single-mode base station.



44

Figure 4-1 RFU hybrid configuration (scenario 1)

l Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S8/8/8. Each sector has two GRFU V2modules that operate in the 1800 MHz frequency band, and each module supports fourcarriers.

l After mode evolution, the configuration changes to GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3 x 15 MHz, andone GRFU V2 module in each sector is replaced by one MRFUd that operates in the 1800MHz frequency band. In addition, this MRFUd works in GL mode and supports 4 GSMcarriers and 1 LTE carrier.



45


l Before capacity expansion, the configuration is UMTS 3 x 2. Each sector has one WRFUwhose maximum transmit power is 40 W and this WRFU supports 2 UMTS carriers.

l After capacity expansion, the configuration changes to UMTS 3 x 6. In each sector, oneWRFU whose maximum transmit power is 80 W is added. Each WRFU supports fourUMTS carriers.



46


l Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S4/4/4. Each sector has one MRFU V1module that supports four GSM carriers.

l After mode evolution, the configuration changes to LTE 3 x 5 MHz. In each sector, oneMRFU V2 module is added. This MRFU V2 module works together with the MRFU V1module in the same cell to support one LTE carrier.

4.1.3 RRURemote radio units (RRUs) are used in a distributed base station to perform modulation,demodulation, data processing, and power amplification of baseband and radio frequency (RF)signals, and conduct voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection.

Type

Table 4-4 lists RRU types.

Table 4-4 RRU types


RRU3004 GSM



47


RRU3008 GSM

RRU3804 UMTS

RRU3805 UMTS

RRU3806 UMTS

RRU3808 UMTS and LTE

RRU3824 UMTS

RRU3826 UMTS

RRU3828 UMTS

RRU3829 UMTS

RRU3832 UMTS, LTE, and UL

RRU3838 UMTS

RRU3839 UMTS

RRU3801E UMTS

RRU3201 LTE

RRU3203 LTE

RRU3220 LTE

RRU3221 LTE

RRU3222 LTE

RRU3229 LTE

RRU3240 LTE

RRU3841 LTE

RRU3908 GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, and GL

RRU3926 GSM, UMTS, and GU


RRU3929 GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, GL, and UL



RRU3939 GSM, LTE, and GL

RRU3942 GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, GL, and UL



48

For functions of an RRU, see the RRU Hardware Description of the RRU. This document alsoprovides details about ports and indicators on the RRU. For technical specifications of an RRU,see 10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs.

Cabinets That Can Work with RRUsRestrictions on using RRUs together with cabinets are as follows:l The RRU3229, RRU3841, RRU3929, RRU3829, and RRU3942 must be used with Ver.C

and Ver.D cabinets.l For other types of RRUs, there are no restrictions on which types of cabinets can be used

with.

Hybrid Configuration RuleYou can use two RRUs to expand system capacity or to achieve mode evolution.

Table 4-5 provides the hybrid configuration rule for RRUs.

NOTE

In the following table, nTmR indicates that the related RF module has n transmit channels and m receivechannels.

Table 4-5 Hybrid configuration rule for RRUs

Differentfrequency bands

All types of RRUs support hybrid configuration.

Samefrequencyband

Different sectors

All types of RRUs support hybrid configuration.

Samesector

For RRUs supporting the GSM mode:l All types of RRUs except the RRU3004 support hybrid

configuration.l In the same subsite, only RRU3008 V1 and RRU3008 V2 modules

can be used together, and only RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2modules can be used together.

Figure 4-4 shows RRU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode basestation that is upgraded from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station.

For RRUs supporting the UMTS mode:l Two 1T2R RRUs can be used together.l Single-mode RF modules cannot be used together with multi-mode

RF modules.l When multiple multi-mode RF modules are used together, UMTS

carriers must be configured on one module.Figure 4-5 shows RRU hybrid configuration for a base station whosecapacity is to be expanded.



49

For RRUs supporting the LTE mode:l For RRUs working in LTE mode: Two 1T2R RRUs of the same type

and can work together to support the 2T configuration. Two 2T2RRRUs of the same type can work together to support the 4Tconfiguration.

l For RRUs working in multi-mode: Two 1T2R RRUs can worktogether to support the 2T configuration.

l When different types of RRUs are used together, you must upgradethe software of the base station to the required version.

Figure 4-4 RRU hybrid configuration (scenario 1)

l Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S6/6/6. Each sector has one RRU3908V1 module that operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band, and each module supports sixGSM carriers.

l After mode evolution, the configuration changes to GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3 x 20 MHz. Ineach sector, one RRU3929 that operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band is added. Inaddition, this RRU3929 works in GL mode and supports 4 GSM carriers and 1 LTE carrier.



50

Figure 4-5 RRU hybrid configuration (scenario 2)

l Before capacity expansion, the configuration is UMTS 3 x 4. Each sector has one RRU3804that supports four UMTS carriers.

l After capacity expansion, the configuration changes to UMTS 3 x 8. In each sector, oneRRU3806 that supports four UMTS carriers is added.

4.1.4 AAUThe AAU incorporates the functions of the radio frequency (RF) and antenna systems.

TypeThe following table lists AAU types.

Table 4-6 AAU types


AAU3902 UMTS

For information about the functions and logical structure of an AAU3902, see AAU3902Hardware Descripiton. This document also provides details about ports and indicators on theAAU3902. For information about the technical specifications of the AAU, see 10.4 TechnicalSpecifications of an AAU. AAU is short for active antenna unit.



51

4.2 BTS3900As an indoor macro base station, the BTS3900 is characterized by a large capacity and smallsize and can be easily expanded.

Cabinet StructureA BTS3900 uses either of the following cabinets:

l BTS3900 (Ver.B): supports -48 V DC, +24 V DC, 220 V AC, or 110 V AC power input.l BTS3900 (Ver.C): supports -48 V DC, 220 V AC, or 110 V AC power input.l BTS3900 (Ver.D): supports -48 V DC or 220 V AC power input.

Different power supply modules are installed in the cabinet when different power input is used.Figure 4-6, Figure 4-7, and Figure 4-8 show the internal structure of a BTS3900 (Ver.B)cabinet, a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, and a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet when -48 V DC powerinput is used, respectively.

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet



52

Figure 4-7 Internal structure of a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet

Figure 4-8 Internal structure of a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet

Typical Configurations of a Single CabinetTable 4-7 and Table 4-8 list the typical configurations of a single-mode BTS3900 using onecabinet and those of a multi-mode BTS3900 using one cabinet, respectively.



53

NOTE

l The following configurations assume that each cell uses one pair of dual-polarized antennas.

l In the Typical Configuration column

l SA/A/A indicates that the GSM network is configured with three cells and each cell has A TRX.

l B x C indicates that the UMTS network is configured with B cells and each cell has C carrier.

l D x E MHz indicates that the LTE network is configured with D cells and each cell is configured withE MHz bandwidth.

l F x G MIMO indicates that each cell has F transmit channels and G receive channels.

l In the Output Power of Each Carrier (W) column, H x I W indicates that there are H transmit channelsand each transmit channel's output power is I W.

Table 4-7 Typical configurations of a single-mode BTS3900 using one cabinet

Mode TypicalConfiguration

Module Output Power ofEach Carrier (W)

GSM S4/4/4 6 DRFUs 20 W (900 MHz)/18W (1800 MHz)

S12/12/12 6 GRFUs 12 W

S12/12/12 6 MRFUs 12 W

S12/12/12 6 MRFUe modules 20 W

S8/8/8 + S8/8/8 3 MRFUd + 3MRFUd modules

20 W (900 MHz) +20 W (1800 MHz)

UMTS 3 x 4 3 WRFUs 20 W

3 x 4 (MIMO) 3 WRFUd modules 30 W (2 x 15 W)

3 x 4 3 MRFUs 20 W

3 x 4 (MIMO) 3 MRFUd modules 40 W (2 x 20 W)

LTE 3 x 20 MHz (2 x 2MIMO)

6 MRFUs/3 MRFUdmodules

80 W (2 x 40 W)/120W (2 x 60 W)

3 x 5 MHz/10 MHz/15 MHz/20 MHz (2 x2 MIMO)

3 LRFUs 80 W (2 x 40 W)

3 x 5 MHz/10 MHz/15 MHz/20 MHz(DL 4 x 2 MIMO/UL4Rx Diversity)

6 LRFUs 160 W (4 x 40 W)



54

Table 4-8 Typical configurations of a multi-mode BTS3900 using one cabinet



GU GSM S4/4/4 +UMTS 3 x 2

3 MRFUd modules 20 W + 40 W

GL GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3x 20 MHz (MIMO)

3 MRFUd (GSM) + 3MRFUd (LTE)modules

20 W + 80 W (2 x 40W)

UL UMTS 3 x 2 (MIMO)+ LTE 3 x 20 MHz (2x 2 MIMO)

3 MRFUd (UMTS) +3 MRFUd (LTE)modules

80 W (2 x 40 W) +120 W (2 x 60 W)

Configurations of a BTS3900 Using RFUs and RRUsWith the -48 V DC power input, the BTS3900 can work with RFUs and RRUs. This deploymentsupports flexible networking and easy capacity expansion and evolution in the future.

Table 4-9 lists the maximum configurations of a BTS3900 using RFUs and RRUs.

Table 4-9 Maximum configurations of a BTS3900 using RFUs and RRUs

CabinetType

Application Scenario

Number ofBBUs

Number ofCabinets

Number ofRFUs

Number ofRRUs

BTS3900(Ver.B) orBTS3900(Ver.C)

Single- ordual-mode

1 2 12 6

Triple-mode 2 2 12 6

BTS3900(Ver.D)

Single- ordual-mode

1 2 12 6


4.3 BTS3900LAs an indoor macro base station, the BTS3900L is characterized by a large capacity and highintegration and can be easily expanded.

Cabinet StructureA BTS3900L can use a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet, a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet, or aBTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. A single cabinet can house a maximum of 12 radio frequency (RF)modules and 2 baseband units (BBUs). Both types of cabinets support -48 V DC power input.The following figures Figure 4-9, Figure 4-10, and Figure 4-11 show the internal structures ofthe three cabinets.



55

Figure 4-9 Internal structure of a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet



56

Figure 4-10 Internal structure of a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet



57

Figure 4-11 Internal structure of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet

Typical ConfigurationTable 4-10 and Table 4-11 list the typical configurations of a single-mode BTS3900L usingone cabinet and those of a multi-mode BTS3900L using one cabinet, respectively.

NOTE










58

Table 4-10 Typical configurations of a single-mode BTS3900L using one cabinet




S12/12/12 6 GRFUs 12 W

S12/12/12 6 MRFUs 12 W



20 W (900 MHz) +20 W (1800 MHz)



3 x 4 3 MRFUs 20 W




80 W (2 x 40 W)/120W (2 x 60 W)


3 LRFUs 80 W (2 x 40 W)


6 LRFUs 160 W (4 x 40 W)

Table 4-11 Typical configurations of a multi-mode BTS3900L using one cabinet



GU GSM S8/8/8 +UMTS 3 x 2 (MIMO)

3 MRFUd (GSM) + 3MRFUd (UMTS)modules

20 W + 80 W (2 x 40W)

6 GRFUs + 6WRFUs

GL GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3x 20 MHz (2 x 2MIMO)


20 W + 120 W (2 x 60W)



59



6 GRFUs + 6MRFUs (LTE)

20 W + 80 W (2 x 40W)



80 W (2 x 40 W) + 80W (2 x 40 W)

6 WRFUs + 6 LTEMRFUs (LTE)

GU + L/GL + U GSM S8/8/8 +UMTS 3 x 2 (MIMO)+ LTE 3 x 20 MHz (2x 2 MIMO)

3 MRFUd + 3MRFUd (UMTS) + 3MRFUd (LTE)modules

20 W + 80 W (2 x 40W) + 120 W (2 x 60W)

Configurations of a BTS3900L (RFUs+RRUs)

A BTS3900L can work with RFUs and RRUs. This deployment supports flexible networkingand easy capacity expansion and evolution in the future.

Table 4-12 lists the maximum configurations of a BTS3900L using RFUs and RRUs.

Table 4-12 Maximum configurations of a BTS3900L using RFUs and RRUs

CabinetType


Number ofBBUs

Number ofCabinets

Number ofRFUs

Number ofRRUs

BTS3900L(Ver.B) orBTS3900L(Ver.C)

Single- ordual-mode

1 1 12 6


BTS3900L(Ver.D)

Single- ordual-mode

1 1 12 6


4.4 BTS3900AAs an outdoor macro base station, the BTS3900A is applicable to the outdoor centralizedinstallation scenario.

Cabinet Structure

A BTS3900A can use a BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), or BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinet.The BTS3900A supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power input.



60

l A BTS3900A (Ver.B) consists of an RFC (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.B), or of an RFC(Ver.B) and a TMC11H (Ver.B). When power backup is required, a BTS3900A (Ver.B)can be configured with IBBS200T (Ver.B) or IBBS200D (Ver.B).

l A BTS3900A (Ver.C) consists of an RFC (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.C), or of an RFC(Ver.C) and a TMC11H (Ver.C). When power backup is required, a BTS3900A (Ver.C)can be configured with IBBS200T (Ver.C) or IBBS200D (Ver.C).

l A BTS3900A (Ver.D) consists of an RFC (Ver.D) and APM30H (Ver.D), or of an RFC(Ver.D) and a TMC11H (Ver.D). When power backup is required, a BTS3900A (Ver.D)can be configured with IBBS200T (Ver.D), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS700T, or IBBS700D.

Different power supply modules are installed in the cabinet when different power input is used.This section takes the AC-input power supply as an example. Figure 4-12, Figure 4-13, andFigure 4-14 show the internal structure of a BTS3900A (Ver.B) cabinet, a BTS3900A (Ver.C)cabinet, and a BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinet, respectively.

Figure 4-12 Internal structure of a BTS3900A (Ver.B) cabinet



61

Figure 4-13 Internal structure of a BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet



62

Figure 4-14 Internal structure of a BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinet

Typical Configurations of a Single CabinetTable 4-13 and Table 4-14 list the typical configurations of a single-mode BTS3900A usingone cabinet and those of a multi-mode BTS3900A using one cabinet, respectively.

NOTE










63

Table 4-13 Typical configurations of a single-mode BTS3900A using one cabinet




S12/12/12 6 GRFUs 12 W

S12/12/12 6 MRFUs 12 W



20 W (900 MHz) +20 W (1800 MHz)



3 x 4 3 MRFUs 20 W




80 W (2 x 40 W)/120W (2 x 60 W)


3 LRFUs 80 W (2 x 40 W)


6 LRFUs 160 W (4 x 40 W)

Table 4-14 Typical configurations of a multi-mode BTS3900A using one cabinet




3 MRFUd modules 20 W + 40 W



20 W + 80 W (2 x 40W)



80 W (2 x 40 W) +120 W (2 x 60 W)



64

Configurations of a BTS3900A Using RFUs and RRUsThe BTS3900A can work with RFUs and RRUs. This deployment supports flexible networkingand easy capacity expansion and evolution in the future.

Table 4-15 lists the maximum configurations of a BTS3900A using RFUs and RRUs.

Table 4-15 Maximum configurations of a BTS3900A using RFUs and RRUs

CabinetType


Number ofBBUs

Number ofCabinets

Number ofRFUs

Number ofRRUs

BTS3900A(Ver.B) orBTS3900A(Ver.C)

Single- ordual-mode

1 l With ACpowerinput,twoAPM30H(Ver.B)orAPM30H(Ver.C)cabinetscan beconfigured.

l With DCpowerinput, oneTMC11H(Ver.B)orTMC11H(Ver.C)cabinetcan beconfigured.

6 6



65

CabinetType


Number ofBBUs

Number ofCabinets

Number ofRFUs

Number ofRRUs

Triple-mode 2 l With ACpowerinput,twoAPM30H(Ver.B)orAPM30H(Ver.C)cabinetscan beconfigured.

l With DCpowerinput,twoTMC11H(Ver.B)orTMC11H(Ver.C)cabinetscan beconfigured.

6 6

BTS3900A(Ver.D)

Single- ordual-mode

1 l With ACpowerinput, oneAPM30H(Ver.D)cabinetcan beconfigured.

l With DCpowerinput, oneTMC11H(Ver.D)cabinetcan beconfigured.

6 9



66

CabinetType


Number ofBBUs

Number ofCabinets

Number ofRFUs

Number ofRRUs

Triple-mode 2 l With ACpowerinput, oneAPM30H(Ver.D)cabinetcan beconfigured.

l With DCpowerinput, oneTMC11H(Ver.D)cabinetcan beconfigured.

6 9

4.5 BTS3900ALAs an outdoor macro base station, the BTS3900AL is characterized by space saving and highintegration and can be easily evolved.

Cabinet StructureA BTS3900AL uses a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet and supports 220 V AC and 110 V ACpower input. Using one cabinet, the BTS3900AL can house a maximum of 9 radio frequency(RF) modules and 2 baseband units (BBUs). Figure 4-15 shows the internal structure of aBTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.

When power backup is required, a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) can be configured with IBBS700D orIBBS700T.



67

Figure 4-15 Internal structure of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

Typical Configurations of a Single CabinetThe BTS3900AL mainly applies to large-capacity scenarios where multiple frequency bands ormultiple modes co-exist. The BTS3900AL also supports single-mode applications. Table4-16 lists the typical configurations of a multi-mode BTS3900AL using one cabinet.

NOTE










68

Table 4-16 Typical configurations of a multi-mode BTS3900AL using one cabinet



GU GSM S8/8/8 (900MHz) + GSM S8/8/8(1800 MHz) +UMTS 3 x 2 (2100MHz)

3 MRFUd (GSM) + 3MRFUd (GSM) + 3WRFU (UMTS)modules

20 W + 20 W + 40 W

GSM S6/6/6 (900MHz) + UMTS 3 x 1(900 MHz) + GSMS8/8/8 (1800 MHz) +UMTS 3 x 2 (2100MHz)

3 MRFUd (GU) + 3MRFUd (GSM) + 3WRFUd (UMTS)modules

20 W + 40 W +20 W+ 80 W (2 x 40 W)

GL GSM S4/4/4 (900MHz) + GSM S4/4/4(1800 MHz) + LTE 3x 20 MHz (2 x 2MIMO)

3 GRFUs (GSM) + 3GRFUs (GSM) + 3LRFUs (LTE)

20 W + 80 W (2 x 40W)

GSM S6/6/6 + LTE 3x 10 MHz (2T2R)+LTE 3 x 20 MHz (2 x2 MIMO)

6 MRFUs (GL) + 3LRFUs (LTE)

20 W + 2 x 20 W + 80W (2 x 40 W)

GSM S8/8/8 (900MHz) + LTE 3 x 20MHz (800 MHz, 2 x2 MIMO)

3 MRFUd modules(GSM) + 3 LRFUs(LTE)

20 W + 120 W (2 x 60W)

UL UMTS 3 x 2 + LTE 3x 20 MHz (2T2R)

3 WRFUs + 3MRFUs (LTE)

40 W + 80 W (2 x 40W)

3 MRFUs (UMTS) +3 MRFUs (LTE)

UMTS 3 x 2 (MIMO)+ LTE 3 x 20 MHz(4T4R)

3 WRFUd + 6 LRFUmodules

80 W (2 x 40 W) + 80W (2 x 40 W)


GU + L/GL + U(independent BBU)

GSM S8/8/8 +UMTS 3 x 2 (MIMO)+ LTE 3 x 20 MHz (2x 2 MIMO)

3 MRFUd (UMTS) +3 WRFUd + 3MRFUd (LTE)modules

20 W + 80 W (2 x 40W) + 120 W (2 x 60W)



69



GU + L/GL + U(BBUsinterconnected)

GSM S6/6/6 +UMTS 3 x 1 (MIMO)+ GSM S6/6/6 + LTE3 x 10 MHz (2 x 2MIMO) + UMTS 3 x2 (MIMO)

3 MRFUd (GU) + 3MRFUd (GL) + 3WRFU modules

20 W + 40 W (2 x 20W) + 20 W + 40 W (2x 20 W) + 80 W (2 x40 W)

Maximum configurations of a BTS3900AL (RFUs+RRUs)

A BTS3900AL can work with RFUs and RRUs. This deployment supports flexible networkingand easy capacity expansion and evolution in the future.

Table 4-17 lists the maximum configurations of a BTS3900AL using RFUs and RRUs.

Table 4-17 Maximum configurations of a BTS3900AL using RFUs and RRUs

CabinetType


Number ofBBUs

Number ofCabinets

Number ofRFUs

Number ofRRUs

BTS3900AL(Ver.A)

Single- ordual-mode

1 1 9 9


4.6 DBS3900As a distributed base station, the DBS3900 is applicable to installation scenarios where widecoverage is required or base station deployment is difficult.

Typical installation scenarios for a DBS3900

A DBS3900 mainly consists of a BBU and RRUs. With RRUs remotely installed, the DBS3900can be deployed in various scenarios.

Cabinets that can work with a DBS3900 are as follows:

l Power cabinets: APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), andAPM30H (Ver.D)

l Outdoor power cabinet: TP48600A

l Transmission cabinets: TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C),and TMC11H (Ver.D)

l Battery cabinets: BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C),IBBS200T (Ver.D), IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D),IBBS700D, and IBBS700T



70

l Other cabinets: OMB, IMB03, and 19-inch rack

For usage scenarios of the preceding cabinets, see DBS3900 Hardware Description.

A maximum of 12 RRUs can be configured in a DBS3900. Table 4-18 shows the typicalinstallation scenario. For details, see DBS3900 Installation Guide.

Table 4-18 Typical installation scenarios for a DBS3900

Usage Scenario Installation Scenario

Outdoor Input power is110 V AC, 220V AC, or +24 VDC.

The BBU is installed in a power cabinet, and RRUs areremotely installed. The power cabinet feeds power to the BBUand RRUs, as shown in Scenario 1 of Figure 4-16.

Input power is-48 V DC.

The BBU is installed in a transmission cabinet, and RRUs areremotely installed. The transmission cabinet feeds power tothe BBU and RRUs, as shown in Scenario 1 of Figure4-16.

Indoor RRUs arecentrallyinstalled.

The BBU is installed in the IMB03, and RRUs and the IMB03are installed in the IFS06, as show in Scenario 2 of Figure4-16.

Input power is-48 V DC.

The BBU is mounted on a wall and RRUs are remotelyinstalled outdoors, as shown in Scenario 3 of Figure 4-16.



71

Figure 4-16 Typical installation scenarios for a DBS3900

Typical ConfigurationTable 4-19 and Table 4-20 list the typical configurations of a single-mode DBS3900 and thoseof a multi-mode DBS3900, respectively.



72

NOTE








Table 4-19 Typical configurations of a single-mode DBS3900



GSM S4/4/4 6 RRU3004s 15 W (900 MHz)/10W (1800 MHz)

S4/4/4 3 RRU3008s 20 W

S4/4/4 3 RRU3908s 20 W

UMTS 3 x 4 3 RRU3804s 15 W

3 x 4 3 RRU3806s 20 W

3 x 2 (MIMO) 3 RRU3908s 40 W (2 x 20 W)


3 RRU3908s 40 W (2 x 20 W)


3 RRU3220s 80 W (2 x 40 W)


6 RRU3220s 160 W (4 x 40 W)

Table 4-20 Typical configurations of a multi-mode DBS3900




3 RRU3008s + 6RRU3804s

20 W + 60 W (2 x 30W)

3 RRU3008s + 3RRU3808s

20 W + 40 W (2 x 20W)



73




3 RRU3008s + 3RRU3908s (LTE)

20 W + 40 W (2 x 20W)


6 RRU3804s + 3RRU3908s (LTE)

60 W (2 x 30 W) + 40W (2 x 20 W)

3 RRU3808s +3RRU3908s (LTE)

40 W (2 x 20 W) + 40W (2 x 20 W)

4.7 BTS3900CThe BTS3900C is a mini outdoor base station and applies to hot spots, tunnels, and borders.

Cabinet StructureBTS3900C can use a BTS3900C cabinet or BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet.

l BTS3900C cabinet can house an OMB and an RRU subrack. The OMB can house a BBU.The RRU subrack can only house RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, or RRU3801Cmodules. The BTS3900C cabinet can be used in a UO single-mode base station only.

l BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet can house an OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack. The OMB(Ver.C) can house a BBU. The RRU subrack can house multiple types of RF modules. Forspecific RF module types, see the BTS3900C (Ver.C) Hardware Description. TheBTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet can be used in a multi-mode base station or a UO single-modebase station.

A BTS3900C cabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet both support DC and AC power inputs.Figure 4-17 and Figure 4-18 show the internal structure of a BTS3900C cabinet. Figure 4-19and Figure 4-20 show the internal structure of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet.



74

Figure 4-17 Internal structure of a BTS3900C cabinet (DC)



75

Figure 4-18 Internal structure of a BTS3900C cabinet (AC)

Figure 4-19 Internal structure of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet (DC)



76

Figure 4-20 Internal structure of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet (AC)

Typical Configuration

Table 4-21 and Table 4-22 provide the typical configurations of a BTS3900C cabinet and aBTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, respectively.

NOTE


l SA indicates that the GSM network is configured with one cell and each cell has A TRX.




Table 4-21 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C cabinet



UMTS 1 x 3 1 RRU3804 20 W

Table 4-22 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet



UMTS 1 x 3 1 RRU3828 20 W



77



GU GSM S2 + UMTS 1x 2

1 RRU3928 20 W + 20 W

GSM S2 + UMTS 1x 1 (MIMO)

1 RRU3928 20 W + 2 x 20 W

GL GSM S2 + LTE 1 x10 MHz (MIMO)

1 RRU3928 20 W + 2 x 20 W



78

5 Logical Structure

About This Chapter

A 3900 series base station mainly consists of BBUs, RF modules, and the antenna system. Itsfunctional subsystem includes the control system, transport system, baseband system,monitoring system, RF system, antenna system, and power supply system.

5.1 GBTS Logical StructureA GSM base transceiver station (GBTS) mainly consists of the baseband unit (BBU), radiofrequency (RF) module, and antenna system. Its functional subsystems comprise the controlsystem, transport system, baseband system, monitoring system, RF system, antenna system, andpower system.

5.2 NodeB Logical StructureA NodeB mainly consists of a baseband unit (BBU), radio frequency (RF) modules, and theantenna system. Its functional subsystems comprise the control system, transport system,baseband system, monitoring system, interconnection system, RF system, antenna system, andpower system.

5.3 eNodeB Logical StructureAn eNodeB mainly consists of a baseband unit (BBU), radio frequency (RF) modules, and theantenna system. Its functional subsystems are the control system, transport system, basebandsystem, monitoring system, RF system, antenna system, and power supply system.

5.4 MBTS Logical StructureA multi-mode base transceiver station (MBTS) can work in GU, GL, or UL dual mode and canalso work in GUL triple mode. In a dual-mode base station, two SiteUnits share one basebandunit (BBU). In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required and BBU interconnection isoptional.

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 5 Logical Structure


79

5.1 GBTS Logical StructureA GSM base transceiver station (GBTS) mainly consists of the baseband unit (BBU), radiofrequency (RF) module, and antenna system. Its functional subsystems comprise the controlsystem, transport system, baseband system, monitoring system, RF system, antenna system, andpower system.

Figure 5-1 shows the GBTS logical structure.

Figure 5-1 GBTS logical structure

BBUThe BBU has a modular structure. It consists of the control system, transmission system, andpower and environment monitoring system.

l The control system manages the entire GBTS in a centralized manner. It provides operationand maintenance functions, processes signaling, and provides a system clock. The functionsof the control system are implemented by the GSM Transmission and Timing andManagement Unit for BBU (GTMU).

l The transmission system provides ports for communication between the GBTS and thetransmission network. The functions of the transmission system are implemented by theGTMU or Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP). It also provides the O&Mchannel connecting the GBTS to the operation and maintenance center (OMC).

l The power and environment monitoring system includes the UPEU and UEIU boards.UPEU stands for Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit, and UEIU stands forUniversal Environment Interface Unit. A UPEU board supplies power to the BBU andmonitors power status. Both the UPEU and UEIU boards provide ports for connections toenvironment monitoring devices. These ports receive and forward signals from theenvironment monitoring devices.

RF SystemThe radio frequency (RF) system consists of RF modules, which modulate, demodulate, process,combine, and split baseband and RF signals. The GSM RF system incorporates the functions of



80

a baseband system and therefore the GSM RF system processes uplink and downlink basebandsignals.

Power SystemThe power supply system obtains power from external power suppliers and provides power forother systems of the GBTS.

Antenna SystemThe antenna system mainly receives uplink RF signals from MSs and transmits downlink RFsignals from the GBTS. It also prevents the GBTS from inductive lightning. The lightning rodconfigured for the antenna system conducts high lightning current to the ground so that thelightning current that the GBTS is experiencing decreases significantly. The antenna systemincludes antennas, feeders, jumpers, and the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA).

5.2 NodeB Logical StructureA NodeB mainly consists of a baseband unit (BBU), radio frequency (RF) modules, and theantenna system. Its functional subsystems comprise the control system, transport system,baseband system, monitoring system, interconnection system, RF system, antenna system, andpower system.

ScenarioThere are the single BBU scenario and BBU interconnection scenario.l Single BBU scenario: a NodeB has one BBU. Figure 5-4 shows the logical structure of

this scenario.

NOTE

In the single BBU scenario, main control boards support active/standby backup.

l BBU interconnection scenario: a NodeB has two cascaded BBUs. Figure 5-5 shows thelogical structure of this scenario.

BBU interconnection enables two BBUs to exchange O&M information, service information(signaling messages and user data), clock signals, synchronization information, and basebandsignals using a BBU interconnection signal cable. BBU interconnection can also expand thebaseband signal processing capability of a base station.

A BBU interconnection signal cable logically corresponds to a BBU interconnection link, whichcan work as a control link or a baseband interconnection link. Table 5-1 provides the mappingbetween a certain BBU interconnection link and a certain BBU interconnection signal cable.



81

Table 5-1 Mapping between a certain BBU interconnection link and a certain BBUinterconnection signal cable

BBUInterconnection Link

BBU Interconnection SignalCable

Remarks

Control link BBU interconnection signal cableconnecting UCIU to UMPT. Thiscable is used to connect a UCIU boardin the root BBU to a UMPT board inthe leaf BBU, as shown in Figure5-2.

The BBU with the UCIU boardinstalled is the root BBU and theother BBU is the leaf BBU.In this technical description, BBU0 isthe root BBU while BBU1 is the leafBBU.

Basebandinterconnection link

BBU interconnection signal cableconnecting WBBPf to WBBPf. Thiscable is used to connect a WBBPfboard in the root BBU to a WBBPfboard in the leaf BBU, as shown inFigure 5-3.

l Before a basebandinterconnection link can be set up,two BBUs must be interconnectedby connecting a UCIU board to aUMPT board using a BBUinterconnection signal cable and acontrol link must be set up.

l Currently, a basebandinterconnection link can be set uponly on the WBBPf board in slot2 or 3 of a BBU. Only onebaseband interconnection link canbe set up in one base station.

One board in the root BBU is the primary main control board while another board in the leafBBU is the secondary main control board.

Figure 5-2 BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT



82

Figure 5-3 BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf

Logical Structure of a NodeB

Figure 5-4 Logical structure of a NodeB (single BBU)



83

Figure 5-5 Logical structure of a NodeB (BBU interconnection)

NOTE

l The RXU logical structure in Figure 5-5 is similar to the RF system structure in Figure 5-4.

l The monitoring system and local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Figure 5-5 can be connected onlyto the primary main control board.

BBUThe BBU has a modular structure and consists of the control system, transport system, basebandsystem, power and environment monitoring system, and interconnection system.

l The control system includes the WMPT and UMPT boards. (UMPT is short for universalmain processing and transmission unit. WMPT is short for WCDMA main processing andtransmission unit.) This system centrally manages the entire NodeB including O&M,signaling processing, and system clock.

l The transport system includes the UMPT, WMPT, and UTRP boards. (UTRP is short foruniversal transmission processing unit.) It provides physical ports connecting the NodeBto the transport network for information exchange. This system also provides an OMchannel connecting the NodeB to the operation and maintenance center (OMC).

l The baseband system includes WBBP boards. (WBBP is short for WCDMA basebandprocessing unit.) This system performs baseband processing on uplink and downlinksignals and provides the common public radio interface (CPRI) for communication withRF modules.



84


l The interconnection system includes the UCIU, UMPT, and WBBPf boards. This systemallows transfer of operation and maintenance (O&M) information, service information(signaling and user data), clock synchronization information, baseband data betweencascaded BBUs, and baseband resource extension.

RF SystemThe radio frequency (RF) system consists of RF modules, which modulate, demodulate, process,combine, and split baseband and RF signals.

Power SystemThe power system obtains power from external power supply devices and supplies power toother systems of the NodeB.

Antenna SystemThe antenna system includes antennas, feeders, jumpers, a remote control unit (RCU), and atower mounted amplifier (TMA). This system receives and transmits RF signals. Specifically,antennas receive uplink signals from UEs and transmit downlink signals to UEs. The antennasystem provides the lightning protection function (lightning induction) for the NodeB. Thelightning rod in this system conducts the powerful lightning current to the ground, significantlyreducing the lightning current to the NodeB.

5.3 eNodeB Logical StructureAn eNodeB mainly consists of a baseband unit (BBU), radio frequency (RF) modules, and theantenna system. Its functional subsystems are the control system, transport system, basebandsystem, monitoring system, RF system, antenna system, and power supply system.

Figure 5-6 shows the logical structure of an eNodeB.

Figure 5-6 Logical structure of an eNodeB



85

BBUThe BBU has a modular structure and consists of the control system, transport system, basebandsystem, and power and environment monitoring system.

l The control system includes the UMPT and LMPT boards. (UMPT is short for universalmain processing and transmission unit. LMPT is short for LTE main processing andtransmission unit.) The control system centrally manages the entire eNodeB includingoperation and maintenance (O&M), signaling processing, and system clock.

l The transport system includes the UMPT, LMPT, and UTRP boards. (UTRP is short foruniversal transmission processing unit.) It provides physical ports connecting the eNodeBto the transport network for information exchange. This system also provides an OMchannel connecting the eNodeB to the operation and maintenance center (OMC).

l The baseband system includes the LBBP boards. (LBBP is short for LTE basebandprocessing unit.) This system performs baseband processing on uplink and downlinksignals and provides the common public radio interface (CPRI) for communication withRF modules.


RF SystemThe radio frequency (RF) system consists of RF modules, which modulate, demodulate, process,combine, and split baseband and RF signals.

Power Supply SystemThe power supply system obtains power from external power supply devices and supplies powerto other systems of the eNodeB.

Antenna SystemThe antenna system includes antennas, feeders, jumpers, a remote control unit (RCU), and atower mounted amplifier (TMA). This system receives and transmits RF signals. The antennasystem provides the lightning protection function (lightning induction) for the eNodeB. Thelightning rod in this system conducts the powerful lightning current to the ground, significantlyreducing the lightning current to the eNodeB.

5.4 MBTS Logical StructureA multi-mode base transceiver station (MBTS) can work in GU, GL, or UL dual mode and canalso work in GUL triple mode. In a dual-mode base station, two SiteUnits share one basebandunit (BBU). In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required and BBU interconnection isoptional.



86

5.4.1 Related ConceptsThis section describes concepts related to baseband unit (BBU) interconnection and radiofrequency (RF) modules.

BBU InterconnectionBBU interconnection enables two BBUs to exchange O&M information, service information(signaling messages and user data), clock signals, synchronization information, and basebandsignals using a BBU interconnection signal cable. BBU interconnection can also expand thebaseband signal processing capability of a base station.

A BBU interconnection signal cable logically corresponds to a BBU interconnection link, whichcan work as a control link or a baseband interconnection link. Table 5-2 provides the mappingbetween a certain BBU interconnection link and a certain BBU interconnection signal cable.

Table 5-2 Mapping between a certain BBU interconnection link and a certain BBUinterconnection signal cable

BBUInterconnection Link

BBU Interconnection SignalCable

Remarks

Control link BBU interconnection signal cableconnecting UCIU to UMPT. Thiscable is used to connect a UCIU boardin the root BBU to a UMPT board inthe leaf BBU, as shown in Figure5-7.

The BBU with the UCIU boardinstalled is the root BBU and theother BBU is the leaf BBU.In this technical description, BBU0 isthe root BBU while BBU1 is the leafBBU.

Basebandinterconnection link

BBU interconnection signal cableconnecting WBBPf to WBBPf. Thiscable is used to connect a WBBPfboard in the root BBU to a WBBPfboard in the leaf BBU, as shown inFigure 5-8.

l Before a basebandinterconnection link can be set up,a control link must be set up.

l Currently, a basebandinterconnection link can be set uponly on the WBBPf board in slot2 or 3 of a BBU. Only onebaseband interconnection link canbe set up in one base station.

Currently, only the UMTS main control board can be installed in two BBUs. One such board inthe root BBU is the primary main control board while another such board in the leaf BBU is thesecondary main control board.



87

Figure 5-7 BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT

Figure 5-8 BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf

RF Modules

Radio frequency (RF) modules include radio frequency units (RFUs) used in macro base stationsand remote radio units (RRUs) used in distributed base stations. In this technical description,RFUs and RRUs can be referred to as RXUs.

Based on the signal processing capability, RF modules fall into single-mode and multi-modeRF modules. Table 5-3 provides description about such two types of RF modules.

Table 5-3 RF module type

Type Description

Single-mode RFmodules

Each such module permanently processes RF signals of only onemode.

Multi-mode RFmodules

Using the software-defined radio (SDR) technique, each multi-moderadio frequency (RF) module can process RF signals for a certainmode (such as, GSM, UMTS, or LTE) at a time with certainconfigurations. Each such module can also process RF signals for twomodes (such as GU, GL, or UL) at a time.Multi-mode RF modules are also referred to as SDR modules.



88

Single- and multi-mode RF modules can be used in the same MBTS to achieve the applicationof multiple frequency bands and multiple modes. For an RXU (**), "**" indicates the workingmode of the RXU. In addition, the RXU can process RF signals of this mode. For example, anRXU (GU) works in GU mode and processes GSM RF signals and UMTS RF signals.

With BBU interconnection, one RF module can be connected to two BBUs at the same time.This scenario is called inter-BBU SDR. Table 5-4 provides description about this scenario.

Table 5-4 Inter-BBU SDR

Concept Description

Inter-BBU SDR One multi-mode RF module can be connected to two BBUs.For example, GSM boards are installed in BBU0 while LTE boards areinstalled in BBU1. RXU (GL) modules are connected to BBU0 and BBU1at the same time.

5.4.2 Logical Structure of a Dual-Mode Base StationIn a dual-mode base station, boards of one mode among GSM, UMTS, and LTE and boards ofanother mode among the three modes are installed in the same baseband unit (BBU), achievingBBU sharing across any two modes of the three modes.

Scenario

Table 5-5 lists the typical scenarios for a dual-mode base station.

NOTE

l BBU Mode indicates that boards of certain modes are installed in the BBU. For example, in a GU dual-mode BBU, GSM boards and UMTS boards are installed.

l Working Mode of RF Modules indicates the working mode of radio frequency (RF) modules connectedto the BBU.

Table 5-5 Typical scenarios for a dual-mode base station

Scenario BBU Mode Working Mode ofRF Modules

Logical Structure

GU GU GSM, UMTS, or GU Figure 5-9 shows its logicalstructure.

GL GL GSM, LTE, or GL



89

Scenario BBU Mode Working Mode ofRF Modules

Logical Structure

UL UL UMTS, LTE, or UL Figure 5-10 shows its logicalstructure.

GU+U l BBU0: GUl BBU1: UMTS

l BBU0 isconnected to RFmodules workingin GSM mode,those working inUMTS mode, orthose working inGU mode.

l BBU1 isconnected to RFmodules workingin UMTS mode orthose working inGU mode.

Figure 5-11 shows its logicalstructure.In this scenario, a UCIU boardmust be installed in BBU0 andthe main control boards inBBU1 must be the UniversalMain Processing andTransmission Unit (UMPT)board.Two BBUs are interconnectedusing a BBU interconnectionsignal cable connecting UCIUto UMPT. In this way, a BBUinterconnection link is set up.If a WBBPf board is installedin slot 2 or 3 of each BBU, twoWBBPf boards can beinterconnected using a BBUinterconnection signal cableconnecting WBBPf to WBBPf.In this way, a basebandinterconnection link is set up.

Logical StructureNOTE

In the logical structure of a GU/GL dual-mode base station, A indicates the UMTS or LTE mode.



90

Figure 5-9 Logical structure of a dual-mode base station (GU or GL)

Figure 5-10 Logical structure of a dual-mode base station (UL)



91

Figure 5-11 Logical structure of a dual-mode base station (GU+U)

The MBTS consists of the following parts:

BBUThe BBU has a modular structure and consists of the control system, transport system, basebandsystem, power and environment monitoring system, and interconnection system.

l The control system includes the GTMU, WMPT, LMPT, and UMPT boards. It centrallymanages the entire base station including operation and maintenance (O&M), signalingprocessing, and system clock. GTMU stands for GSM Transmission, Timing, andManagement Unit for BBU. WMPT stands for WCDMA Main Processing andTransmission Unit. LMPT stands for LTE Main Processing & Transmission Unit. UMPTstands for Universal Main Processing and Transmission Unit.

l The transport system includes the GTMU, WMPT, LMPT, UMPT, and UTRP boards. Itprovides physical ports connecting the base station to the transport network for informationexchange. UTRP stands for Universal Transmission Processing unit. This system alsoprovides an O&M channel connecting the base station to the operation and maintenancecenter (OMC).

l The baseband system includes the WBBP board (for UMTS) and the LBBP board (forLTE). The baseband subsystem processes uplink and downlink baseband signals and



92

provides CPRI ports through which the BBU exchanges information with RF modules. ForGSM, the baseband system includes RF modules, and the BBU exchanges information withthe RF modules using CPRI ports on the GTMU, or UBRI board. WBBP stands forWCDMA Baseband Process Unit. LBBP stands for LTE BaseBand Processing Unit. UBRIstands for Universal BaseBand Radio Interface Unit.


l The interconnection system includes the UCIU, UMPT, and WBBPf boards. It enables twoBBUs to exchange O&M information, service information (signaling messages and userdata), clock signals, synchronization information, and baseband signals. With this system,baseband processing capability can be expanded.

In a dual-mode base station with a single BBU, information of the two modes is exchangedwithin the BBU, achieving clock signal transferring and data forwarding. In a dual-mode basestation with two BBUs interconnected, information of the two modes is exchanged through theinterconnection system.

RF SystemThe RF system modulates, demodulates, processes, combines, and splits baseband signals andRF signals. In BBU interconnection scenario, inter-BBU SDR RF modules can be used.

Power Supply SystemThe power supply system obtains power from external power supply devices and provides powerfor other systems of an MBTS.

Antenna SystemThe antenna system includes antennas, feeders, jumpers, a remote control unit (RCU), a towermounted amplifier (TMA), and a Same band Antenna Sharing Unit (SASU). This systemreceives and transmits RF signals. Specifically, antennas receive uplink signals from terminalsand transmit downlink signals to the terminals. The antenna system provides the lightningprotection function (lightning induction) for the MBTS. The lightning rod in this systemconducts the powerful lightning current to the ground, significantly reducing the lightningcurrent to the MBTS.

When two radio communication systems operate in the same frequency band and cover the samearea, it is recommended that the two systems share the antenna system to reduce the capitalexpenditure (CAPEX) on network deployment. If an MBTS uses multi-mode RF modules,signals of two radio communication systems operating in the same frequency band aretransmitted from the same RF port to achieve antenna system sharing. If the MBTS uses single-mode RF modules, the use of an SASU is recommended.

5.4.3 Logical Structure of a Triple-Mode Base StationIn a triple-mode base station, two baseband units (BBUs) are required and BBU interconnectionis optional.



93

Scenario

Table 5-6 lists the typical scenarios for a triple-mode base station.

NOTE

l BBU Mode indicates that boards of certain modes are installed in the BBU. For example, in a GU dual-mode BBU, GSM boards and UMTS boards are installed.

l Working Mode of RF Modules indicates the working mode of radio frequency (RF) modules connectedto the BBU.

Table 5-6 Typical scenarios for a triple-mode base station

Scenario

BBU0 BBU1 BBUInterconnection Link

LogicalStructure

BBUMode

Working Modeof RFModules

BBUMode

WorkingMode ofRFModules

GU+L(independentBBU)

GU GSM,UMTS,or GU

LTE LTE N/A A base stationworking in GU+L(independentBBU) mode hasthe same logicalstructure as a basestation working inGL+U(independentBBU) mode. Inthis case, Figure5-12 only showsthe logicalstructure of a basestation working inGU+L(independentBBU) mode.

GL+U(independentBBU)

GL GSM,LTE, orGL

UMTS UMTS N/A

GU+L(BBUinterconnection)

GU GSM,UMTS,GU, GL,or UL

LTE LTE, GL,or UL

Two BBUs areinterconnectedusing a BBUinterconnection signal cableconnectingUCIU toUMPT. In thisway, a BBUinterconnection link is set up.

A base stationworking in GU+L(BBUinterconnection)mode has the samelogical structure asa base stationworking in GL+U(BBUinterconnection)mode. In this case,Figure 5-13 onlyshows the logical



94

Scenario

BBU0 BBU1 BBUInterconnection Link

LogicalStructure

BBUMode

Working Modeof RFModules

BBUMode

WorkingMode ofRFModules

GL+U(BBUinterconnection)

structure of a basestation working inGU+L (BBUinterconnection)mode.

GL GSM,LTE,GU, GL,or UL

UMTS UMTS,GU, or UL

GU+UL(BBUinterconnection)

GU GSM,UMTS,GU, GL,or UL

UL UMTS,LTE, GU,GL, or UL

Two BBUs areinterconnectedusing a BBUinterconnection signal cableconnectingUCIU toUMPT. In thisway, a BBUinterconnection link is set up.If a WBBPfboard isinstalled in slot2 or 3 of eachBBU, twoWBBPf boardscan beinterconnectedusing a BBUinterconnection signal cableconnectingWBBPf toWBBPf. In thisway, abasebandinterconnection link is set up.

Figure 5-14 showsits logicalstructure.

Before implement BBU interconnection, pay attention to the following:

l GSM boards must be installed in BBU0.



95

l BBU0 must be configured with a Universal Cascaded Interface Unit (UCIU) board.l When a BBU interconnection signal cable is used to connect a UCIU and a UMPT boards

and a control link is set up, main control boards in BBU1 must be the Universal MainProcessing and Transmission Unit (UMPT) board.

Logical Structure

Figure 5-12 Logical structure of a triple-mode base station (GU+L) with independent BBUs



96

Figure 5-13 Logical structure of a triple-mode base station (GU+L) with BBU interconnection



97

Figure 5-14 Logical structure of a triple-mode base station (GU+UL) with BBU interconnection

The MBTS consists of the following parts:

BBU

The BBU has a modular structure and consists of the control system, transport system, basebandsystem, power and environment monitoring system, and interconnection system.

l The control system includes the GTMU, WMPT, LMPT, and UMPT boards. It centrallymanages the entire base station including operation and maintenance (O&M), signalingprocessing, and system clock. GTMU stands for GSM Transmission, Timing, andManagement Unit for BBU. WMPT stands for WCDMA Main Processing andTransmission Unit. LMPT stands for LTE Main Processing & Transmission Unit. UMPTstands for Universal Main Processing and Transmission Unit.



98

l The transport system includes the GTMU, WMPT, LMPT, UMPT, and UTRP boards. Itprovides physical ports connecting the base station to the transport network for informationexchange. UTRP stands for Universal Transmission Processing unit. This system alsoprovides an O&M channel connecting the base station to the operation and maintenancecenter (OMC).

l The baseband system includes the WBBP board (for UMTS) and the LBBP board (forLTE). The baseband subsystem processes uplink and downlink baseband signals andprovides CPRI ports through which the BBU exchanges information with RF modules. ForGSM, the baseband system includes RF modules, and the BBU exchanges information withthe RF modules using CPRI ports on the GTMU, or UBRI board. WBBP stands forWCDMA Baseband Process Unit. LBBP stands for LTE BaseBand Processing Unit. UBRIstands for Universal BaseBand Radio Interface Unit.


l The interconnection system includes the UCIU, UMPT, and WBBPf boards. It enables twoBBUs to exchange O&M information, service information (signaling messages and userdata), clock signals, synchronization information, and baseband signals. With this system,baseband processing capability can be expanded.

In the independent BBU scenario, two modes within the same BBU exchange information insidethe BBU, and forward clock signals and data to each other. The other mode in the other BBUoperates independently.

In the BBU interconnection scenario, three modes exchange data through the interconnectionsystem.

RF System

The RF system modulates, demodulates, processes, combines, and splits baseband signals andRF signals.

In the independent BBU scenario, two BBUs are independently connected to different radiofrequency (RF) modules and inter-BBU SDR is not supported. In the BBU interconnectionscenario, inter-BBU SDR is supported.

Power Supply System

The power supply system obtains power from external power supply devices and provides powerfor other systems of an MBTS.

Antenna System

The antenna system includes antennas, feeders, jumpers, a remote control unit (RCU), a towermounted amplifier (TMA), and a Same band Antenna Sharing Unit (SASU). This systemreceives and transmits RF signals. Specifically, antennas receive uplink signals from terminalsand transmit downlink signals to the terminals. The antenna system provides the lightningprotection function (lightning induction) for the MBTS. The lightning rod in this system



99

conducts the powerful lightning current to the ground, significantly reducing the lightningcurrent to the MBTS.

When two radio communication systems operate in the same frequency band and cover the samearea, it is recommended that the two systems share the antenna system to reduce the capitalexpenditure (CAPEX) on network deployment. If an MBTS uses multi-mode RF modules,signals of two radio communication systems operating in the same frequency band aretransmitted from the same RF port to achieve antenna system sharing. If the MBTS uses single-mode RF modules, the use of an SASU is recommended.



100

6 Clock Synchronization

About This Chapter

Synchronization refers to that within a specific time, the phase variation or frequency variationbetween two or more signals stays within the specified range. Clock synchronization refers tothat a base station synchronizes its clock signals with a reference clock source. Through clocksynchronization, the variation in the clock frequency between a base station and other devicesin the related network and the variation in the clock signals between the base station and otherdevices in the network are within the specified range. This prevents transmission performancefrom deteriorating due to such variations.

Clock synchronization includes the following:

l Frequency synchronization: the frequency of a signal is the same as the reference frequencybut the origin of the timescale for the signal does not need to be the same as that for thereference clock.

l Time synchronization (also referred to as time-of-day synchronization): the origin of thetimescale for a signal needs to be synchronized with the Universal Time Coordinated(UTC). Therefore, time synchronization implies synchronization in absolute time. TheUTC time is a universal timing standard, in which the atomic clock is maintained accuratelyto ensure time synchronization across the world, with the precision to microseconds.

6.1 GBTS Clock Synchronization ModesGSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs) support multiple types of reference clock sources,including the E1/T1 line clock, IP clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, building integrated timingsupply (BITS) clock, Global Positioning System (GPS) clock, and Remote Global PositioningSystem (RGPS) clock. If a GBTS fails to obtain clock signals, it works in free-run mode for acertain period of time.

6.2 NodeB Clock Synchronization ModesNodeBs support multiple types of reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 line clock, IPclock, synchronous Ethernet clock, building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, and GlobalPositioning System (GPS) clock. If a NodeB fails to obtain clock signals, it works in free-runmode for a certain period of time.

6.3 eNodeB Clock Synchronization ModeseNodeBs support multiple types of external reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 lineclock, IP clock, synchronous Ethernet, building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, Global

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 6 Clock Synchronization


101

Positioning System (GPS) clock, Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) clock, GlobalNavigation Satellite System (GLONASS) clock, and 1PPS+TOD clock (PPS is short for pulseper second, and TOD is short for time of day). If an eNodeB fails to obtain clock signals, it worksin free-run mode for a certain period of time.

6.4 MBTS Clock Synchronization ModesThe MBTS supports multiple external clock sources, including an E1/T1 line clock, IP clock,synchronous Ethernet clock, GPS clock, BITS clock, and 1 PPS+TOD clock. BITS stands forbuilding integrated timing supply, PPS stands for pulse per second, and TOD stands for time ofday. Each SiteUnit in an MBTS can independently uses an external clock source or can sharethe clock source with other modes. If an MBTS fails to obtain external clock signals, it operatesin free-run mode for a certain period of time.



102

6.1 GBTS Clock Synchronization ModesGSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs) support multiple types of reference clock sources,including the E1/T1 line clock, IP clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, building integrated timingsupply (BITS) clock, Global Positioning System (GPS) clock, and Remote Global PositioningSystem (RGPS) clock. If a GBTS fails to obtain clock signals, it works in free-run mode for acertain period of time.

E1/T1 Line Clock SynchronizationWith an E1/T1 line clock, a base station obtains frequency synchronization signals from thephysical layer of an E1/T1 link to achieve clock synchronization. An E1/T1 line clock can beused when a base station uses the E1/T1 transmission scheme and clock signals are available onthe E1/T1 link.

IP Clock (IEEE1588 V2) SynchronizationIEEE1588 V2 defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which targets synchronization ofclocks in the Ethernet, with the precision to microseconds. With an IEEE1588 V2 clock, bothfrequency synchronization and time synchronization are supported. An IEEE1588 V2 clock canbe used when a base station works in IP over FE mode and an IP clock server is configured inthe network.

Synchronous Ethernet Clock SynchronizationWith a synchronous Ethernet clock, a base station traces the upstream clock by recovering clocksignals from the serial data bit streams received at the physical layer to achieve synchronization.The synchronous Ethernet supports only frequency synchronization. When a base station usesa synchronous Ethernet clock as its clock source, the frequency precision tolerance of the systemclock falls into the range of -0.05 ppm and + 0.05 ppm. A synchronous Ethernet clock can beused when a base station works in IP over FE mode and the transport network supports thesynchronous Ethernet clock.

BITS Clock SynchronizationWith a building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, a base station is connected to an externalsynchronous equipment through the BITS clock card in the base station to obtain BITSsynchronization signals. A BITS clock can be used when a base station is equipped with auniversal satellite card and clock unit (USCU) board.

GPS Clock SynchronizationWith a Global Positioning System (GPS) clock, a base station receives clock signals by using aGPS receiver with the precision to microseconds to achieve synchronization. With a GPS clock,both frequency synchronization and time synchronization are supported. A GPS clock can beused when a base station is equipped with a universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU) board.

RGPS Clock SynchronizationWith a Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) clock, a base station receives clock signalsby using an RGPS receiver with the precision to microseconds to achieve synchronization. With



103

an RGPS clock, both frequency synchronization and time synchronization are supported. AnRGPS clock can be used when a base station is equipped with a USCU board.

Free-RunWithout an external clock source, a base station continues to work for about 90 days in free-runmode.

6.2 NodeB Clock Synchronization ModesNodeBs support multiple types of reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 line clock, IPclock, synchronous Ethernet clock, building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, and GlobalPositioning System (GPS) clock. If a NodeB fails to obtain clock signals, it works in free-runmode for a certain period of time.

NOTE

The NodeB supports only frequency synchronization.


IP Clock (Clock over IP) SynchronizationClock over IP is a Huawei proprietary frequency synchronization technology, in whichfrequency synchronization packets are transmitted over IP. With clock over IP, only frequencysynchronization is supported. When a base station uses this synchronization mode, thesynchronization tolerance can be ±0.05 ppm. The ppm stands for parts per million. A clock overIP can be used when a base station works in IP over FE mode and an IP clock server is configuredin the network.

IP Clock (IEEE1588 V2) SynchronizationIEEE1588 V2 defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which targets synchronization ofclocks in the Ethernet, with the precision to microseconds. With an IEEE1588 V2 clock, bothfrequency synchronization and time synchronization are supported. An IEEE1588 V2 clock canbe used when a base station works in IP over FE mode and an IP clock server is configured inthe network.

Synchronous Ethernet Clock SynchronizationWith a synchronous Ethernet clock, a base station traces the upstream clock by recovering clocksignals from the serial data bit streams received at the physical layer to achieve synchronization.The synchronous Ethernet supports only frequency synchronization. When a base station usesa synchronous Ethernet clock as its clock source, the frequency precision tolerance of the systemclock falls into the range of -0.05 ppm and + 0.05 ppm. A synchronous Ethernet clock can beused when a base station works in IP over FE mode and the transport network supports thesynchronous Ethernet clock.



104

BITS Clock SynchronizationWith a building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, a base station is connected to an externalsynchronous equipment through the BITS clock card in the base station to obtain BITSsynchronization signals. A BITS clock can be used when a base station is equipped with auniversal satellite card and clock unit (USCU) board.

GPS Clock SynchronizationWith a Global Positioning System (GPS) clock, a base station receives clock signals by using aGPS receiver with the precision to microseconds to achieve synchronization. With a GPS clock,both frequency synchronization and time synchronization are supported. A GPS clock can beused when a base station is equipped with a universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU) board.

Free-RunWithout an external clock source, a base station continues to work for about 90 days in free-runmode.

6.3 eNodeB Clock Synchronization ModeseNodeBs support multiple types of external reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 lineclock, IP clock, synchronous Ethernet, building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, GlobalPositioning System (GPS) clock, Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) clock, GlobalNavigation Satellite System (GLONASS) clock, and 1PPS+TOD clock (PPS is short for pulseper second, and TOD is short for time of day). If an eNodeB fails to obtain clock signals, it worksin free-run mode for a certain period of time.

NOTE

When the Clock Working Mode is set to AUTO(Auto), it does not take effect on an eNodeB, and each eNodeBcan be configured with only one type of external clock source.


IP Clock (Clock over IP) SynchronizationClock over IP is a Huawei proprietary frequency synchronization technology, in whichfrequency synchronization packets are transmitted over IP. With clock over IP, only frequencysynchronization is supported. When a base station uses this synchronization mode, thesynchronization tolerance can be ±0.05 ppm. The ppm stands for parts per million. A clock overIP can be used when a base station works in IP over FE mode and an IP clock server is configuredin the network.

IP Clock (IEEE1588 V2) SynchronizationIEEE1588 V2 defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which targets synchronization ofclocks in the Ethernet, with the precision to microseconds. With an IEEE1588 V2 clock, both



105

frequency synchronization and time synchronization are supported. An IEEE1588 V2 clock canbe used when a base station works in IP over FE mode and an IP clock server is configured inthe network.

Synchronous Ethernet Clock Synchronization

With a synchronous Ethernet clock, a base station traces the upstream clock by recovering clocksignals from the serial data bit streams received at the physical layer to achieve synchronization.The synchronous Ethernet supports only frequency synchronization. When a base station usesa synchronous Ethernet clock as its clock source, the frequency precision tolerance of the systemclock falls into the range of -0.05 ppm and + 0.05 ppm. A synchronous Ethernet clock can beused when a base station works in IP over FE mode and the transport network supports thesynchronous Ethernet clock.

BITS Clock Synchronization

With a building integrated timing supply (BITS) clock, a base station is connected to an externalsynchronous equipment through the BITS clock card in the base station to obtain BITSsynchronization signals. A BITS clock can be used when a base station is equipped with auniversal satellite card and clock unit (USCU) board.

GPS Clock Synchronization

If an eNodeB synchronizes with the GPS clock, it achieves synchronization by obtaining clocksignals from a GPS receiver. The GPS clock supports both frequency synchronization and timesynchronization, with a precision to microseconds. To synchronize with the GPS clock, aneNodeB must be equipped with a LMPT or a UMPTa6 board, or be equipped with a UMPTa2board where a satellite card is installed or a USCU board.

RGPS Clock Synchronization

If an eNodeB synchronizes with the RGPS clock, it achieves synchronization by obtaining clocksignals from a RGPS receiver. The RGPS clock supports both frequency synchronization andtime synchronization, with a precision to microseconds. To synchronize with the RGPS clock,an eNodeB must be equipped with a LMPT board, or be equipped with a UMPT board where asatellite card is installed or a USCU board.

GLONASS Clock Synchronization

If an eNodeB synchronizes with the GLONASS clock, it achieves synchronization by obtainingclock signals from a GLONASS receiver. The GLONASS clock supports both frequencysynchronization and time synchronization, with a precision to microseconds. To synchronizewith the GLONASS clock, an eNodeB must be equipped with a USCU board.

1PPS+TOD Clock Synchronization

With a 1PPS+TOD clock, a base station obtains 1 pulse per second (PPS) signals and time ofday (TOD) signals to implement time synchronization. The 1PPS signals are used for timesynchronization. The TODs signals transfer such information as time, types of reference clocks,and working status of reference clocks. A 1PPS+TOD clock can be used when a base station isequipped with a USCU board.



106

Free-Run

Without an external clock source, a base station continues to work for about 90 days in free-runmode.

6.4 MBTS Clock Synchronization ModesThe MBTS supports multiple external clock sources, including an E1/T1 line clock, IP clock,synchronous Ethernet clock, GPS clock, BITS clock, and 1 PPS+TOD clock. BITS stands forbuilding integrated timing supply, PPS stands for pulse per second, and TOD stands for time ofday. Each SiteUnit in an MBTS can independently uses an external clock source or can sharethe clock source with other modes. If an MBTS fails to obtain external clock signals, it operatesin free-run mode for a certain period of time.

NOTE

l In the co-module scenario, only frequency synchronization is supported.

l In an MBTS, the Clock Working Mode cannot be set to AUTO(Auto), and each SiteUnit can be configuredwith only one type of external clock source.

6.4.1 Independent Reference Clock ModeWhen an MBTS works in independent reference clock mode, each SiteUnit independently usesan external clock source and the clock synchronization mode is the same as that of a single-modebase station.

Figure 6-1 shows the independent reference clock mode of an MBTS.

Figure 6-1 Independent reference clock mode of an MBTS

Table 6-1 lists the clock synchronization mode of each SiteUnit. For details, see the following:

l 6.1 GBTS Clock Synchronization Modes

l 6.2 NodeB Clock Synchronization Modes

l 6.3 eNodeB Clock Synchronization Modes



107

Table 6-1 Clock synchronization mode of each SiteUnit in an MBTS

Clock SynchronizationMode

Supported By Board Receiving ClockSignals

E1/T1 line clocksynchronization

GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB GTMU, WMPT, UMPT, orUTRP (E1/T1 supported)

IP clock synchronization(clock over IP)

NodeB and eNodeB WMPT, LMPT, UMPT, orUTRP (FE/GE supported)

IP clock synchronization(IEEE1588 V2)

GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB GTMU, WMPT, LMPT,UMPT, or UTRP (FE/GEsupported)

Synchronous Ethernet clocksynchronization


GPS clock synchronization GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB USCU, LMPT, or UMPTa6

RGPS clock synchronization GBTS and eNodeB USCU or LMPT

BITS clock synchronization GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB USCU

1 PPS+TOD clocksynchronization

eNodeB USCU

Each SiteUnit can use different types of external clock sources according to onsite conditions.However, pay attention to the following:

l Each SiteUnit can be configured with only one type of external clock source.

l Only one Universal Satellite Card and Clock Unit (USCU) board can be configured for anMBTS and the USCU board can be configured with only one type of external clock source.

6.4.2 Common Reference Clock ModeWhen an MBTS works in common reference clock mode, all the SiteUnits share one externalclock source.

Table 6-2 provides the description about the common reference clock mode of an MBTS.

Table 6-2 Common reference clock mode of an MBTS

Scenario Common Reference Clock Mode

Dual-mode basestation

One SiteUnit is configured with an external clock source and the otherSiteUnit uses the peer clock, as shown in Figure 6-2.

Triple-modebasestation

IndependentBBU

Two SiteUnits within the same BBU can share one external clock source,as shown in Figure 6-3.



108

Scenario Common Reference Clock Mode

BBUinterconnection

l Any two SiteUnits can share one external clock source, as shown inFigure 6-4.

l The three SiteUnits can share one external clock source, as shown inFigure 6-5.

In the BBU interconnection scenario, clock signals are transmitted over a control link. Anexternal clock source can be implemented in either the root BBU or the leaf BBU. This sectionassumes that an external clock source is implemented in the root BBU.

Dual-Mode Base StationAs shown in Figure 6-2, A and B are the two SiteUnits of a dual-mode base station. In addition,A is configured with an external clock source and B shares the clock on the A side.

Figure 6-2 Common reference clock in a dual-mode base station

Triple-Mode Base StationIn the following figure, A, B, and C are the three SiteUnits of a triple-mode base station. Inaddition, A and B are configured in BBU0 and C in BBU1.

As shown in Figure 6-3, in the scenario of independent BBU, A and B share one external clocksource, and C is separately configured with another external clock source.

Figure 6-3 Common reference clock in a triple-mode base station (independent BBU)



109

As shown in Figure 6-4, in the scenario of BBU interconnection, any two of A, B, and C canshare one external clock source while the remaining one is separately configured with anotherexternal clock source. For example, A and B share one external clock source while C is separatelyconfigured with another external clock source. Alternatively, both A and B are configured withan independent external clock source, and then C can share the clock on the A or B side. In thefollowing figure, C shares the clock on the A side.

Figure 6-4 Common reference clock in a triple-mode base station (BBU interconnection) withtwo SiteUnits sharing one external clock source

As shown in Figure 6-5, in the scenario of BBU interconnection, A, B, and C share one externalclock source. In addition, A is configured with an external clock source, which is then sharedby B and C.



110

Figure 6-5 Common reference clock in a triple-mode base station (BBU interconnection) withall the SiteUnits sharing one external clock source

Table 6-3 lists external clock sources supported by each SiteUnit in an MBTS.

Table 6-3 External clock sources supported by each SiteUnit in an MBTS

External Clock Source Supported By Board Receiving ClockSignals

E1/T1 line clocksynchronization

GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB GTMU, WMPT, UMPT, orUTRP (E1/T1 supported)

IP clock synchronization(IEEE1588 V2 frequencysynchronization)


Synchronous Ethernet clocksynchronization


GPS clock synchronization(frequency synchronization)

GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB USCU, LMPT, or UMPTa6

BITS clock synchronization GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB USCU

When a Universal Satellite Card and Clock Unit (USCU) board is used to receive clock signals,the following configuration methods are available:

l This USCU board can be configured for all SiteUnits that share the external clock sourceand each SiteUnit has the same clock source type.

l When only one SiteUnit is configured with this USCU board, the clock source type of thisSiteUnit depends on the external clock source's type and the clock source type of the otherSiteUnits is PEER.



111

In other common reference clock modes, only one SiteUnit needs to be configured with anexternal clock source, and the other SiteUnits can share this external clock source by settingtheir clock source type to PEER.



112

7 Transport Network Topologies

About This Chapter

The 3900 series base stations support multiple transmission schemes and transport networktopologies in various scenarios.

7.1 GBTS Transport Network TopologiesGSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs) support transport networks over time divisionmultiplexing (TDM), IP, and High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC).

7.2 NodeB Transport Network TopologiesNodeBs support transport networks over ATM and IP.

7.3 eNodeB Transport Network TopologieseNodeBs support the star, chain, and tree topologies on IP networks.

7.4 MBTS Transport Network TopologiesThe multi-mode base transceiver station (MBTS) supports multiple transport networktopologies. Users can choose a certain topology according to onsite conditions. Each SiteUnitin an MBTS supports both independent transmission and co-transmission.

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 7 Transport Network Topologies


113

7.1 GBTS Transport Network TopologiesGSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs) support transport networks over time divisionmultiplexing (TDM), IP, and High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC).

TDM NetworkingE1/T1 transmission is used between the GBTS and the BSC, and TDM transmission is used onthe Abis interface. In TDM networking mode, the GBTS supports chain, star, tree, and ringtopologies, as shown in Figure 7-1.



114

Figure 7-1 TDM networking



115

Figure 7-2 Re-established ring topology after transmission interruption

IP NetworkingThe Abis interface between the GBTS and BSC uses the IP over FE or IP over E1/T1 transmissionmode. IP networking includes IP over FE and IP over E1/T1 networking.

IP over FE networking includes layer-2 and layer-3 networking, as shown in Figure 7-3.



116

Figure 7-3 IP over FE networking

IP over E1/T1 networking includes star, chain, and tree topologies, as shown in Figure 7-4.



117

Figure 7-4 IP over E1/T1 networking

HDLC NetworkingE1/T1 transmission is used between the GBTS and BSC, and HDLC transmission is used on theAbis interface. In HDLC networking mode, the GBTS supports chain, star, and ring topologies,as shown in Figure 7-5.



118

Figure 7-5 HDLC networking

Characteristics of Each TopologyTable 7-1 lists the characteristics of each topology.



119

Table 7-1 Characteristics of each topology

Topology Usage Scenario Advantage Disadvantage

Star The star topology isapplicable to mostscenarios,especially indensely populatedurban areas.

l Simple networkingl Easy network

deploymentl Easy network

maintenancel Flexible network

capacity expansionl High network

reliability

Compared with othertopologies, the startopology requires moretransmission resources.

Chain The chain topologyis applicable tostrip-shaped andsparsely populatedareas, such as areasalong highways andrailways.

Less costs of transmissionequipment, construction,and transmission link lease

l Signals travel throughmultiple nodes, andtherefore networkreliability is low.

l Faults in an upper-levelGBTS may affectoperations of its lower-level GBTSs.

l The number of levels ina chain topology cannotexceed five.

NOTEWhen the Abis Bypassfeature is enabled in thechain topology, lower-levelGBTSs can work properlyeven if an upper-level GBTSis powered off.



120


Tree The tree topology isapplicable to areaswhere the networkarchitecture, sitedistribution, andsubscriberdistribution arecomplicated, forexample, hot spotareas wheresubscribers arewidely distributed.

Compared with the startopology, the tree topologyrequires fewertransmission cables.

l Signals travel throughmultiple nodes, andtherefore transmissionreliability is low andnetwork deployment ormaintenance isdifficult.

l Faults in an upper-levelGBTS may affectoperations of its lower-level GBTSs.

l Capacity expansion isdifficult because it mayrequire big changes inthe current networkarchitecture.

l The number of levels ina tree topology cannotexceed five.

Ring The ring topology isapplicable to mostscenarios. Due to itsstrong self-healingcapability, the ringtopology isrecommended ifthere are sufficientroutes.

If transmission isinterrupted at a point, thering is automatically splitinto two chains so thatGBTSs located before andbehind the point can stillwork properly. Thisimproves the systemrobustness. For example,GBTSs 0, 1, and 2 areconnected to the BSC inforward direction in thering topology, as shown inFigure 7-2. Whentransmission is interruptedat point B, the GBTSlocated in front of point B(GBTS0) is still connectedto the BSC in forwarddirection, whereas theGBTSs located behindpoint B (GBTSs 1 and 2)are connected to the BSCin reverse direction in thechain topology.

There is always a linksegment that does nottransmit any data.



121

7.2 NodeB Transport Network TopologiesNodeBs support transport networks over ATM and IP.

ATM NetworkingATM networks support ATM over E1 transmission and have various networking modes, suchas the star, tree, and chain topologies, as shown in Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 ATM networking



122

NOTE

l In the BBU interconnection scenario, either of the BBUs can be connected to the transport network.It is recommended that BBU0 (root BBU) is connected to the transport network.

l In the BBU interconnection scenario, inter-subrack transmission interconnection in ATM over E1mode is not supported. In inter-subrack transmission interconnection, the transmission port on oneBBU is connected to the upper-level network or NodeB, and the transmission port on the other BBUis connected to the lower-level NodeB.

l In ATM over E1 transmission, inter-subrack configuration of the timeslot cross function and treelinkPVC is not supported.

IP NetworkingIP networks support IP over E1 and IP over FE transmission. IP networking capabilities ofNodeBs have been enhanced to support the IP hub networking in addition to the star, chain, andtree topologies, as shown in Figure 7-7. In the IP hub networking, aggregation devices can beplaced at cross connections between tree topologies. Typically, a hub NodeB is used for the first-level aggregation. Based on capacity requirements, another hub NodeB or a transmissiongateway can be used for the second-level aggregation. Figure 7-8 shows the IP hub networking.

NOTE

In IP over E1 transmission, inter-subrack configuration of the timeslot cross function and MP group bindingis not supported.



123

Figure 7-7 IP networking

Figure 7-8 IP hub networking

Topology Characteristics

Table 7-2 describes usage scenarios and characteristics of the preceding topologies.



124

Table 7-2 Usage scenarios and characteristics of the topologies


Star The star topology isthe most commontopology and appliesto densely populatedareas.

l The NodeB isdirectlyconnected to theradio networkcontroller (RNC).This simpletopology featureseasy engineering,maintenance, andcapacityexpansion.

l Data is directlytransmittedbetween theNodeB and theRNC, reducingthe number ofnodes that signalstravel throughand enhancingtransmissionreliability.

Compared with othertopologies, the startopology requiresmore transmissionresources.

Chain The chain topologyapplies to strip-shaped and sparselypopulated areas, suchas highways andrailways.

This topology helpsreduce expenditureon transmissionequipment,engineering, andleased transmissioncables.

l Signals travelthrough manynodes, whichlowerstransmissionreliability.

l A faulty NodeBmay affect theoperation oflower-levelNodeBs.

l The number oflevels in a chaintopology cannotexceed five.



125


Tree The tree topologyapplies to areas withcomplex networkarchitecture, sitedistribution, andsubscriberdistribution, forexample, hot spotareas in whichsubscribers arewidely distributed.

The tree topologyrequires fewertransmission cablesthan the startopology.

l Signals travelthrough manynodes, whichlowerstransmissionreliability andincreasesengineering andmaintenancedifficulties.

l A faulty NodeBmay affect theoperation oflower-levelNodeBs.

l Capacityexpansion isdifficult becauseit may requirechanges in thenetworkarchitecture.

l The number oflevels in a treetopology cannotexceed five.

7.3 eNodeB Transport Network TopologieseNodeBs support the star, chain, and tree topologies on IP networks.

An eNodeB communicates with a mobility management entity (MME) or serving gateway (S-GW) through an S1 interface based on E1/T1 or FE/GE transmission. (FE is short for fastEthernet, and GE is short for gigabit Ethernet.) The S1 interface supports the star, chain, andtree topologies, as shown in Figure 7-9.



126

Figure 7-9 Topologies on the S1 interface

Table 7-3 describes usage scenarios and characteristics of the preceding topologies.



127

Table 7-3 Usage scenarios and characteristics of the topologies

Topology

Usage Scenario Advantage Disadvantage

Star

The star topology is themost common topologyand is applicable todensely populated areas.

l Each eNodeB isdirectly connected toan MME or S-GWthrough a transportnetwork. This simpletopology features easyengineering,maintenance, andcapacity expansion.

l Each eNodeB directlyexchanges data with anMME or S-GW.Signals travel throughfew nodes, andtherefore networkreliability is high.

The star topology requiresmore transport resources thanthe other topologies.

Chain

The chain topology isapplicable to belt-shaped and sparselypopulated areas, such asareas along highwaysand railways.

This topology helps reduceexpenditure ontransmission equipment,engineering, and leasedtransmission cables.

l Signals travel throughmany nodes, which lowersnetwork reliability.

l Each lower-level eNodeBoccupies sometransmission bandwidth ofits upper-level eNodeB.Reliability of the upper-level eNodeB affectsoperation of the lower-level eNodeB.

l The number of levels in achain topology cannotexceed five.



128

Topology


Tree

The tree topology isapplicable to areas withcomplicated networkarchitecture, sitedistribution, andsubscriber distribution,for example, hot spotareas in whichsubscribers are widelydistributed.

This topology helps reduceexpenditure ontransmission equipment,engineering, and leasedtransmission cables.

l Signals travel throughmany nodes, which lowersnetwork reliability.

l Each lower-level eNodeBoccupies sometransmission bandwidth ofits upper-level eNodeB.Reliability of the upper-level eNodeB affectsoperation of the lower-level eNodeB.

l The number of levels in atree topology cannotexceed five.

7.4 MBTS Transport Network TopologiesThe multi-mode base transceiver station (MBTS) supports multiple transport networktopologies. Users can choose a certain topology according to onsite conditions. Each SiteUnitin an MBTS supports both independent transmission and co-transmission.

7.4.1 Transport Network TopologyThe multi-mode base transceiver station (MBTS) supports the star, chain, and ring topologies.Users can choose a certain topology according to onsite conditions.

Figure 7-10 shows the MBTS transport network topologies.



129

Figure 7-10 MBTS transport network topologies

Table 7-4 describes usage scenarios and advantages of the preceding topologies.



130

Table 7-4 Usage scenarios and advantages of the preceding topologies

TransportNetworkTopology


Star The star topology is themost common topologyand is applicable todensely populated areas.

l Each MBTS is directlyconnected to anMBSC/MME/S-GW.Therefore, thistopology ischaracterized by easyengineering,maintenance, andcapacity expansion.

l Each MBTS directlytransmits data to andreceives data from anMBSC/MME/S-GW.Signals travel throughfew nodes, andtherefore linereliability is high.

The star topology requiresmore transmissionresources than othertopologies.

Chain The chain topology isapplicable to belt-shapedand sparsely populatedareas, such as areas alonghighways and railways.

This topology helpsreduce costs oftransmission equipment,engineering construction,and leased transmissionlines.

l Signals travel throughmany nodes, whichlowers line reliability.

l Faults in an upper-level base station mayaffect lower-level basestations.

l The number of levelsin a chain topologycannot exceed five.

NOTEIn a chain topology, if Abisbypass is enabled, lower-level base stations can workproperly even if there is apower failure in an upper-level base station.



131

TransportNetworkTopology


Tree The tree topology isapplicable to areas withcomplicated networkarchitecture, sitedistribution, andsubscriber distribution,for example, hot spotareas in which subscribersare widely distributed.

The tree topology requiresfewer transmission cablesthan the star topology.

l Signals travel throughmany nodes, andtherefore linereliability is low andengineering andmaintenance aredifficult.

l Faults in an upper-level base station mayaffect lower-level basestations.

l Capacity expansion isdifficult because itmay require changesin the current networkarchitecture.

l The number of levelsin a tree topologycannot exceed five.

7.4.2 Independent TransmissionWhen independent transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to thetransport network through independent physical transmission ports. In this case, no impact existsbetween SiteUnits in terms of transmission.

Figure 7-11 shows the independent transmission mode of an MBTS.



132

Figure 7-11 Independent transmission mode of an MBTS

For the transmission mode of each SiteUnit, see the following:

l 7.1 GBTS Transport Network Topologiesl 7.2 NodeB Transport Network Topologiesl 7.3 eNodeB Transport Network Topologies

7.4.3 Co-TransmissionWhen co-transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit about to share transmissionrecourses is connected to the transport network through common physical transmission ports.In this case, impact exists between SiteUnits in terms of transmission. Co-transmission isclassified into TDM-based co-transmission and IP-based co-transmission. When IP-based co-transmission is applied, route backup and hybrid transport are supported.

TDM-based Co-TransmissionThe TDM timeslot cross function can be used to multiplex data of two modes onto the transportnetwork only when an MBTS works in GU mode. In this manner, E1/T1 transmission resourcesare shared on a timeslot basis and TDM transmission bandwidth can be shared in a semi-staticway. TDM stands for time division multiplexing.

The TDM-based co-transmission is implemented by the GSM Transmission, Timing, andManagement Unit for BBU (GTMU) board or the Universal Transmission Processing unit(UTRP) board working in GSM mode, as shown in Figure 7-12.



133

Figure 7-12 TDM-based co-transmission

The WCDMA Main Processing and Transmission Unit (WMPT) board or the Universal MainProcessing & Transmission Unit (UMPT) working in UMTS mode transmits UMTS E1/T1timeslots to the GTMU or UTRP (GSM) board through the TOP channel on the BBU backplane.The GTMU or UTRP (GSM) board provides E1/T1 ports that connect the base station to thetransport network. The GSM and UMTS data is multiplexed onto transmission links by usingthe TDM timeslot cross function, achieving E1/T1 transmission resource sharing on the timeslotbasis.

In the preceding scenario, only the following clock schemes can be used:

l The GBTS is configured with an E1/T1 clock source while the NodeB shares the GBTS'clock signals. (Recommended)

l When the BSC and RNC use the same E1/T1 clock source, the NodeB can be configuredwith the E1/T1 clock source and the GBTS can share the NodeB's clock or can be configuredwith another clock source.

IP-based Co-TransmissionWith IP over Ethernet or IP over E1/T1, all SiteUnits in an MBTS can share physical transmissionresources and dynamically share transmission bandwidth resources.

IP-based co-transmission can be achieved with two methods: interconnecting front panels andinterconnecting backplanes, as described in Table 7-5.



134

Table 7-5 Methods of achieve IP-based co-transmission

Co-TransmissionMode

Description Remarks

Frontpanelinterconnection

Two SiteUnits sharing transmissionresources are interconnectedthrough fast Ethernet (FE) ports ona front panel. One SiteUnit isconnected to the transport networkusing a transmission port, thisSiteUnit forwards the otherSiteUnit's data, and two SiteUnits'data is carried over the transmissionlink.

l Main control boards and UTRP boardsof two SiteUnits sharing transmissionresources must be installed in the sameBBU.

l Types of the FE ports used for frontpanel interconnection must be thesame. Therefore, two electrical FEports can be used and alternatively twooptical FE ports can be used.

l UTRP boards supporting co-transmission are UTRP2 (UMTS),UTRP4 (UMTS), UTRP9 (UMTS),and UTRPc (UMTS or LTE) boards.

l Configuring UTRP boards is optional.Due to limited bandwidth on UTRPboards, capacity expansion is difficultand therefore using UTRP boards toachieve IP-based co-transmission is notrecommended.



135

Co-TransmissionMode

Description Remarks

Backplaneinterconnection

Through main control boardsl With a single BBU, the main

control boards of two SiteUnitssharing transmission resourcescommunicate through the BBUbackplane. One SiteUnit isconnected to the transportnetwork using a transmissionport and this SiteUnit forwardsthe other SiteUnit's data. TwoSiteUnits' data is carried over thetransmission link.

l With BBU interconnection,SiteUnits sharing transmissionresources send data to the UMPTboard through the BBUbackplane. The UMPT board isconnected to the transportnetwork using its transmissionport and all SiteUnits' data iscarried over the transmissionlink. UMPT stands for UniversalMain Processing andTransmission unit.

l Main control boards supporting co-transmission are the UMPT (UMTS/LTE) and LMPT boards. Where, theLMPT board can be used when onlyone BBU is configured while theUMPT board can be used not only whenonly one BBU is configured but alsowhen BBU interconnection is applied.LMPT stands for LTE Main Processing& Transmission Unit.

l In an MBTS working in GU+UL mode,the UMPT (UMTS) board in the leafBBU does not support co-transmission.

Through a UTRPc board: SiteUnitssharing transmission resources senddata to the UTRPc board through theBBU backplane, the UTRPc board isconnected to the transport networkusing its transmission port, and allSiteUnits' data is carried over thetransmission link.

l If two BBUs are not interconnected, co-transmission is available to theSiteUnits that are installed in the sameBBU as the UTRPc board.

l If two BBUs are interconnected, theUTRPc board can be installed in eitherroot BBU or leaf BBU, and co-transmission is available to allSiteUnits using the UTRPc board.

Front Panel InterconnectionFigure 7-13 shows IP-based co-transmission, which is applied to GU dual-mode base stations.Table 7-6 provides information about board and port connection.



136

Figure 7-13 IP-based co-transmission (GU front plane interconnection)

Table 7-6 Board and port connection (GU front plane interconnection)

Board and Port for Front PanelInterconnection

Board Connected to the Transport Network

l An FE port on the GTMU boardis connected to an FE port on theWMPT or UMPT (UMTS)board.

l An FE port on the GTMU boardis connected to an FE port on theUTRP (UMTS) board.

WMPT, UMPT (UMTS), or UTRP (UMTS)

Figure 7-14 shows IP-based co-transmission, which is applied to GL dual-mode base stations.Table 7-7 provides information about board and port connection.



137

Figure 7-14 IP-based co-transmission (GL front plane interconnection)

Table 7-7 Board and port connection (GL front plane interconnection)



An FE port on the GTMU board isconnected to an FE port on theLMPT or UMPT (LTE) board.

LMPT, UMPT (LTE), or UTRP (LTE)

Figure 7-15 shows IP-based co-transmission, which is applied to UL dual-mode base stations.Table 7-8 provides information about board and port connection.



138

Figure 7-15 IP-based co-transmission (UL front plane interconnection)

Table 7-8 Board and port connection (UL front plane interconnection)



An FE port on the WMPT or UMPT(UMTS) board is connected to anFE port on the UMPT (LTE) orLMPT board.

LMPT, UMPT (LTE), or UTRP (LTE)

Backplane Interconnection

Through main control boards

l With a single BBU, Figure 7-16, Figure 7-17, and Figure 7-18 explain IP-based co-transmission.

l With BBU interconnection, co-transmission can be applied to any two SiteUnits or to allthe SiteUnits of this MBTS. In Figure 7-19, co-transmission is applied to the three SiteUnitsof an MBTS. Specifically, A and B send their own data to the UCIU board through theBBU backplane. Using a control link, the UCIU board sends the data to the UMPT board,



139

which is connected to the transport network using its transmission port. Then, the data ofA, B, and C is carried over the transmission link.

Figure 7-16 IP-based co-transmission (single BBU and GU backplane interconnection)

Figure 7-17 IP-based co-transmission (single BBU and GL backplane interconnection)



140

Figure 7-18 IP-based co-transmission (single BBU and UL backplane interconnection)

Figure 7-19 IP-based co-transmission (BBU interconnection)

Figure 7-20 shows IP-based co-transmission through a UTRPc board. In this figure, A, B, andC are the three SiteUnits of the MBTS. UTRPc stands for Universal Transmission Processingunit REV:c.



141

l When only one BBU is configured or two BBUs in an MBTS are not interconnected, co-transmission can be applied only to the two SiteUnits installed in the same BBU, as shownin scenario A.

l When BBU interconnection is applied to an MBTS, co-transmission can be applied to anytwo SiteUnits or to all the SiteUnits of this MBTS. In scenario B, co-transmission is appliedto the three SiteUnits of an MBTS. Specifically, A and B send their own data to the UCIUboard through the BBU backplane. Using a control link, the UCIU board sends the data tothe UMPT board, which in turn sends the data of A, B, and C to the UTRPc board throughthe BBU backplane. The UTRPc board is connected to the transport network using itstransmission port, and the data of A, B, and C is carried over the transmission link. UCIUstands for Universal Inter-Connection Infrastructure Unit.

Figure 7-20 UTRPc-based IP co-transmission through backplane interconnection

Route BackupThe MBTS can achieve route backup by using IP-based co-transmission, which enables backupbetween traffic channels.



142

When the MBTS supports route backup, each SiteUnit has two transmission channels, that is,the main channel and the backup channel.

l Main channel: When each SiteUnit connects to the transport network by using anindependent physical transmission port, this independent transmission link is the mainchannel for each SiteUnit.

l Backup channel: When the main control boards of two SiteUnits are interconnected byusing FE/GE ports, each SiteUnit's independent transmission link serves as a backupchannel for the other SiteUnit. FE stands for fast Ethernet and GE stands for gigabitEthernet.

Usage scenarios of the route backup function are as follows:

Scenario Description

The main channelis faulty.

In this case, the route backup function can be enabled to enableswitchover of transmission paths. Then, the system switches to thebackup channel to ensure that maintenance and service data of highpriority is not affected. After the main channel restores, the systemautomatically switches back to the main channel.

The transmissionis not ready.

In this case, a SiteUnit can use transmission links of another SiteUnit toensure that version management and other operations can be performedand completed properly.

Figure 7-21 shows the working principle of route backup when the main channel of the NodeBin an MBTS working in GU mode is faulty. This working principle also applies to other scenarios.



143

Figure 7-21 Working principle of route backup

In the preceding figure, the GBTS and NodeB connect to the transport network by usingindependent physical transmission ports and the GTMU and WMPT/UMPT boards areinterconnected by using FE ports. GTMU stands for GSM Transmission, Timing, andManagement Unit for BBU. WMPT stands for WCDMA Main Processing and TransmissionUnit. UMPT stands for Universal Main Processing and Transmission Unit. Under normalcircumstances, the GBTS and NodeB use their own independent transmission links (mainchannels) to transmit data. No impact exists between the GBTS and NodeB in terms oftransmission. If the main channel of the NodeB is faulty, the backup channel will be used andthe NodeB's data is transferred to the GTMU board over the FE interconnection cable. Moreover,the transmission link of the GBTS (the backup channel) will be used to ensure that high-prioritymaintenance and service data will not be affected. After the main channel of the NodeB isrestored, the system automatically switches back to the main channel to transmit data.

For route backup achieved using IP-based co-transmission, pay attention to the followinginformation:

l In IP over E1 mode, route backup is not supported.

l If the route backup function has been enabled on a physical channel, the hybrid transportfunction cannot be enabled on this channel.



144

l Route backup can be enabled only by interconnecting FE ports on main control boards.Interconnecting FE ports on a UTRP board and a main control board cannot enable routebackup.

l In route backup scenarios, the IEEE1588 V2 clock supports the backup switch of onlyunicast mode but not multicast mode.

l Route backup depends on Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD). When the mainchannel is faulty, the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM), signaling, andkey services of high priority are guaranteed preferentially. When the MBTS works in GU,GL, or UL mode, NodeB or eNodeB can use only BFD to bind the host-specific route. IfUMTS or LTE does not use BFD to bind the host-specific route, the active and standbyroutes cannot be switched over, and therefore the route backup function cannot take effect.

l If the MBTS works in UL mode and the main channel of the eNodeB is faulty, the QoS ofhigh-priority data streams is guaranteed preferentially when the backup channel is used.This is because the NodeB processing capability is limited and the NodeB cannot supportthe entire eNodeB traffic.

l If the MBTS works in GU or GL mode and the main channel of the NodeB or eNodeB isfaulty, the QoS of high-priority data streams is guaranteed preferentially when the backupchannel is used. This is because the GBTS processing capability is limited and the GBTScannot support the entire NodeB or eNodeB traffic.

Hybrid TransportAn MBTS working in UL mode can enable hybrid transport by using the IP-based co-transmission.

The MBTS working in UL mode supports the transfer of data over different transmission linksby priorities. In this scenario, an FE/GE port on the main control board serving UMTS isinterconnected with an FE/GE port on the main control board serving LTE to exchangeinformation. FE stands for fast Ethernet and GE stands for gigabit Ethernet. The E1/T1 port onthe main control board serving UMTS is connected to the transport network to bear high-priorityservices. An FE/GE port on the main control board serving LTE is connected to the transportnetwork to bear low-priority services.

There are three scenarios for hybrid transport:

l Scenario 1: The UMTS traffic is transmitted on different paths whereas the LTE traffic istransmitted on one path, as shown in Figure 7-22.

Figure 7-22 Hybrid transport (scenario 1)



145

l Scenario 2: The UMTS traffic is transmitted on one path whereas the LTE traffic is

transmitted on different paths, as shown in Figure 7-23.


l Scenario 3: Both UMTS traffic and LTE traffic are transmitted on different paths, as shown

in Figure 7-24.




146

8 CPRI-based Topologies

About This Chapter

This section describes CPRI-based topologies for 3900 series base stations and specificationsof CPRI ports on boards or modules. CPRI stands for common public radio interface.

8.1 GBTS CPRI-based TopologiesGBTSs support various topologies on the common public radio interface (CPRI): GBTSsequipped with remote radio units (RRUs) support the star, chain, and ring topologies. GBTSsequipped with radio frequency units (RFUs) support the star and chain topologies. In additionto topologies, CPRI specifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board or radio frequency(RF) module, CPRI data rate, supported topology, cascading capability, and maximum distancebetween a baseband unit (BBU) and an RF module.

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based TopologiesNodeBs support various topologies on the common public radio interface (CPRI): NodeBsequipped with remote radio units (RRUs) support the star, chain, and inter-board cold backupring. NodeBs equipped with radio frequency units (RFUs) support the star and chain topologies.In addition to topologies, CPRI specifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board orradio frequency (RF) module, CPRI data rate, cascading capability, and maximum distancebetween a baseband unit (BBU) and an RF module.

8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based TopologieseNodeBs support various topologies on the common public radio interface (CPRI): eNodeBsequipped with remote radio units (RRUs) support the star, chain, hot backup ring, intra-boardcold backup ring, and inter-board cold backup ring topologies; eNodeBs equipped with radiofrequency units (RFUs) support the star topologies. In addition to topologies, CPRIspecifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board or radio frequency (RF) module, CPRIdata rate, cascading capability, and maximum distance between a baseband unit (BBU) and anRF module.

8.4 MBTS CPRI-based TopologiesThe MBTS supports multiple CPRI-based topologies. Single-mode radio frequency (RF)modules support the star, chain, and ring topologies. Multi-mode RF modules support the star,dual-star, and CPRI MUX topologies. CPRI stands for common public radio interface. Inaddition to topologies, CPRI specifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board or RF

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 8 CPRI-based Topologies


147

module, CPRI data rate, cascading capability, and maximum distance between a baseband unit(BBU) and an RF module.



148

8.1 GBTS CPRI-based TopologiesGBTSs support various topologies on the common public radio interface (CPRI): GBTSsequipped with remote radio units (RRUs) support the star, chain, and ring topologies. GBTSsequipped with radio frequency units (RFUs) support the star and chain topologies. In additionto topologies, CPRI specifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board or radio frequency(RF) module, CPRI data rate, supported topology, cascading capability, and maximum distancebetween a baseband unit (BBU) and an RF module.

CPRI-based topologies

GBTSs support star, chain, and ring topologies.

Star Topology

Figure 8-1 shows the star topology.

Figure 8-1 Star Topology

Star topologies have the following advantages:

l Transmission reliability is high. When an RFU/RRU or an optical cable is faulty, only therelated sector is affected.

l This topology is easy. Installation and maintenance are convenient.

Compared with other topologies, star topology requires large numbers of optical cables.

Chain Topology

Figure 8-2 shows the chain topology.



149

Figure 8-2 Chain Topology

The chain topology helps reduce expenditure on transmission equipment.

Chain topologies have the following disadvantages:

l The number of cascading levels on a chain and the cascading distance are restricted.l RFU/RRUs working in different modes cannot be cascaded.l Faults in an upper-level RFU/RRU (such as serious hardware fault and power failure) will

affect lower-level RFU/RRUs.

NOTE

l RFUs and RRUs cannot be cascaded.

l Data rates of two common public radio interface (CPRI) ports on an RFU/RRU must be the same. That is,the data rate of each RF module on a CPRI chain must be the same.

Ring TopologyFigure 8-3 shows the ring topology.

Figure 8-3 Ring Topology



150

Ring topologies are a redundancy type of the chain topology and therefore provide highertransmission reliability.

Ring topologies have the following disadvantages:

l The number of cascading levels on a chain and the cascading distance are restricted.l RRUs working in different modes cannot be cascaded.l Faults on the forwarding link of an upper-level RRU affect its lower-level RRUs.

NOTE

RFUs do not support the ring topology.

CPRI SpecificationsTable 8-1 lists the CPRI port specifications on each board.

Table 8-1 CPRI port specifications on each board

Board Number of CPRIs CPRI Rate (Gbit/s) SupportedTopology

GTMU 6 1.25 Star, chain, or ring

GTMUb 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, or ring

UBRI 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, or ring

Table 8-2 lists the CPRI port specifications on each RF module.

Table 8-2 CPRI port specifications on each RF module

RF Module Number ofCPRIs

CPRI Rate(Gbit/s)

SupportedTopology

CascadingLevel

MaximumDistancefrom theBBU (km)

DRFU 2 1.25 Star or chain 3 N/A

GRFU 2 l GRFUV1: 1.25

l GRFUV2:1.25/2.5

Star or chain 2 N/A

RRU3004 2 1.25 Star, chain,or ring

6 40



151


CPRI Rate(Gbit/s)

SupportedTopology

CascadingLevel


RRU3008 2 l RRU3008 V1(850, or1900MHz):1.25

l RRU3008 V1(1800MHz) orRRU3008 V2:1.25/2.5

Star, chain,or ring

6 40

MRFU 2 l MRFUV1: 1.25

l MRFUV2:1.25/2.5

Star N/A N/A

MRFUd 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A N/A

MRFUe 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A N/A

RRU3908 2 l RRU3908 V1(850,900, or1900MHz):1.25

l RRU3908 V1(1800MHz) orRRU3908 V2:1.25/2.5

Star N/A 40



152


CPRI Rate(Gbit/s)

SupportedTopology

CascadingLevel


RRU3926 2 1.25/2.5 Star, chain,or ringNOTICE

When thenumber ofRRUcascadinglevels isgreater than6, the datarate ofconfiguredopticalmodulesmust be notlower than2.5 Gbit/s.

21 40

RRU3928 2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Star N/A 40

RRU3929 2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Star N/A 40

RRU3936 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A 40

RRU3938 2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Star N/A 40

RRU3939 2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Star N/A 40

RRU3942 2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Star N/A 40

8.2 NodeB CPRI-based TopologiesNodeBs support various topologies on the common public radio interface (CPRI): NodeBsequipped with remote radio units (RRUs) support the star, chain, and inter-board cold backupring. NodeBs equipped with radio frequency units (RFUs) support the star and chain topologies.In addition to topologies, CPRI specifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board orradio frequency (RF) module, CPRI data rate, cascading capability, and maximum distancebetween a baseband unit (BBU) and an RF module.

CPRI-based TopologiesNodeBs support the star, chain, and inter-board cold backup ring topologies.

NOTE

In the BBU interconnection scenario, either of the BBUs can be connected to the CPRI cable. It isrecommended that BBU0 is connected to the CPRI cable.



153

Star TopologyFigure 8-4 shows the star topology.






Chain TopologyFigure 8-5 shows the chain topology.





154




NOTE



Inter-board Cold Backup Ring TopologyFigure 8-6 shows the inter-board cold backup ring topology.

Figure 8-6 Inter-board cold backup ring

Advantage of the inter-board ring topology is that it is a redundancy type of the chain topologyand therefore provides higher transmission reliability.

The inter-board ring topology has the following disadvantages:l The number of cascading levels and cascading distances are restricted.l RRUs working in different modes cannot be cascaded.l Faults on the forwarding link of an upper-level RRU affect its lower-level RRUs.

NOTE

l RFUs cannot be used in the ring topology.

l A ring topology does not support inter-BBU connections. Two cascaded BBUs cannot be connectedin a ring topology network.

Specifications of CPRI PortsCPRI ports of different rates support different numbers of cells, as listed in Table 8-3.



155

NOTE

l Specifications provided in the following table are supported by the CPRI ports' hardware capability. For theactual number of cells supported by each module, see the 10 Product Specifications of the module inquestion.

l When the chain or ring topology is applied, cell specifications depend on the number of cells supported bydifferent modules and CPRI data rates.

l * in the following table indicates that the number of 2T2R cells supported is halved if two TX antennasenabled with the virtual antenna mapping (VAM) function are connected to two RF modules carried ondifferent CPRI links.

Table 8-3 CPRI port rate and number of cells supported

CPRIPortRate(Gbit/s)

Number of Cells Supported(1T2R)

Number of Cells Supported(2T2R)

1.25 4 4*

2.5 8 8*

Table 8-4 provides the CPRI port specifications of the WBBP board.

Table 8-4 CPRI port specifications of the WBBP board

Board Number ofCPRI Ports

CPRI Port Rate(Gbit/s)

Topology

WBBPa 3 1.25 Star, chain, or ring

WBBPb1/WBBPd2 3 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, or ring

WBBPb3/WBBPb4 3 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, or ring

WBBPd 6 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, or ring

WBBPf 6 1.25/2.5/4.9 Star, chain, or ring

Table 8-5 provides the CPRI port specifications of different RF modules.



156

Table 8-5 CPRI port specifications of different RF modules

Module Number ofCPRI Ports

CPRI PortRate(Gbit/s)

Topology CascadingLevel

MaximumDistancefrom theBBU(km)

WRFU 2 1.25/2.5 Star or chain 2 (serving thesame sector)

N/A

WRFUa 2 1.25/2.5 Star or chain 2 (serving thesame sector)

N/A

WRFUd 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A N/A

WRFUe 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A N/A

MRFU 2 l MRFUV1:1.25

l MRFUV2:1.25/2.5

Star N/A N/A

MRFUd 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A N/A

MRFUe 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A N/A

RRU3908 2 l RRU3908 V1(1800MHz):1.25/2.5

l RRU3908 V1(otherbands):1.25

l RRU3908 V2:1.25/2.5

Star N/A 40

RRU3928 2 1.25/2.5/4.9

Star N/A 40

RRU3929 2 1.25/2.5/4.9

Star N/A 40

RRU3942 2 1.25/2.5/4.9

Star N/A 40

RRU3926 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A 40



157


CPRI PortRate(Gbit/s)

Topology CascadingLevel

MaximumDistancefrom theBBU(km)

RRU3936 2 1.25/2.5 Star N/A 40

RRU3938 2 1.25/2.5/4.9

Star N/A 40

RRU3828 2 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, orring

l 4 at 1.25Gbit/s

l 8 at 2.5Gbit/s or4.9 Gbit/s

40

RRU3829 2 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, orring

RRU3804/RRU3806/RRU3808/RRU3824/RRU3826/RRU3838

2 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, orring

RRU3832/RRU3839

2 1.25/2.5/4.9

Star, chain, orring

RRU3801E 2 1.25/2.5 Star, chain, orring

RRU3805 2 l RRU3805(1800MHz):1.25/2.5

l RRU3805(otherbands):1.25

Star, chain, orring

NOTE

l The WRFUd, WRFUe, MRFUd, RRU3828, and RRU3928 cannot be cascaded.l Limited by the transmission bandwidth of CPRI ports, one RRU supports only one cell with one TX

channel and two RX channels at the maximum cascading level.

8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based TopologieseNodeBs support various topologies on the common public radio interface (CPRI): eNodeBsequipped with remote radio units (RRUs) support the star, chain, hot backup ring, intra-board



158

cold backup ring, and inter-board cold backup ring topologies; eNodeBs equipped with radiofrequency units (RFUs) support the star topologies. In addition to topologies, CPRIspecifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board or radio frequency (RF) module, CPRIdata rate, cascading capability, and maximum distance between a baseband unit (BBU) and anRF module.

CPRI-based TopologieseNodeBs support the star, chain, and ring topologies.

Star TopologyFigure 8-7 shows the star topology.






Chain TopologyFigure 8-8 shows the chain topology.



159






NOTE



Ring TopologyRing topologies are classified into the following types: hot backup ring, intra-board cold backupring, and inter-board cold backup ring. Figure 8-9, Figure 8-10, and Figure 8-11 show thesetopologies respectively.



160

Figure 8-9 Hot backup ring

In the hot backup ring topology, two CPRI links transmit identical service data, but the LBBPwhere the cell is established and the RRU process data on one link only. If a CPRI port is faulty,services are switched over to the other CPRI link, with a maximum interruption time of 500 ms.If the LBBP where the cell is established is faulty, the cell is reestablished on the other LBBP,with a maximum interruption time of 20s.

NOTE

The hot backup ring topology has the following constraints:

l Only ports 0, 1, and 2 on the two LTE baseband processing units (LBBPs) can be used in this topology.

l The two LBBP boards are installed in two slots among slots 0, 1, 2, and 3 in the baseband unit (BBU). Ifone is installed in slot 0, the other can be installed only in slot 2 or 3.

l If the two LBBP boards are installed in slots 2 and 3 in the BBU, a maximum of three rings are supportedbetween the LBBP boards. In other situations, only one ring is supported.

Figure 8-10 Intra-board cold backup ring



161

In the intra-board cold backup ring topology, if a CPRI port is faulty, the cell is reestablished,with an interruption time of shorter than 20s.

Figure 8-11 Inter-board cold backup ring

In the inter-board cold-backup ring topology, if a CPRI port or LBBP board is faulty, the cell isreestablished on the LBBP board or the other LBBP board, with a service interruption timeshorter than 20s.

The advantage of ring topologies is that they are a redundancy type of the chain topology andtherefore provide higher transmission reliability.

Ring topologies have the following disadvantages:

l The number of cascading levels and cascading distances are restricted.l RRUs working in different modes cannot be cascaded.l Faults on the forwarding link of an upper-level RRU affect its lower-level RRUs.

NOTE

RFUs cannot be used in the ring topology.

Specifications of CPRI Ports

The number of cells supported varies according to CPRI data rates, as listed in Table 8-6.

Table 8-6 CPRI data rate and the number of cells supported

CPRIDataRate(Gbit/s)

Number of Cells Supported (4 x 4MIMO)


1.25 Due to the limited transmissionbandwidth of CPRI ports, a 4 x 4MIMO cell is not recommended toconfigure.

1 if the cell bandwidth is less than orequal to 10 MHz.



162




2.5 1 if the cell bandwidth is less than orequal to 10 MHz.

l 2 if the cell bandwidth is less thanor equal to 10 MHz.

l 1 if the cell bandwidth is 15 MHz or20 MHz.

4.9 l 2 if the cell bandwidth is less thanor equal to 10 MHz.


l 4 if the cell bandwidth is less thanor equal to 10 MHz.


Table 8-7 lists the specifications of CPRI ports on different LBBP boards.

Table 8-7 Specifications of CPRI ports on LBBP boards

Board Number of CPRIPorts

CPRI Data Rate(Gbit/s)

Topology

LBBPc 6 1.25, 2.5, or 4.9 Star, chain, or ring

LBBPd 6 1.25, 2.5, 4.9, or 9.8 Star, chain, or ring

Table 8-8 lists the specifications of CPRI ports on different RF modules.

Table 8-8 Specifications of CPRI ports on RF modules


CPRI DataRate (Gbit/s)

Topology CascadingLevels


CRFUd 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star N/A N/A

LRFU 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A N/A

LRFUe 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star N/A N/A

MRFU V2 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A N/A

MRFUd 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A N/A

MRFUe 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A N/A



163





RRU3201 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star, chain,or ring

When therate at theCPRI port is1.25 Gbit/s:Cascading isnotrecommended.When therate at theCPRI port is2.5 Gbit/s:l Three

levels aresupportedif the cellbandwidth is lessthan orequal to 5MHz.

l Twolevels aresupportedif the cellbandwidth is 10MHz.

l Cascading is notrecommended ifthe cellbandwidth isgreaterthan orequal to15 MHz.

When therate at theCPRI port is4.9 Gbit/s:

l When theLBBPc orLBBPd1isconfigured: 20

l When theLBBPd3isconfigured:– Cell

quantity ≤3: 40

– Cellquantity ≥4: 20

l When theLBBPd2isconfigured: 40



RRU3221 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring


RRU3229 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring




164





RRU3832 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring

l Fourlevels aresupportedif the cellbandwidth is lessthan orequal to10 MHz.

l Twolevels aresupportedif the cellbandwidth isgreaterthan orequal to15 MHz.



165





RRU3240 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring

When therate at theCPRI port is1.25 Gbit/s:Cascading isnotrecommended.When therate at theCPRI port is2.5 Gbit/s:l Two

levels aresupportedif the cellbandwidth is lessthan orequal to 5MHz.

l Cascading is notrecommended ifthe cellbandwidth is 10MHz.

When therate at theCPRI port is4.9 Gbit/s:l Two

levels aresupportedif the cellbandwidth is lessthan orequal to10 MHz.

l Cascading is not



166





RRU3841 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring

recommended ifthe cellbandwidth isgreaterthan or



167





equal to15 MHz.

RRU3908 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A

RRU3926 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A

RRU3928 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star N/A

RRU3929 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star N/A

RRU3936 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A

RRU3938 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star N/A

RRU3939 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star N/A

RRU3942 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star N/A

NOTE

l Due to the limited transmission bandwidth of CPRI ports, cascading is not recommended in the followingconditions:

l An RF module whose rate at the CPRI port is 1.25Gbit/s.

l An RF module whose rate at the CPRI port is 2.5 Gbit/s and the cell bandwidth is greater than or equalto 15 MHz.

l A 2T4R or 4T4R RF module whose rate at the CPRI port is 2.5 Gbit/s and the cell bandwidth is greaterthan or equal to 10 MHz.

l A 2T4R or 4T4R RF module whose rate at the CPRI port is 4.9 Gbit/s and the cell bandwidth is greaterthan or equal to 15 MHz.

l The Cascading Levels column in Table 8-8 lists the cascading capability of RF modules with a single carrierper module.

8.4 MBTS CPRI-based TopologiesThe MBTS supports multiple CPRI-based topologies. Single-mode radio frequency (RF)modules support the star, chain, and ring topologies. Multi-mode RF modules support the star,dual-star, and CPRI MUX topologies. CPRI stands for common public radio interface. Inaddition to topologies, CPRI specifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board or RFmodule, CPRI data rate, cascading capability, and maximum distance between a baseband unit(BBU) and an RF module.



168

8.4.1 CPRI-based TopologiesThe MBTS supports multiple CPRI-based topologies. Single-mode radio frequency (RF)modules support the star, chain, and ring topologies. Multi-mode RF modules support the star,dual-star, and CPRI MUX topologies. CPRI stands for common public radio interface.

For CPRI-based topologies supported by multi-mode RF modules working in a single mode andsingle-mode RF modules, see the following:

l 8.1 GBTS CPRI-based Topologiesl 8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologiesl 8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies

Multi-mode RF modules working in multiple modes support the dual-star and CPRI MUXtopologies.

Dual-Star TopologyFigure 8-12 shows the dual-star topology.



169

Figure 8-12 Dual-Star Topology



170

NOTE

In Figure 8-12, GU dual-mode RF modules adopt the dual-star topology.

Data of different modes is transmitted over different CPRI cables and therefore the data of onemode does not greatly affect the data of another mode.

Dual-star topologies have the following disadvantages:

l Two CPRI ports on an RFU/RRU are used by two modes separately. Therefore, RFU/RRUscannot be cascaded.

l Data rates of two CPRI ports on an RFU/RRU must be the same and therefore the RFU/RRU only supports the lower data rate on a CPRI port.

CPRI MUXFigure 8-13 shows the CPRI MUX topology. Currently, only RRU3929 modules that operatein the 1700 MHz frequency band and work in UL mode support the CPRI MUX topology.

Figure 8-13 CPRI MUX topology

Figure 8-14 shows the data flows when the CPRI MUX topology is used. In this figure, A andB indicate two modes of the MBTS, respectively.

Figure 8-14 Data flows



171

l Downlink data flow: A sends data to B through the BBU backplane. After converging thedata of A and B, B sends the converged data to RRUs through CPRI links.

l Uplink data flow: RRUs send B the data designated for A and B through CPRI links. Uponreceiving the data, B separates the data and sends A the data designated for A through theBBU backplane.

In the preceding scenario, B is the converging party while A is the converged party. A does nothave an independent CPRI link and therefore it shares B's CPRI links and CPRI bandwidth.

The advantage of the CPRI MUX topology: In the refarming scenario, if multi-mode RF modulesare originally configured with only single fibers, newly added modes can share these moduleswith the existing modes through this topology without bothering adjusting or adding CPRIcables. This reduces engineering costs and shortens the service interruption period.

When using the CPRI MUX topology, pay attention to the following:

l Data convergence is allowed only between two modes within the same BBU. Only onemode is allowed to converge the other mode's data. The two modes are not allowed toconverge each other's data.

l The UMTS mode serves as the converging party and the LTE mode serves as the convergedparty. Only the LBBPd and WBBPf support CPRI MUX. To support CPRI MUX, theymust be installed in slot 2 or 3, respectively. LBBPd stands for LTE BaseBand Processingunit REV:d. WBBPf stands for WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:f.

l Resetting software/hardware or removing/adding a main control board on the convergingparty interrupts PS and CS services on the converged party. Resetting software/hardwareor removing/adding a main control board on the converged party may slow down the datarate of PS services on the converging party or even interrupt the PS services. In addition,the CS services on the converging party may also be interrupted. For details, see 9.4.3Maintenance Between Modes.

Remote Topology

Based on the distance between a BBU and an RRU, CPRI-based topologies are classified intothe following:

l Short-distance remote topology: The longest distance between an RRU and a BBU on aCPRI chain does not exceed 100 m.

l Long-distance remote topology: The longest distance between an RRU and a BBU on aCPRI chain exceeds 100 m.

Different CPRI optical cables are used in the preceding topologies. For details, see chapter CPRIOptical-Fiber Cable in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.

8.4.2 CPRI SpecificationsCPRI specifications cover the number of CPRI ports on a board or RF module, CPRI data rate,cascading capability, and maximum distance between a baseband unit (BBU) and an RF module.

The CPRI data rate can be 1.25, 2.5, or 4.9 Gbit/s. The CPRI data rate is related to the numberof supported cells and the bandwidth. Table 8-9 lists the number of supported cells and thebandwidth with different CPRI data rates.



172

NOTE

l A x B MHz indicates that the number of cells configured for LTE is A and the bandwidth of each cell is B.

l nTmR indicates that the number of transmit channels is n and the number of receive channels is m.

l * in the following table indicates that the number of UMTS 2T2R cells supported is halved if two TX antennasenabled with the virtual antenna mapping (VAM) function are connected to two RF modules carried ondifferent CPRI links.

l In a GU dual-mode base station, the UMTS side reserves CPRI bandwidth for a TX and an RX channel ofthe GSM side in case that bandwidth on the GSM side is insufficient. As a result, the cell number supportedby the UMTS side is reduced.

Table 8-9 Number of supported cells and bandwidth with different CPRI data rates


Number of CellsSupported by UMTS(1T2R)

Number of CellsSupported by UMTS(2T2R)

Number of CellsSupported by LTE

1.25 4 l UO: 4*l GU: 3

1 x 10 MHz (2T2R)

2.5 8 l UO: 8*l GU: 7

1 x 20 MHz (2T2R)

4.9 N/A N/A 1 x 20 MHz (4T4R)

For specifications of CPRI ports on boards, on single-mode RF modules, or on multi-mode RFmodules working in a single mode, see the following:

l 8.1 GBTS CPRI-based Topologies

l 8.2 NodeB CPRI-based Topologies

l 8.3 eNodeB CPRI-based Topologies

Table 8-10 lists the specifications of CPRI ports on multi-mode RF modules working in multiplemodes.

Table 8-10 Specifications of CPRI ports on multi-mode RF modules working in multiple modes

Module

Numberof CPRIPorts




MRFU 2 l MRFU V1:1.25

l MRFU V2:1.25/2.5

Dual-star N/A N/A



173

Module

Numberof CPRIPorts




MRFUd

2 1.25/2.5 Dual-star N/A N/A

MRFUe

2 1.25/2.5 Dual-star N/A N/A

RRU3908

2 l RRU3908 V1(850, 900, or1900 MHz):1.25

l RRU3908 V1(1800 MHz) orRRU3908 V2:1.25/2.5

Dual-star N/A 40

RRU3926

2 1.25/2.5 Dual-star N/A 40

RRU3936

2 1.25/2.5 Dual-star N/A 40

RRU3928

2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Dual-star N/A 40

RRU3938

2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Dual-star N/A 40

RRU3939

2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Dual-star N/A 40



174

Module

Numberof CPRIPorts




RRU3929

2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Dual-star orCPRI MUX

l Dual-star:N/A

l CPRIMUX: 4

l Dual-star:40

l In theCPRIMUXtopology,thedistancebetweenevery twoRRUsmust notexceed 10km, thedistancebetweenthe BBUandnearestRRUmust notexceed 10km, andthedistancebetweenthe BBUandfarthestRRU on aCPRIchainmust notexceed 20km. Ifonly oneRRU is ona CPRIchain, thedistancebetweenthe RRUand BBUmust not



175

Module

Numberof CPRIPorts




exceed 10km.

RRU3942

2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Dual-star N/A 40

RRU3832

2 1.25/2.5/4.9 Dual-star N/A 40

NOTE

When the CPRI MUX topology is applied, the CPRI data rate must be 2.5 Gbit/s or higher.

8.4.3 CPRI MUX SpecificationsWhen CPRI MUX is applied, cell specifications relate to the CPRI data rate. CPRI stands forcommon public radio interface.

When radio frequency (RF) modules work in UL mode and CPRI MUX is applied to them, theseRF modules can be cascaded. In addition, cell specifications supported by CPRI MUX relate tothe CPRI data rate.

RRU3929 (1700 MHz)Table 8-11 provides CPRI MUX specifications when RRU3929s operating in the 1700 MHzfrequency band are used.

NOTE

l RRU3929s operating in the 1700 MHz frequency band support a CPRI data rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.

l In AxB MHz, A indicates the number of supported carriers and B indicates the bandwidth of each carrier.

l UMTS uses the 1T2R or 1T2R configuration and LTE uses the 2T2R configuration. If LTE uses the 1T1Rconfiguration, the cell specifications are the same as those listed in the following table.

l If less than four CPRI links are required, use the configurations where the number of CPRI links is 3. If fouror more CPRI links are required, use the configurations where the number of CPRI links is 6.



176

Table 8-11 Cell specifications when the CPRI data rate is 4.9 Gbit/s (WBBPf1, WBBPf2, orWBBPf3 boards configured, common cells)

Number ofUMTS Carriers

Number of LTECarriers

Number ofCPRI Links

MaximumNumber ofCellsSupportedby Each CPRILink(Uncompressed LTE CPRI,1T1R forUMTS)

MaximumNumber ofCellsSupportedby Each CPRILink(Uncompressed LTE CPRI,1T2R forUMTS)

1 x 5 MHz 1 x 15 MHz 3 1 1

6 1 1

2 x 5 MHz 1 x 10 MHz 3 3 2

6 2 2

1 x 5 MHz 1 x 5 MHz 3 6 5

6 4 4

2 x 5 MHz 1 x 5 MHz 3 5 4

6 4 4



177

9 Operation and Maintenance

About This Chapter

The 3900 series base stations are managed by an operation and maintenance (O&M) systemusing either man-machine language (MML) commands or a graphical user interface (GUI). Thissystem is hardware-independent and provides comprehensive functions to meet users' variousO&M requirements.

9.1 GBTS Operation and MaintenanceThe operation and maintenance (O&M) system of GSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs)covers management, monitoring, and maintenance of the software, hardware, and configurationof GBTSs. In addition, GBTSs allow diversified O&M modes in different scenarios.

9.2 NodeB Operation and MaintenanceNodeB operation and maintenance (O&M) covers management, monitoring, and maintenanceof the software, hardware, and configuration of NodeBs. In addition, NodeBs allow diversifiedO&M modes in different scenarios.

9.3 eNodeB Operation and MaintenanceOperation and maintenance (O&M) covers management, monitoring, and maintenance of thesoftware, hardware, and configuration of eNodeBs. In addition, eNodeBs allow diversifiedO&M modes in different scenarios.

9.4 MBTS Operation and MaintenanceOperation and Maintenance (O&M) covers management, monitoring, and maintenance of thesoftware, hardware, and configuration of the MBTSs. In addition, diversified O&M modes areprovided in various scenarios.

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 9 Operation and Maintenance


178

9.1 GBTS Operation and MaintenanceThe operation and maintenance (O&M) system of GSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs)covers management, monitoring, and maintenance of the software, hardware, and configurationof GBTSs. In addition, GBTSs allow diversified O&M modes in different scenarios.

9.1.1 GBTS Operation & Maintenance ModesGSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs) support near-end, far-end, and centralized networkmanagement operation and maintenance (O&M).

l Near-end O&M: The site maintenance terminal (SMT) is used to maintain the GBTSthrough the Ethernet at the near end, as well as operate and maintain sites, cells, TRXs,baseband units (BBUs), channels, and boards. This mode applies to maintenance of a singleGBTS.

l Far-end O&M: The local maintenance terminal (LMT) is used to maintain the GBTSthrough the operation and maintenance links (OMLs) on the Abis interface at the far end,as well as operate and maintain sites, cells, TRXs, channels, and boards. The Abis interfaceconnects the GBTS to base station controller (BSC), and the LMT communicates with theBSC through a local area network (LAN). This mode is applicable to configuration for theBSC and GBTS data.

l Centralized network management: The M2000 is used to maintain GBTSs through BSCs,as well as operate and maintain sites, cells, channels, and boards. This mode is applicableto maintenance of multiples GBTSs at the same time.

Figure 9-1 shows the GBTS O&M system.

Figure 9-1 O&M system of GBTSs

The GBTS O&M system consists of:



179

l SMT: used to maintain the GBTS and configure data at the near end.

l GBTS: object to be maintained.

l LMT: used to maintain the BSC and the GBTSs that connect to the BSC as well as configuredata at the far end.

l M2000: short for iManager M2000 Mobile Element Management System, which centrallymanages Huawei network devices; the M2000 also remotely and centrally managesmultiple base stations.

l CME: short for Configuration Management Express, which can configures and managesdata for multiple base stations.

9.1.2 GBTS Operation & Maintenance FunctionsThe operation and maintenance (O&M) functions of GSM base transceiver stations (GBTSs)include equipment management, software management, configuration management, servicemanagement, performance management, security management, alarm management, andenvironment monitoring.

Equipment Management

Supports the ability to query the status of all the GBTS components (boards and modules) andexternal physical devices (power suppliers, environment monitors, and remote electrical tiltantennas) as well as provides the data configuration and status management functions for certaindevices.

Software Management

Supports the ability to download and activate GBTS software, install patches, upload anddownload files, perform consistency checks on software and hardware versions, as well asmanage and upgrade software versions.

Configuration Managementl Supports the ability to perform consistency checks on the added, deleted, and modified

GBTS configuration data.

l Supports the ability to automatically back up data.

l Supports dynamic and static data configuration. In dynamic data configuration mode, thedata takes effect immediately after modification. In static data configuration mode, the datatakes effect only after the GBTS resets.

Service Managementl Supports the ability to set parameters and query alarms for baseband boards and

environment monitoring device.

l Supports the ability to perform self-tests when installing hardware, use the GBTS softwarepackage stored in the USB flash drive to upgrade software at the near end, and supportsoftware commissioning at the far end. The software upgrade using the GBTS softwarepackage saved in the USB disk takes a shorter time than the common software upgrade.

NOTE

The security of the USB loading port is ensured by encryption.



180

Performance Managementl Supports the ability to monitor the performance of both internal and external

communication networks. If the performance deteriorates, related alarms are generated.

l Supports the ability to monitor the GBTS operation, such as monitoring the traffic volumeon each port and measuring performance statistics.

l Supports the ability to monitor the usage of key GBTS components, such as centralprocessing units (CPUs) and digital signal processors (DSPs).

Security Management

Supports the ability to manage the connection between GBTS software and the operation andmaintenance center (OMC) and parse interface messages between the GBTS and OMC, as wellas provides the user authentication and encryption functions.

Alarm Managementl Supports the ability to query active and historical alarms.

l Supports the ability to collect information about internal and external alarms.

l Supports the ability to analyze the alarm correlation to improve the precision and accuracyin alarm reporting.

l Supports the ability to save, interpret, display, mask, filter, confirm, clear, and reportalarms.

l Supports the ability to detect faults and report related alarms.

Environment Monitoring

Supports the ability to monitor environment.

The environment monitoring system is used to monitor door status, infrared, smoke, waterdamage, humidity, and temperature as required.

9.2 NodeB Operation and MaintenanceNodeB operation and maintenance (O&M) covers management, monitoring, and maintenanceof the software, hardware, and configuration of NodeBs. In addition, NodeBs allow diversifiedO&M modes in different scenarios.

9.2.1 NodeB Operation & Maintenance ModesNodeBs support near-end, far-end, and reverse operation and maintenance (O&M).

l In near-end O&M mode, maintenance personnel maintain NodeBs on the local maintenanceterminal (LMT) through a local Ethernet maintenance port.

l In far-end O&M mode, maintenance personnel centrally maintain NodeBs on the M2000or LMT in the radio network controller (RNC) equipment room or operation andmaintenance center (OMC).



181

l In reverse maintenance mode, maintenance personnel maintain a NodeB under the sameRNC as the current NodeB through a local Ethernet service port on the LMT. The IP routebetween the current NodeB and the other NodeB is established by the RNC.

Figure 9-2 shows the O&M system of NodeBs.

Figure 9-2 O&M system of NodeBs

The O&M system of NodeBs consists of the following elements:

l LMT: is mainly used to locally or remotely maintain NodeBs and configure data.l NodeB: is the O&M object.l M2000: short for iManager M2000 Mobile Element Management System, which centrally

manages Huawei network devices; the M2000 also remotely and centrally managesmultiple base stations.


NodeB O&M modes have the following features:

l Supports the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP),and Adaptive and Active Cache Pool (AACP). When no data is configured for the systemor when the system is faulty, the O&M channel can be automatically set up. This enhancesthe system reliability and facilitates remote troubleshooting.

l Supports configuration baseline, simplifying the configuration rollback process andimproving configuration rollback reliability.

l Provides the RRU topology scanning function, allowing automatic monitoring of the RRUtopology.

l Provides a comprehensive system self-check function, omitting local softwarecommissioning.



182

9.2.2 NodeB Operation & Maintenance FunctionsNodeB operation and maintenance (O&M) functions include commissioning management,equipment management, software management, alarm management, security management, andenvironment monitoring management.

NOTE

In BBU interconnection mode, the following operations can be performed only on the main control boards:

l Software upgrades and data configuration by using a USB flash drive

l Local operations on the LMT

l Clock tests

l VSWR tests by using a USB flash drive

Commissioning ManagementCommissioning management has the following functions:

l Equipment performance tests, such as the CPU usage test, clock source quality test, andpower detection

l Routine tests, such as E1/T1 performance measurementl Service performance tests, such as uplink channel scanning and statistics for service

resource usage

Equipment ManagementEquipment management covers equipment maintenance and data configuration, including thefollowing functions:

l Equipment maintenance functions, such as the board reset, equipment status management,equipment self-check, active/standby switchover, and time correction

l Configuration, query, and backup of equipment parameters, such as hardware parameters,clock parameters, algorithm parameters, and RF parameters

Software ManagementSoftware management has the following functions:

l Software activationl Consistency check on software and hardware versionsl Query of hardware and software versionsl Software upgrades and patch installation

Alarm ManagementAlarm management consists of equipment alarm management and environment alarmmanagement.

l Equipment alarm managementThe alarm management system can detect and report equipment faults in real time. TheLMT or the M2000 can display alarm information and provide alarm handling suggestions.



183

The alarm management system of the M2000 is connected to an alarm box through a serialport and supports both audible and visual alarms. The maintenance personnel can subscribeto the alarm information that can be forwarded to their handsets or pagers so that they canhandle the faults in time.

l Environment alarm management

Typically, NodeB equipment rooms are unattended and distributed over a large area. Theequipment works in a relatively adverse environment, and emergency cases may occur. Tohelp you handle such emergency cases, the NodeB provides a comprehensive alarmmanagement system.

Alarm management has the following functions:

l Alarm detecting

l Alarm reporting

l Alarm masking

l Alarm acknowledgement

l Alarm preprocessing

l Alarm correlation processing

l Alarm help information processing

Security Management

The NodeB can M2000 perform hierarchical control on operation rights of maintenancepersonnel. This prevents equipment running from misoperations.

Environment Monitoring

The environment monitoring system provides customized monitoring functions, such as doorcontrol, infrared, and detection of smoke, water, humidity, and temperature.

9.3 eNodeB Operation and MaintenanceOperation and maintenance (O&M) covers management, monitoring, and maintenance of thesoftware, hardware, and configuration of eNodeBs. In addition, eNodeBs allow diversifiedO&M modes in different scenarios.

9.3.1 eNodeB Operation & Maintenance ModeseNodeBs support both near-end and far-end operation and maintenance (O&M).

l In near-end O&M mode, maintenance personnel use the local maintenance terminal (LMT)to operate and maintain a single eNodeB.

l In far-end O&M mode, maintenance personnel use the M2000 or LMT to operate andmaintain eNodeBs in a centralized manner in the operation and maintenance center (OMC).

Figure 9-3 shows the O&M system of eNodeBs.



184

Figure 9-3 O&M system of eNodeBs

The O&M system of eNodeBs consists of the following elements:

l LMT: is used to maintain a single eNodeB locally or remotely.l M2000: short for iManager M2000 Mobile Element Management System, which centrally

manages Huawei network devices; the M2000 also remotely and centrally managesmultiple base stations.


l eNodeB: is the O&M object.

9.3.2 eNodeB Operation & Maintenance FunctionseNodeB operation and maintenance (O&M) functions include configuration management, faultmanagement, performance management, security management, software management,deployment management, equipment management, and inventory management.

Configuration ManagementConfiguration management includes data configuration, query, export, and backup andrestoration, as well as configuration synchronization with the M2000.

The data configuration is based on managed objects (MOs) of the following categories: device,transport, and service. These categories are independent of each other. In most cases,modifications of the service configuration do not require modifications of the deviceconfiguration, and modifications of the device configuration do not require modifications of theservice configuration either.



185

Fault ManagementFault management includes fault detection, fault isolation and self-healing, alarm reporting, andalarm correlation. The faults might be related to hardware, environment, software, transmission,cells, and different types of services in cells.

l Fault isolation and self-healing have the following benefits: (1) prevents a fault in a part ofan eNodeB from affecting other parts; (2) reestablishes a cell of lower specifications tominimize the impact of the fault on services.

l The alarm correlation function enables the system to report only the alarm indicating theroot fault and the ultimate impact on services, though there may be chains of problemscaused by the root fault.

Performance ManagementPerformance management includes the periodic control on eNodeB performance measurementsand the collection, storage, and reporting of performance statistics.

eNodeBs collect performance statistics every 15, 30, or 60 minutes and can store the resultsmeasured in a maximum of three days. The performance measurement covers eNodeB-level andcell-level performance and also covers neighboring cells, transmission, standard interfaces, andthe device usage.

eNodeBs support real-time monitoring of key performance indicators (KPIs) at intervals of 1minute, which helps detect and diagnose faults in a timely fashion.

Tracing ManagementMessage tracing management facilitates routine maintenance, commissioning, and faultdiagnosis by tracing messages over interfaces and signaling links, messages to and from userequipment (UE), and internal messages.

Security ManagementSecurity management provides the eNodeB authentication and access control functions, whichinclude user account management, rights management, login management, identityauthentication, and operation authentication.

In addition, security management includes security control on the channels between eNodeBsand the element management system (EMS). The channels support encryption using SecureSockets Layer (SSL).

Security management provides network- and user-level security service. It provides thefollowing functions:l Encryption: encryption of important user informationl Authentication: management of user accounts and authentication of usersl Access control: control for user operationsl Security protocol: support for SSL

Software ManagementSoftware management includes software version management, software version upgrades, andpatch management.



186

l Software version management includes query, backup, and restoration of software versions.l Software version upgrades can be remotely performed on a batch of eNodeBs. With the

one-click upgrade wizard provided by the M2000, users can perform health checks beforeand after the upgrades and back up, download, and activate the software. During thisprocess, users can check the upgrade status and results. eNodeBs support automatic updatesof configurations during upgrades; users only need to follow the instructions in the upgradewizard. In addition, eNodeBs support rapid version rollback by running a single command,reducing the impact of upgrade failures on the system.

l Patch management includes the following operations: query, download, loading, activation,deactivation, rollback, confirmation, and removal.

Deployment ManagementThe eNodeB deployment solutions include board-in-cabinet transportation, automatic discoveryof eNodeBs, initial configuration by using a universal serial bus (USB) flash drive, and remotedeployment. These solutions greatly reduce the workload and efforts of field installationpersonnel. No computer is required. The personnel only need to install the hardware.

l Board-in-cabinet transportation indicates that base stations come with RFUs, PMUs, PSUs,and BBU3900s installed and with cables laid. Board-in-cabinet transportation shortensonsite hardware installation duration.

l By using automatic discovery of eNodeBs, users do not need to set the IP addresses of theeNodeBs and EMS.

l Users can download software and data of an eNodeB from a USB flash drive, saving timeespecially when the bandwidth of transmission between the eNodeB and the EMS isinsufficient.

l During remote deployment, software commissioning is performed in the operation andmaintenance center (OMC) rather than on site. Customers can perform acceptance tests inthe OMC.

NOTE

The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.

Equipment ManagementEquipment management includes data configuration, status management, and fault detectionand handling for all the devices in an eNodeB. On the device panel, users can view device statusand perform simple operations such as blocking, reset, and switchover.

Inventory ManagementInventory management includes collection and reporting of the inventory information abouteNodeBs. With inventory management, users can centrally manage network equipment (NE)assets in the OMC.

9.4 MBTS Operation and MaintenanceOperation and Maintenance (O&M) covers management, monitoring, and maintenance of thesoftware, hardware, and configuration of the MBTSs. In addition, diversified O&M modes areprovided in various scenarios.



187

9.4.1 MBTS Operation & Maintenance ModesAn MBTS supports both near-end and far-end operation and maintenance (O&M).

l Near-end O&M: Maintenance personnel locally maintain an MBTS using a sitemaintenance terminal (SMT) or local maintenance terminal (LMT).

l Far-end O&M: Maintenance personnel remotely maintain one or multiple MBTSs usingan LMT or the M2000.

Figure 9-4 shows the O&M system of an MBTS.

Figure 9-4 O&M system of the MBTS

The O&M system of the MBTS consists of the following items:

l MBTS: maintained object

l GBTS SMT: used to locally maintain devices controlled by the GBTS

l NodeB LMT: used to locally or remotely maintain devices controlled by the NodeB

l eNodeB LMT: used to locally or remotely maintain devices controlled by the eNodeB

l BSC LMT: used to maintain and manage the BSC and the GBTS connected to the BSC

l M2000: short for iManager M2000 Mobile Element Management System, which centrallymanages Huawei network devices; the M2000 also remotely and centrally managesmultiple base stations.



188


Maintenance personnel can operate and maintain each SiteUnit independently by using the SMTor LMT locally or using the M2000 or LMT remotely. They can also manage the MBTS as anintegrated entity by using the M2000. The M2000 manages the MBTS on its own interface toperform alarm management, software upgrade, data configuration, and inventory managementin a centralized manner.

Description in this technical description assumes that only one network management system isused to manage the MBTS. If two or more network management systems are used, the methodsfor the MBTS OM, including alarm management, software management, inventorymanagement, topology management, NE health check, commissioning, software upgrade, anddata configuration, provided in this document do not apply.

9.4.2 MBTS Operation & Maintenance FunctionsOperation and maintenance (O&M) functions of a multi-mode base transceiver station (MBTS)include the common part management, configuration management, software upgrade,commissioning, alarm management, inventory management, and mode evolution functions.

Common Part Management

Common parts include multi-mode radio frequency (RF) modules working in multiple modes,monitoring devices, and remote electrical tilt (RET) antennas. Common parts also include boardsand modules that can work in any mode and are within a BBU. Based on loading control rightsand the mode priority, SiteUnits manage software of common parts and maintain them.

Common Parts

Common parts fall into two types. One type of common parts includes those that are managedby two or more SiteUnits, such as multi-mode RF modules working in multiple modes. Theother type of common parts includes those that can be managed by any SiteUnit, such asmonitoring devices.

Table 9-1 provides common parts in an MBTS and related management methods.

Parameters of bilaterally managed common parts are common parameters. All SiteUnitsinvolved must have the same configurations for these parameters. Otherwise, a configurationconflict alarm will be generated. For parameters related to common parts, see MBTS CommonPart Parameters.

For unilaterally managed common parts, users can choose a SiteUnit according to onsiteconditions. For details, see the following:

l For a newly deployed MBTS, the GBTS is highly recommended, which is followed by theNodeB. The eNodeB is fairly recommended. For example, in a GU dual-mode base station,the GBTS is recommended.

l For a base station to be evolved, the original mode is recommended. For example, a basestation is evolved from a single mode base station to a GU dual-mode base station, theGBTS is recommended.



189

Table 9-1 Common parts in an MBTS and related management methods

Common Parts Management Method

Multi-mode RF modulesworking in multiple modes

Bilateral management (mandatory): They are managed bySiteUnits that are chosen on the basis of the working mode ofthe modules.For example, a multi-mode RF module working in GU mode ismanaged by a GBTS and a NodeB.

BBU3900 subracks;UPEU, UEIU, and FAN ina BBU

Bilateral management (mandatory): They are managed by twoSiteUnits whose main control boards are installed in the sameBBU as the UPEU, UEIU, and FAN boards.

Local monitoring devices(monitoring devicesconnected to the BBU,including the PMU, TCU,CCU, FMU, and EMU)

Unilateral management: They are managed by one SiteUnitwhose main control board is installed in the same BBU as thedevices.NOTE

l When monitoring boards are managed by only one SiteUnit, thefollowing functions fail: Energy Saving, Smart TRX, andcontrolling fan speed by the main control board.

l Monitoring devices are all connected to BBU0 and are managed byone SiteUnit whose main control board is installed in BBU0.

l The CCU can only be managed unilaterally.

Remote monitoring devices(monitoring devicesconnected to RRUs)

Unilateral management (only):l If RRUs work in a single mode, remote monitoring devices

are managed by the SiteUnit that also manages these RRUs.For example, if RRUs work in the GSM mode, such devicesare managed by the GBTS.

l If RRUs work in multiple modes, remote monitoringdevices are managed by one of the SiteUnits that alsomanage these RRUs. For example, if RRUs work in the GUmode, such devices are managed by the GBTS.

RET antennas

USCU Bilateral or unilateral managementl Bilateral management: It is managed by two SiteUnits

whose main control boards are installed in the same BBUas the USCU board. Note that the two SiteUnits must havethe same clock source type.

l Unilateral management: It is managed by one SiteUnitwhose main control board is installed in the same BBU asthe USCU board. Note that this SiteUnit must be configuredwith a clock source type that matches the clock signalsreceived by the USCU board. For other SiteUnits, theirclock source type is PEER.



190

Common Parts Management Method

UCIU Unilateral management (only): It is managed by one SiteUnitwhose main control board is installed in the same BBU as theUCIU board.NOTE

A related alarm is generated if the UCIU board is configured for twoSiteUnits in the same BBU.

UTRPc Unilateral management (only): It is managed by one SiteUnitwhose main control board is installed in the same BBU as theUTRPc board.NOTE

l In the BBU interconnection scenario, the NodeB cannot manage aUTRPc board if both two BBUs are configured with a UMTS maincontrol board and the UTRPc board is installed in the leaf BBU.

l Only the SiteUnit that manages the UTRPc board can expand itsservice processing capability through the UTRPc board.

l In new MBTSs, the UTRPc board is managed by the NodeB bydefault.

l For the UTRPc board, the SiteUnit priority descends from eNodeB,to NodeB, and then to GBTS.

Cabinet Bilateral management (mandatory): It is managed by all theSiteUnits that are installed in the same cabinet.

Loading Control RightsLoading control rights define the software management rights of bilaterally managed commonparts. If a SiteUnit in an MBTS has loading control rights over common parts, the softwareversions of these common parts must be consistent with the software version of the SiteUnit.For example, if the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station has loading control rights, the softwareversions of common parts managed by both the GBTS and NodeB must be consistent with thesoftware version of the GBTS. Currently, load control rights take effect only to the USCU boardand multi-mode RF modules working in multiple modes. USCU stands for Universal SatelliteCard and Clock Unit.

Loading control rights need to be specified, modified, or pre-specified in the following scenarios:

l Loading control rights need to be reconfigured upon MBTS upgrade.l Loading control rights need to be reconfigured if loading control right conflicts arise.

Parameters associated with loading control rights consist of Control Flag, Effect ImmediatelyFlag, Self Version, Peer Version, and Mode. Description of these elements is provided in Table9-2. For configuration methods, see the MML Command Reference. The local end indicates aSiteUnit that is setting loading control rights while the peer end indicates another SiteUnit thatis involved in the operation. For example, when loading control rights are being set by the GBTSof a GU dual-mode base station, the GBTS is the local end while the NodeB is the peer end.



191

Table 9-2 Parameters associated with loading control rights

Parameter Description Description

Control Flag Whether the local end hasloading control rights

-

EffectImmediatelyFlag

Whether the setting of loadingcontrol rights takes effectimmediately

l If it is set to YES, software of commonparts is updated immediately after thesettings of loading control rights arecomplete.

l If it is set to NO, software of commonparts is not updated immediately afterthe settings of loading control rights arecomplete. The software is updated nexttime the SiteUnit with loading controlrights upgrade software.

Self Version Software version at the localend after the setting of loadingcontrol rights takes effect

The software versions at both the local endand the peer end should be consideredjointly to ensure that the setting of loadingcontrol rights can take effect.For example, a user sets Self Version to Aand Peer Version to B in the GBTS of a GUdual-mode base station. In this case, thesetting of loading control rights takes effectwhen the software versions of the GBTSand NodeB are A and B, respectively.

Peer Version The software version at thepeer end after the setting ofloading control rights takeseffect

Mode Mode information of commonparts for which the setting ofloading control rights takeseffect. This parameter can beset to GU, GL, or UL.For example, if it is set to GU,the setting of loading controlrights takes effect for commonparts managed by both theGBTS and NodeB only.

For a triple-mode base station, loadingcontrol rights need to be set separately indifferent mode combinations. For example,in the GBTS, loading control rights ofcommon parts managed by both the GBTSand NodeB must be set, and loading controlrights of common parts managed by boththe GBTS and eNodeB must be set.

For each mode combination, users can set a maximum of two different loading control rightrecords. Two records correspond to two software version combinations in each modecombination. One software version is the live combination while the other is the combinationafter upgrade. For example, the live version of the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station is A1while the target version is A2; the live version of the NodeB is B1 while the target version isB2. In this case, users can set two loading control right records for two software versioncombinations (A1B1 and A2B2) respectively.

For each software version combination, the base station only saves the last loading control rightrecord if two SiteUnits both have loading control rights or none of them has such rights. If none



192

of them has such rights, an alarm indicating a loading control right conflict is generated. Forexample, for the A1B1 software version combination,

l If the GBTS has loading control rights at the beginning and the NodeB is configured withthe loading control rights later, the NodeB finally has the loading control rights.

l If the GBTS has loading control rights at the beginning and the NodeB is not configuredwith the loading control rights later, the GBTS finally has the loading control rights.

l If neither the GBTS nor the NodeB has such rights, an alarm indicating a loading controlright conflict is generated.

Loading control rights cannot take effect and none of the SiteUnits of an MBTS managessoftware of common parts if the following configuration conflicts arise and each SiteUnit doesnot work in engineering mode.

l The cabinet, subrack, and slot information of a common part are different among allSiteUnits.

l The working mode of a common part is different among all SiteUnits. For example, if amulti-mode RF module is set to work in GU mode at the GBTS but it is set to work in UOmode at the NodeB, neither the GBTS nor the NodeB manages software of the module.

Mode PriorityFor bilaterally managed common parts, their alarms, configuration data, device status, andinventory information that are reported by each SiteUnit must be filtered and combined. Themode priority determines which SiteUnit's reported data is to be considered by the entire basestation.

Users can set an MBTS's mode priority on the M2000. In a GUL triple-mode base station, GSMhas the highest mode priority while LTE has the lowest mode priority. In such a case, for commonparts managed by both the GBTS and NodeB and common parts managed by both the GBTSand eNodeB, the data reported by the GBTS is to be considered by the base station. For commonparts managed by both the NodeB and eNodeB, the data reported by the NodeB is to beconsidered by the base station.

The mode priority setting takes effect not only for a single base station but also for all devicesmanaged by the M2000 in the live network. Therefore, all the devices managed by the M2000have the same mode priority setting.

Configuration ManagementMBTS configuration management includes initial configuration and reconfiguration. In theinitial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CME to enableunified network deployment. After the MBTS has started running, reconfiguration can beperformed on the CME or by running MML commands to add, delete, or modify data.

Figure 9-5 shows the MBTS configuration management.



193

Figure 9-5 MBTS configuration management

MBTS configuration data includes the unique data of each SiteUnit and the data of commonparts.

l For the unique data of each SiteUnit, the configuration method is the same as that for asingle-mode base station.

l For the data of common parts, the configuration method is described in Common Part andManagement Method. Unilaterally managed common parts need to be configured onlyon one SiteUnit. Bilaterally managed common parts must be configured on two relatedSiteUnits, which must have the consistent settings for common parameters.

Initial ConfigurationIn the initial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CMEafter hardware of the MBTS has been installed and the MBTS has gained access to the M2000successfully. Once the initial configuration is complete, the MBTS starts to function and providebasic services.

Table 9-3 provides the initial configuration method of an MBTS. For detailed operations, seethe 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide.



194

Table 9-3 Initial configuration method

WorkingMode ofan MBTS

GU GL UL GUL

Independentdeployment

Based onthe GUIwizard

Based on the GUIwizard

Base stationbinding

Base stationbinding

Batchdeployment

Based onthe dataplanningtemplate

Based on the dataplanning template

Based on the dataplanning template

N/A

NOTE

The function of manually setting up base station binding relationship on the M2000 applies only to single-modebase stations. Before adjusting a binding relationship (because the current relationship is incorrect), remove thecurrent relationship first and set up a new one.

Characteristics of MBTS configuration are as follows, including functions of the CME availablefor MBTS configuration:

l A network carrier can specify mapping between SiteUnits of an MBTS.l The CME supports one-site configuration and configuration data consistency check.

– Unique data of each SiteUnit is checked on the basis of check rules of each NE to ensurethat the data is correct.

– Each SiteUnit must have the correct configuration for a cabinet, subrack, or slot toprevent configuration conflicts.

– Data of bilaterally managed common parts is checked on the basis of mode prioritiesspecified by network carriers and of check rules specified for the common device data.If parameter configurations of the common parts are found to be inconsistent betweentwo SiteUnits, the CME modifies configuration data automatically based on the modepriority setting.

l The CME provides an MBTS device panel view, supports unified addition or deletion ofcabinets and boards, and enables unified modification of common parameters.

ReconfigurationReconfiguration includes data addition, data removal, and data modification after the MBTS hasstarted functioning. MBTS reconfiguration can be performed on the LMT by running MMLcommands or on the CME. Operations on the CME are recommended. During reconfiguration,it is recommended that network carriers check configuration data consistency manually to ensurethat parameter configurations of the common parts are consistent between SiteUnits.

Table 9-4 describes usage scenarios of reconfiguration.



195

Table 9-4 Usage scenario of reconfiguration

Scenario Description

Networkoptimization

Network performance is adjusted and optimized on the basis of the systemoperation data that is obtained during network operation by means ofperformance measurement and drive test.

Featureconfiguration

Key parameters of optional features are configured to activate the features.For details, see the SingleRAN Feature Activation Guide.

Capacityexpansion

Hardware is added to the live network or configurations are modified. Thisenables the system to provide services for more users. For details, see theSingleRAN Reconfiguration Guide.

Software UpgradeThe MBTS supports multiple upgrade methods in different scenarios.

Upgrade ScenarioTable 9-5 provides MBTS software upgrade scenarios.

Table 9-5 MBTS software upgrade scenarios

UpgradeScenario

Upgrade Platform References

Remote andcentral upgrade inthe live network(recommended):all-at-onceupgrade

M2000 (all-at-once upgrade) Related Upgrade Guide

l Remote GBTSupgrade

l RemoteNodeBupgrade

l RemoteeNodeBupgrade

M2000



196

UpgradeScenario

Upgrade Platform References

l Localemergentupgrade

l Storageupgrade

l GBTSupgrade

l NodeBupgrade

l eNodeBupgrade

l GBTS: SMTl NodeB/eNodeB: LMT

l Remoteemergentupgrade

l GBTSupgrade

BSC6900

l Storageupgrade

l Few upgradesin the livenetwork

USBNOTE

The security of the USB loading portis ensured by encryption.

3900 Series Base StationCommissioning Guide

NOTE

During a one-sided upgrade, start event of common parts can be reported only by the SiteUnit that is beingupgraded.

The M2000 can check version mapping, set loading control rights, and monitor partial steps inan upgrade. Therefore, it is recommended that the M2000 be used if MBTS software is to beremotely upgraded. If the required transmission links are unavailable, the M2000 is not installedor faulty, or the MBTS is faulty and is to be commissioned locally, a local maintenance terminal(LMT) or Service Maintenance Terminal (SMT) is recommended.

Upgrade RestrictionsWhen upgrading an MBTS, pay attention to the following restrictions:

l All SiteUnits' software versions must be matched. If one SiteUnit's software is to beindependently upgraded, services of another SiteUnit will be interrupted if the MBTS usesco-transmission and the SiteUnit whose software is to be independently upgraded providesan outgoing port used for transmission sharing.

l For a triple-mode base station, software versions of three SiteUnits must be V100R004 orlater.

l All SiteUnits' software must be upgraded or rolled back together to ensure that theirsoftware versions can work with each other after the upgrade or rollback. For example,



197

after two SiteUnits' software is upgraded together, their software must be rolled backtogether as well. On the M2000, an upgrade or rollback is not allowed if all SiteUnits'software version cannot work with each other before the upgrade.

l If the software version before an upgrade is V100R004, loading control rights are set onthe base station automatically. If the software version before the upgrade is earlier thanV100R004 and the upgrade is performed on the M2000, loading control rights are set onthe M2000 automatically. If the upgrade is not performed on the M2000, loading controlrights must be set manually.

Commissioning Mode

The MBTS supports multiple commissioning modes in different scenarios and commissioningengineers can choose one commissioning mode according to onsite conditions.

Commissioning Scenario

Table 9-6 provides details about each commissioning scenario. For precautions, see the 3900Series Base Station Commissioning Guide.

Table 9-6 MBTS commissioning scenario

Scenario Relevant Information Description

Dual-mode basestation

Only one SiteUnitprovides services duringsite deployment

The base station is deployed as a multi-mode basestation. Due to insufficient resources and otherfactors, only one SiteUnit provides servicestemporarily.

Two SiteUnits provideservices during sitedeployment.

The base station is deployed as a multi-mode basestation and two SiteUnits provide services.

One SiteUnit hasprovided serviceswhereas the other one isunder configuration.

One SiteUnit has provided services whereas theother one is under configuration.

Triple-mode base station The base station is commissioned on a modecombination basis. For example, in a triple-modebase station working in GU+L mode, the basestation is commissioned as a GU dual-mode basestation and an LO single-mode base stationseparately.

Commissioning Mode

An MBTS can be commissioned remotely on the M2000, on the M2000 with a USB flash drive,or on the M2000 with a local maintenance terminal (LMT). Table 9-7 provides usage scenariosand recommendation levels of the three commissioning modes. For details, see 3900 Series BaseStation Commissioning Guide.



198

Table 9-7 Commissioning mode

Commissioning Mode

Usage Scenario RecommendationLevel

Remotecommissioningon the M2000

After installing an MBTS and performing apower-on check, O&M personnel canremotely commission the MBTS on theM2000 in the equipment room if the followingconditions are met:l All the required transmission links are

available.l If layer 2 networking is applied, layer-2

devices must support DHCP Relay. If layer3 networking is applied, layer-3 devicesnear the MBTS must support DHCP Relay.

l Operators are not sensitive to downtime.

High

Remotecommissioningon the M2000 incollaborationwith a localupgrade using aUSB flash drive

After installing an MBTS and performing apower-on check, O&M personnel can locallyupgrade MBTS software and load theconfiguration file using the USB flash drive ifany of the following conditions is met: all therequired transmission links are not available;layer-3 devices near the MBTS do not supportDHCP Relay (assuming that layer 3networking is applied); operators limitdowntime. After all the required transmissionlinks become available, O&M personnel cancontinue with the follow-up commissioningoperations on the M2000 in the equipmentroom.NOTE

l Yon can use USB flash drives only in MBTSdeployment scenarios. During upgrades indeveloped markets, these drives cannot be used.

l The security of the USB port is ensured byencryption.

High



199

Commissioning Mode

Usage Scenario RecommendationLevel

Remotecommissioningon the M2000 incollaborationwith the LMT/SMT

After installing an MBTS and performing apower-on check, O&M personnel can locallyupgrade MBTS software and load theconfiguration file using the LMT or SMT if allthe required transmission links are notavailable. Note that all the requiredtransmission links between a GBTS and BSCmust be available if the LMT is used forcommissioning purposes. After all therequired transmission links become available,O&M personnel can continue with the follow-up commissioning operations on the M2000 inthe equipment room.Before adopting this commissioning method,O&M must get ready a laptop and have goodcommissioning skills. With this method, sitedeployment costs are high. Therefore, thismethod can be a backup method only.

Low

Alarm ManagementEach SiteUnit in an MBTS independently reports alarms. Maintenance personnel canindividually manage all the SiteUnits or manage the entire MBTS as a whole.

Figure 9-6 shows MBTS alarm management. For details, see the 3900 Series Multi-Mode BaseStation Alarm Reference.

Figure 9-6 MBTS alarm management



200

As shown in the preceding figure, the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB report unique and commonalarms independently and common alarms are reported with mode information such as GUcommon alarms and GUL common alarms. Maintenance personnel can individually manage theGBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB using the GBTS SMT, NodeB LMT, and eNodeB LMT,respectively. Alternatively, they can centrally or independently manage MBTS alarms using theM2000. When centrally managing MBTS alarms, the M2000 combines and filters alarmsreported by each SiteUnit based on the user-defined mode priority and provides one alarm viewonly.

Alarm TypeEach SiteUnit in an MBTS reports unique and common alarms.

l Unique alarms: These alarms are unique to a SiteUnit. Generation causes and processingmechanisms are the same as those for a single-mode base station.

l Common alarms: These alarms, related to bilaterally managed common parts, includealarms that are generated because of device faults and alarms that are generated becauseof common parts' parameter configuration conflicts.

NOTE

l For unilaterally managed common parts, only the SiteUnit that manage these common parts can see thealarms of them. Alarms reported by unilaterally managed common parts may affect the operation of otherSiteUnits. On the Browse Current Alarm tab page, the Additional Information column lists theRAT_INFO and AFFECTED_INFO information. With the information, maintenance personnel can knowthe mode information about the base station where the alarm is generated and the modes that are affectedby the alarm.

l User-defined alarms specific to bilaterally managed common parts must be configured on all SiteUnits thatmanage these common parts. In addition, all these SiteUnits must have the same configuration for thesealarms. Otherwise, a configuration conflict alarm will be generated.

l If conflicts occur in common parameter configurations, multiple relevant alarms will be generated.Therefore, configuration conflict alarms must be handled preferentially.

Figure 9-7 shows the Browse Current Alarm tab page of the M2000.

l NE Type: indicates the SiteUnit that reports the current alarm.l Common Alarm Identifier: indicates whether the current alarm is a common alarm. If the

value is NA, the current alarm is a unique alarm. Otherwise, the current alarm is a commonalarm.

l Additional Information: RAT_INFO indicates the mode information about the basestation where the alarm is generated and AFFECTED_INFO indicates the modes that areaffected by the alarm. For example, if the value for RAT_INFO is GUL and the value forAFFECTED_INFO is GU, the alarm is generated on a GUL triple-mode base station andthis alarm affects the GSM and UMTS modes.



201

Figure 9-7 Browse Current Alarm tab page of the M2000

Management Method

Maintenance personnel can individually manage all SiteUnits in an MBTS or manage the entireMBTS as a whole. For details, see Table 9-8.

Table 9-8 Alarm management method

AlarmManagementMethod

Tool Description

Individuallymanaging allSiteUnits in anMBTS

SMT/LMT

The alarm management method is the same as that for a single-mode base station.

M2000 The alarm management method is the same as that for a single-mode base station.

Managing theMBTS as awhole

M2000 The M2000 exports only one alarm view, which includescommon alarms and each SiteUnit's unique alarms.l For each SiteUnit's unique alarms, the method for managing

the alarms is the same as that for a single-mode base station.l The M2000 combines and filters common alarms reported

by each SiteUnit based on the user-defined mode priorityand provides one alarm view only. This prevents somealarms from being repeatedly reported.

When using the M2000 to manage alarms, pay attention to the following:

l When setting parameters of common alarms, you must repeat the operation on all SiteUnitsinvolved. Such parameters include alarm masking, alarm severity, alarm query, alarmclearance, and so on. Enabling the settings on one SiteUnit to take effect on the otherSiteUnits is not allowed.

l When confirming or clearing a common alarm, you must repeat the operation on allSiteUnits involved because the confirming or clearance only takes effect on the currentSiteUnit. For example, both a GBTS and NodeB report a common alarm. Based on themode priority, the M2000 displays only the alarm reported by the GBTS. After the alarm



202

is confirmed or cleared, the alarm is removed from the GBTS. However, on the NodeB,the alarm remains unconfirmed and therefore it persists.

Mechanism for Handling Engineering AlarmsWhen a base station is being deployed, upgraded, or commissioned, engineering operationscause some network elements (NEs) to being abnormal for a short period and as a result a largenumber of alarms are generated. This also occurs when the base station is under capacityexpansion. All the generated alarms are called engineering alarms. Engineering alarms areautomatically cleared after engineering operations are complete and therefore no operations arerequired. It is recommended that all NEs involved be set to work in engineering mode beforeany engineering operation is performed to mask engineering alarms. This avoids interferingnetwork monitoring.

After the SiteUnits involved enter engineering mode, the mechanism for handling engineeringalarms works as follows:

l For SiteUnits working in engineering mode, their alarms are reported as engineering alarms.l For SiteUnits working in non-engineering mode:

– Unique alarms are reported according to the normal procedure.

– An alarm indicating a configuration conflict in common parameters is not reported ifany of the related SiteUnits is working in engineering mode. This alarm is reportedaccording to the normal procedure if none of the related SiteUnits is working inengineering mode.

For example, when the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station is working in engineering modewhile the NodeB is working in non-engineering mode, all the alarms generated on the GBTSare reported as engineering alarms. In addition, the NodeB's unique alarms are reportedaccording to the normal procedure but alarms indicating conflicts in common parameters arenot reported.

Inventory ManagementMBTS inventory information is managed on the M2000 to achieve centralized and effectivemanagement.

Inventory management involves the logical inventory management (configuration informationmanagement) and physical inventory management (asset management).

l The logical inventory management manages logical inventory objects, including cells andversions.

l The physical inventory management manages physical inventory objects, includingcabinets, subracks, slots, boards, ports, and antennas.

Figure 9-8 shows the MBTS inventory management.



203

Figure 9-8 MBTS inventory management

Each SiteUnit of an MBTS independently reports its own inventory data, which covers inventoryinformation about bilaterally managed common parts and this SiteUnit's unique inventoryinformation including inventory information about unilaterally managed common parts.

On the M2000, each SiteUnit's inventory data can be viewed and exported. All SiteUnits' datacan also be combined on the M2000 and an inventory document covering the data is generated.The M2000 combines all SiteUnits' data on a mode priority basis.

Mode EvolutionThe MBTS supports many evolution solutions in different scenarios.

Table 9-9 lists different mode evolution solutions. For details, see the 3900 Series Base StationStandards Evolution Guide.



204

Table 9-9 Typical evolution scenarios

Scenario EvolutionScenario

Description

Single-mode todual-mode

GO -> GU In the scenario, GSM single-mode is evolved into GU dual-mode. Before evolution, only GSM services are provided.After evolution, GSM and UMTS services are bothprovided.

UO -> GU In the scenario, UMTS single-mode is evolved into GUdual-mode. Before evolution, only UMTS services areprovided. After evolution, GSM and UMTS services areboth provided.

GO -> GL In the scenario, GSM single-mode is evolved into GL dual-mode. Before evolution, only GSM services are provided.After evolution, GSM and LTE services are both provided.

UO -> UL In the scenario, UMTS single-mode is evolved into ULdual-mode. Before evolution, only UMTS services areprovided. After evolution, UMTS and LTE services areboth provided.

Dual-mode tosingle-mode

GU -> UO In the scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into UMTSsingle-mode and therefore GSM services stop to beprovided.

GL -> LO In the scenario, GL dual-mode is evolved into LTE single-mode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.

UL -> UO In the scenario, UL dual-mode is evolved into UMTSsingle-mode and therefore LTE services stop to beprovided.

UL -> LO In the scenario, UL dual-mode is evolved into LTE single-mode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.

Dual-mode totriple-mode

GU -> GU+L(independentBBU)

In the scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into GUL triple-mode. Before evolution, only GSM and UMTS services areprovided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE servicesare all provided.

GL -> GL+U(independentBBU)

In the scenario, GL dual-mode is evolved into GUL triple-mode. Before evolution, only GSM and LTE services areprovided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE servicesare all provided.

GL -> GL+U(BBUinterconnection)

In the scenario, GL dual-mode is evolved into GUL triple-mode. Before evolution, only GSM and LTE services areprovided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE servicesare all provided, and inter-BBU SDR is applied.



205

Scenario EvolutionScenario

Description

GU -> GU+L(BBUinterconnection)

In the scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into GUL triple-mode. Before evolution, only GSM and UMTS services areprovided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE servicesare all provided, and inter-BBU SDR is applied.

GU -> GU+UL(BBUinterconnection)

In the scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into GUL triple-mode. Before evolution, only GSM and UMTS services areprovided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE servicesare all provided, and inter-BBU SDR is applied.

Triple-mode todual-mode

GU+L(independentBBU) -> U+L

In the scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into UL dual-mode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.

GL+U(independentBBU) -> L+U


GU+L (BBUinterconnection) -> U+L


GL+U (BBUinterconnection) -> L+U


GU+L(independentBBU) -> G+L

In the scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into GL dual-mode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.

GU+L (BBUinterconnection) -> G+L


GL+U(independentBBU) -> GL


GL+U (BBUinterconnection) -> GL


MBTS mode evolution involves preparation before evolution, recording alarms, setting NEs towork in engineering mode, upgrading software, adjusting data, adjusting hardware, settingbinding relationships between SiteUnits, commissioning, and setting NEs to work in normalmode.



206

l Preparation before evolution: In this step, ensure that hardware and matched softwarerequired during evolution are ready and that each related NE and network managementdevice are ready.

l Recording alarms: In this step, record alarms generated on the base station for thecomparison before and after evolution to ensure that no new alarm is generated afterevolution.

l Setting NEs to work in engineering mode: In this step, set a SiteUnit to work in engineeringmode on the M2000 and shield engineering alarms to improve network operation andmaintenance efficiency.

l Upgrading software: In this step, upgrade software of the base station according to theactual situation to ensure that software versions are matched with each other.

l Adjusting data: In this step, adjust configuration data of the base station to meet the actualrequirements.

l Adjusting hardware: In this step, adjust physical devices and connections of the base stationto meet the actual requirements.

l Setting binding relationships between SiteUnits: In this step, set binding relations betweenSiteUnits on the M2000 to set up an MBTS.

l Commissioning: In this step, commission the MBTS to ensure that it can work properlyafter evolution.

l Setting NEs to work in normal mode: In this step, set NEs to work in normal mode on theM2000 to ensure that alarms are reported according to the normal procedure.

9.4.3 Maintenance Between ModesExercise caution when performing maintenance operations on one mode of an MBTS becausethese operations affect services of other modes.

Maintenance Operations Simultaneously Performed on All ModesTable 9-10 provides the maintenance operations that must be simultaneously performed on allmodes of an MBTS.



207

Table 9-10 Maintenance operations that must be simultaneously performed on all modes

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Description

Blockingcarriersor RFmodules

l MML: SETGTRXADMSTAT

l SMT: See sectionManaging RCs >Changing the RCManagementState in the SMTUser Guide orDBS3900 GSMSite MaintenanceTerminal UserGuide.

l LMT: See sectionBTSMaintenance >ModifyingAdministrativeState in theBSC6900 GSMLMT User Guide.

l MML:BLKBRD

l LMT:SeesectionManagingNodeBEquipment >NodeBBoard-LevelOperations >Blocking/UnblockingaNodeBBoardin theNodeBLMTUserGuide.

MML:BLK BRD

l If a radio frequency (RF)module serves multiplemodes, the operation ofblocking this modulemust be performed on allmodes involved.

l On the UMTS and LTEsides, you can block RFmodules; on the GSMside, you can only blockcarriers.



208

Operation


Blocking cells

l MML: SETGCELLADMSTAT

l SMT: See sectionManaging Cells >Changing the CellManagementState in the SMTUser Guide orDBS3900 GSMSite MaintenanceTerminal UserGuide.

l LMT: See sectionBTSMaintenance >ModifyingAdministrativeState in theBSC6900 GSMLMT User Guide.

NOTEBefore blocking a cell,you can run the MMLcommand LSTGCELL to query theconfigurationinformation about thecells under the basestation.

MML:BLKLOCELL

MML:BLKCELL

If an RF module servesmultiple modes and thismodule is not required totransmit signals, theoperation of blocking therelated cells must beperformed on all modesinvolved.

Addingcontrollinks

MML: ADDBTSCTRLLNK

MML:ADDCTRLLNK

MML:ADDCTRLLNK

If any of these commands isto be executed on an MBTS,execute the command on allmodes and ensure that theconfiguration data of a newlyadded control link isconsistent on all modes.

Removingcontrollinks

MML: RMVBTSCTRLLNK

MML:RMVCTRLLNK

MML:RMVCTRLLNK

If any of these commands isto be executed on an MBTS,execute the command on allmodes and ensure that theconfiguration data of aremoved control link isconsistent on all modes.



209

Operation


Modifyingcontrollinks

MML: MODBTSCTRLLNK

MML:MODCTRLLNK

MML:MODCTRLLNK

If any of these commands isto be executed on an MBTS,execute the command on allmodes and ensure that theconfiguration data of amodified control link isconsistent on all modes.

Maintenance Operations That May Affect Services of Other ModesTable 9-11 provides the maintenance operations that are performed on one mode of an MBTSbut may affect services of other modes.

Table 9-11 Maintenance operations that may affect services of other modes

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Settingloadingcontrolrights

MML: SETBTSLOADCTRL

MML: SETLOADCTRL

MML: SETLOADCTRL

l The software of a commonpart can be loaded andupgraded on the mode thathas loading control rights.

l If the local end has loadingcontrol rights and EffectImmediately Flag is set toYes, upgrading software ofRF modules serving multiplemodes interrupts the peerend's services that are carriedover these RF modules.

Activating abasestation

MML: ACTBTS

None None In any of the followingscenarios, activating a basestation on the local endinterrupts services on the peerend:l RF modules serve multiple

modes.l The base station adopts

TDM-based co-transmission, and the localend provides a co-transmission port.



210

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Deactivating abasestation

MML: DEABTS

None None In any of the followingscenarios, deactivating a basestation on the local endinterrupts services on the peerend:l RF modules serve multiple

modes.l The base station adopts

TDM-based co-transmission, and the localend provides a co-transmission port.

Activating thebasestationsoftware

l MML:ACTBTSSW

l SMT: SeesectionManaging Sites >ActivatingSoftwarein theSMT UserGuide orDBS3900GSM SiteMaintenanceTerminalUserGuide.

l LMT: SeeBTSMaintenance >Activating BTSSoftwarein theBSC6900GSMLMT UserGuide.

MML: ACTSOFTWARE

MML: ACTSOFTWARE

l If the local end has loadingcontrol rights, activatingsoftware of RF modulesserving multiple modes onthe local end interrupts thepeer end's services that arealso carried over these RFmodules.

l When an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the localend provides a co-transmission port, activatingsoftware of the boardproviding the co-transmission port on thelocal end interrupts serviceson the peer end.



211

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Rollingback thebasestationsoftware

MML: RBKBTSSW

MML: RBKSOFTWARE

MML: RBKSOFTWARE

l If the local end has loadingcontrol rights, rolling backthe base station software onthe local end interrupts thepeer end's services that arecarried over RF modulesserving multiple modes.

l If an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the localend provides a co-transmission port, rollingback the base stationsoftware on the local endinterrupts services on thepeer end.



212

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Resetting a basestation

l MML:RST BTS

l SMT: SeesectionManaging Sites >Resettingthe BTSby Levelsin theSMT UserGuide orDBS3900GSM SiteMaintenanceTerminalUserGuide.

l LMT: SeesectionBTSMaintenance >Resettingthe BTSby Levelsin theBSC6900GSMLMT UserGuide.

MML: RSTNODEB

MML: RSTENODEB

l If RF modules serve multiplemodes, resetting a basestation on the local endinterrupts the peer end'sservices carried over theseRF modules.

l If an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the localend provides a co-transmission port, resettingan MBTS on the local endinterrupts services on thepeer end.

l During an MBTS reset,common part startups can bedetected by the relatedmanaging SiteUnits.



213

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Resetting aboard

l MML:RSTBTSBRD

l SMT: SeeSMT UserGuide orDBS3900GSM SiteMaintenanceTerminalUserGuide.

– Resetting aboardin theBBU:SeesectionBBUOperations>Resetting aBoard.

– Resetting anRFmodule: SeesectionRFUOperationsorRRUOperations>Resetting a

l MML:RSTBRD

l LMT: SeesectionManaging NodeBEquipment >NodeBBoard-LevelOperations >Resettinga NodeBBoard inthe NodeBLMT UserGuide.

MML: RSTBRD

l Resetting a main controlboard: See Table 9-12.

l Resetting an RF module:Resetting an RF moduleserving multiple modes onthe local end interrupts thepeer end's services that arealso carried over this RFmodule.

l Resetting a transmissionboard: When an MBTSadopts co-transmission andthe local end provides a co-transmission port, resetting aboard providing the co-transmission port on thelocal end interrupts serviceson the peer end.

l Resetting a baseband signalprocessing board: When anMBTS adopts CPRI MUX,resetting a baseband signalprocessing board which is incharge of multiplexing dataon the local end interruptsservices on the peer end. Theservices on the peer end,however, recover after thisboard starts working again.



214

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Board.

l LMT: SeesectionBTSMaintenance >Maintaining TRXs>Resettingthe TRXin theBSC6900GSMLMT UserGuide.



215

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Performing apower-off reseton aboard

l MML:RSTBTSBRD

l SMT: SeeSMT UserGuide orDBS3900GSM SiteMaintenanceTerminalUserGuide.

– Performing apower-offreseton aboardwithintheBBU:SeesectionBBUOperations>Resetting aBoardinPower-OffMode.

– Performing apower-offreseton anRFmodule: See

MML: RSTBRDPWROFF

MML: RSTBRDPWROFF

l Performing a power-off reseton a main control board: SeeTable 9-12.

l Performing a power-off reseton an RF module:Performing a power-off reseton an RF module servingmultiple modes on the localend interrupts the peer end'sservices that are also carriedover this RF module.

l Performing a power-off reseton a transmission board:When an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the localend provides a co-transmission port,performing a power-off reseton a transmission boardproviding the co-transmission port on thelocal end interrupts serviceson the peer end.

l Performing a power-off reseton a baseband signalprocessing board: When anMBTS adopts CPRI MUX,performing a power-off reseton a baseband signalprocessing board which is incharge of multiplexing dataon the local end interruptsservices on the peer end. Theservices on the peer end,however, recover after thisboard starts working again.



216

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

sectionRFUOperationsorRRUOperations>Resetting aBoardinPower-OffMode.

StartingaVSWRtest

MML: STRBTSVSWRTEST

MML: STRVSWRTEST

MML: STRVSWRTEST

In any of the followingscenarios, starting a VSWR teston the local end interruptsservices on the peer end:l The test is conducted on RF

modules serving multiplemodes.

l The test is conducted on RFmodules that serve differentmodes but share antennas.



217

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Conducting atransmissionperformance test

l SMT: SeesectionManaging Sites >TestingTransmissionPerformance inthe SMTUserGuide orDBS3900GSM SiteMaintenanceTerminalUserGuide.

l LMT: SeesectionBTSMaintenance >Maintaining Site >TestingTransmissionPerformance intheBSC6900GSMLMT UserGuide.

None None If an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the local endprovides a co-transmission port,conducting a transmissionperformance test on the localend interrupts services on thepeer end.

Activating aConfigurationBaseline (CB)

None MML: ACTCB

None In any of the followingscenarios, activating a CB on thelocal end interrupts services onthe peer end:l RF modules serve multiple

modes.l The base station adopts co-

transmission, and the localend provides a co-transmission port.



218

Operation

GSM UMTS LTE Impact

Rollingback aCB

None MML: RBKCB

None In any of the followingscenarios, rolling back a CB onthe local end interrupts serviceson the peer end:l RF modules serve multiple

modes.l The base station adopts co-

transmission, and the localend provides a co-transmission port.

Startingahardware test

None MML: STRHWTST

None l Starting a hardware test onRF modules serving multiplemodes on the local endinterrupts the peer end'sservices carried over theseRF modules.

l When an MBTS adopts co-transmission and the localend provides a co-transmission port, starting ahardware test on a boardproviding a co-transmissionport on the local endinterrupts services on thepeer end.



219

Table 9-12 Impacts on other modes by resetting, performing a power-off reset on, or removingand then inserting a main control board

CPRI-basedTopology

WorkingModeof RFModules

Operation Impact

Dual-star

GU/GL

Resetting amain controlboard

l Resetting a GSM main control board

– When GTMU software is being reset, UMTS orLTE CS and PS services may be interrupted.

– When GTMUb software is being reset, the datarate of UMTS/LTE PS services may slow down,and UMTS/LTE CS services remain unaffected.

l Resetting a UMTS or LTE main control board: WhenWMPT, LMPT, or UMPT software is being reset, thedata rate of GSM PS services may slow down, andGSM CS services remain unaffected.

Performing apower-offreset on a maincontrol board

l Performing a power-off reset on a GSM main controlboard: During a power-off reset on a GTMU orGTMUb board, UMTS/LTE PS and CS services maybe interrupted.

l Performing a power-off reset on a UMTS or LTEmain control board: During a power-off reset on aWMPT, LMPT, or UMPT board, the data rate ofGSM PS services may slow down, and GSM CSservices remain unaffected.

Removing andthen insertinga main controlboard

l Removing and then inserting a GSM main controlboard: When a GSM main control board is restartingafter being uninstalled and then installed, UMTS/LTE PS and CS services may be interrupted.

l Removing and then inserting a UMTS or LTE maincontrol board: When a WMPT, LMPT, or UMPTboard is restarting after being uninstalled and theninstalled, the data rate of GSM PS services may slowdown, and GSM CS services remain unaffected.

UL Resetting,performing apower-offreset on, orremoving andthen insertinga main controlboard

Performing this operation on the UMTS or LTE side mayslow down the data rate of the peer end's PS services butdoes not interrupt its CS services.



220

CPRI-basedTopology

WorkingModeof RFModules

Operation Impact

CPRIMUX

UL Resetting,performing apower-offreset on, orremoving andthen insertinga main controlboard

l Performing this operation on the converging party(UMTS) interrupts PS and CS services on the peerend.

l Performing this operation on the converged party(LTE) slows down the peer end's PS data rate but doesnot interrupt the peer end's CS services.



221

10 Product Specifications

About This Chapter

Product specifications of the 3900 series base stations include technical specifications of theBBU3900, radio frequency unit (RFU), and remote radio unit (RRU) and engineeringspecifications of each type of cabinet.

10.1 Technical Specifications of the BBU3900This section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, including capacity, baseband,signaling, transmission port, and equipment specifications.

10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUsThis section describes the technical specifications of radio frequency units (RFUs), includingsupported modes, frequency bands, RF specifications, surge protection specifications, andantenna capabilities.

10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUsThis section provides technical specifications of RRUs, including supported modes, frequencybands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.

10.4 Technical Specifications of an AAUThis section provides technical specifications of an AAU, including supported modes, frequencybands, RF and antenna specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.

10.5 Engineering SpecificationsThis section describes engineering specifications of each base station, including input powerspecifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protectionspecifications, and standards that have been complied with.

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 10 Product Specifications


222

10.1 Technical Specifications of the BBU3900This section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, including capacity, baseband,signaling, transmission port, and equipment specifications.

10.1.1 Capacity SpecificationsThis section describes the capacity specifications of the 3900 series base stations working indifferent modes.

The following table lists the capacity specifications of the 3900 series base stations.

Table 10-1 Capacity specifications of the 3900 series base stations

Mode Capacity

GSM A single site supports a maximum number of 32 cells and each cellsupports a maximum number of 24 TRXs.l TDM transmission (1 GTMUb+1 UTRPb4+1 UBRI, among which

the UBRI is optional): 126 TRXsl IP transmission (1 GTMUb+1 UBRI, among which the UBRI is

optional)

– IP over FE transmission: 60 TRXs

– IP over E1 transmission: 48 TRXs

UMTS When one BBU is configured (1 UMPT+6 WBBPf4s).l UL: A maximum number of 24 cells and 3072 CEs are supported.l DL: A maximum number of 24 cells and 4608 CEs are supported.When two interconnected BBUs are configured:l UL: A maximum number of 48 cells and 5632 CEs are supported.l DL: A maximum number of 48 cells and 8448 CEs are supported.



223

Mode Capacity

LTE l A maximum of 18 cells (2 x 2 MIMO) are supported by a singleeNodeB.

l The maximum throughput per cell (bandwidth: 20 MHz):

– Downlink data rate at the MAC layer: 150 Mbit/s (2 x 2 MIMO,64 QAM)

– Uplink data rate at the MAC layer: 70 Mbit/s (2 x 4 MU-MIMOor 2 x 2 MU-MIMO, 16 QAM)

l Maximum throughput per eNodeB (packet size: 550 bytes)

– When the LMPT is configured, the UL data rate at the MAC layeris 300 Mbit/s, and the DL data rate at the MAC layer is 450 Mbit/s.

– When the UMPT board is configured, the UL and DL data rateat the MAC layer is 1500 M/bits.

l Maximum number of UEs in RRC_CONNECTED mode pereNodeB:When one LBBPc board is configured:

– 1008 with 1.4 MHz bandwidth

– 1800 with 3 MHz/5 MHz/10 MHz bandwidth

– 1800 (2 R cells) or 1200 (4 R cells) with 15 MHz/20 MHzbandwidth

When three LBBPc boards are configured:


– 5400 with 3 MHz/5 MHz/10 MHz bandwidth

– 5400 (2 R cells) or 3600 (4 R cells) with 15 MHz/20 MHzbandwidth

When one LBBPd1 or LBBPd2 board is configured:


– 1080 with 3 MHz bandwidth


– 3600 with 10 MHz/15 MHz/20 MHz bandwidthWhen three LBBPd1 or LBBPd2 boards are configured:




– 10800 with 10 MHz/15 MHz/20 MHz bandwidthWhen one LBBPd3 board is configured:



– 3600 with 5 MHz/10 MHz/15 MHz/20 MHz bandwidth



224

Mode Capacity

When three LBBPd3 boards are configured:



– 10800 with 5 MHz/10 MHz/15 MHz/20 MHz bandwidthl Data radio bearer (DRB): A maximum of 8 DRBs can transmit data

of a UE at the same time.

GU 1 GTMU+1 UMPT+5 WBBPf4s: GSM S24/24/24 + UMTS 3 x 8 (UL:2560 CEs; DL: 3840 CEs)

GL 1 GTMU+1 UMPT+1 LBBPd1: GSM S24/24/24+LTE 12 x 20 MHz(2T2R, uplink data rate at the MAC layer per eNodeB: 1500 Mbit/s,downlink data rate at the MAC layer per eNodeB: 1500 Mbit/s)

10.1.2 Baseband SpecificationsThis section describes the baseband specifications of NodeBs and eNodeBs.

Baseband Specifications of NodeBs

The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 10-2.

NOTE

The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.

Table 10-2 WBBP specifications

Board Numberof Cells

Numberof ULCEs

Numberof DLCEs

NumberofHSDPACodesa

NumberofHSDPAUEs

NumberofHSUPAUEs

WBBPa 3 128 256 3x15 96 60

WBBPb1 3 64 64 3x15 64 64

WBBPb2 3 128 128 3x15 128 96

WBBPb3 6 256 256 6x15 144 96

WBBPb4 6 384 384 6x15 144 96

WBBPd1 6 64 64 6x15 128 96

192 192

WBBPd2 6 256 256 6x15 144 144

384 384



225

Board Numberof Cells

Numberof ULCEs

Numberof DLCEs

NumberofHSDPACodesa

NumberofHSDPAUEs

NumberofHSUPAUEs

WBBPd3 6 256 256 6x15 144 96

WBBPf1 6 64 128 6x15 144 144

192 256

WBBPf2 6 256 384 6x15 192 192

WBBPf3 6 256 384 6x15 256 256

384 512

WBBPf4 6 512 768 6x15 384 384

a: The number of HSDPA codes supported by a WBBPd1 is 6x15, where "6" is the numberof cells and "15" is the number of codes supported by each cell.

Baseband Specifications (Number of Cells) Supported by eNodeBsThe following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supportedby a single LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.

Table 10-3 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios

Board Number ofCell

Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration

LBBPc 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R3x20 MHz 1T2R3x10 MHz 4T4R3x20 MHz 2T2R1x20 MHz 4T4R

LBBPd1 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R3x20 MHz 1T2R3x20 MHz 2T2R

LBBPd2 3 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz

3x20 MHz 1T1R3x20 MHz 1T2R3x20 MHz 2T2R3x20 MHz 4T4R



226

Board Number ofCell

Cell Bandwidth Antenna Configuration

LBBPd3 6 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, and10 MHz

6x10M 1T1R6x10M 1T2R6x10M 2T2R

NOTE

l The "Antenna Configuration" column lists the maximum configurations supported by various types ofLBBP. The LBBP supports the maximum configurations and any configurations that do not exceed themaximum configurations. For example, the LBBPc supports the maximum configuration of 3x10 MHz4T4R, and therefore supports any of the following configurations: 3x1.4 MHz 4T4R, 3x3 MHz 4T4R, and3x5 MHz 4T4R.

l As long as the maximum antenna configuration is not exceeded, different cells support different antennaconfigurations. For example, if an LBBPd2 supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the threecells connected to the LBBPc can use the following antenna configurations: 2T2R, 2T2R, and 1T1R.

l Boards with the same antenna configuration support combinations of different bandwidth as long as the totalbandwidth does not exceed the maximum bandwidth supported by the board. For example, the LBBPcsupports the maximum configuration of 3x20 MHz 2T2R, and therefore supports any of the followingconfigurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10 MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz2T2R.

l The LBBP supports CPRI convergence when the site is configured with any of the following RRUs:RRU3221, RRU3240, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, LRFUe, MRFUd, RRU3229,RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3642, RRU3832, RRU3838, and RRU3268. The CPRI convergence of the LBBPmust comply with the following principles:

l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only between two LBBPcboards, and one LBBPc board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.

l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only from multipleLBBPc boards to one LBBPd board, and only the CPRI ports on the LBBPd in slot 2 or 3 can connectto RF units.

Baseband Specifications (Maximum RRC_Connected Users) Supported byeNodeBs

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported bythe LMPT.

Table 10-4 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode

Board Maximum Number of UEs in RRCConnected Mode

LMPT 5400

The following table describes the data radio bearer (DRB) specifications and maximum numberof users supported by the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working in LTE mode.



227

Table 10-5 Data radio bearer specifications

Board Maximum Number of Users

UMPTa2/UMPTa6 10800

The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode supported bythe LBBP board in LTE FDD scenarios.

Table 10-6 Maximum number of UEs in RRC connected mode

Board Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number of UEs inRRC Connected Mode

LBBPc 1.4 MHz 1008

3 MHz 1800

5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 1800

15 MHz 1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4Rmode)

20 MHz 1800 (in 2R mode) or 1200 (in 4Rmode)

LBBPd1/LBBPd2 1.4 MHz

3 MHz 1080

5 MHz 1800

10 MHz 3600

15 MHz 3600

20 MHz 3600

LBBPd3 1.4 MHz

3 MHz 2160

5 MHz 3600

10 MHz 3600

The following table lists the maximum RRC_connected users per cell of an eNodeB.



228

Table 10-7 Maximum RRC_connected users per cell of an eNodeB

Cell Bandwidth Maximum RRC_Connected Users PerCell

1.4 MHz 168

3 MHz 360

5 MHz 600

10 MHz 1200

15 MHz 1200

20 MHz 1200

The maximum RRC_connected users supported by an eNodeB is calculated by the followingformula:

Maximum RRC_connected users supported by an eNodeB = Min (MaximumRRC_connected users supported by the main control board, N x MaximumRRC_connected users supported by an LBBP)

The main control board is the LMPT or UMPT, and N is the number of LBBP boards in theeNodeB.

The following table lists the maximum RRC_connected users per cell of an eNodeB that usestypical board configuration.

Table 10-8 Maximum number of RRC_connected users per eNodeB

Board Combination Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number ofRRC_Connected Users

1 UMPT+3 LBBPc 1.4 MHz 3024

3 MHz 5400

5 MHz 5400

10 MHz 5400

15 MHz 5400(2R)/3600(4R)

20 MHz 5400(2R)/3600(4R)

1 UMPT+5 LBBPd3 1.4 MHz 5040

3 MHz 10800

5 MHz 10800

10 MHz 10800

15 MHz 10800



229

Board Combination Cell Bandwidth Maximum Number ofRRC_Connected Users

20 MHz 10800

Baseband Specifications (Maximum Number of Data Radio Bearers) Supported byeNodeBs

The maximum number of data radio bearers per user is 8.

The maximum number of data radio bearers supported by an LMPT/LBBP/UMPT is three timesthe maximum RRC_connected users supported by the board.

The maximum number of data radio bearers supported by an entire eNodeB is 32400.

Baseband Specifications (Maximum Throughput) Supported by eNodeBsThe following table lists the UL and DL throughput of an LTE cell or UE.

Table 10-9 UL and DL throughput of an LTE cell or UE

Item CellBandwidth

Specification

Maximumthroughput of acell

1.4 MHz l DL cell MAC layer throughput: 8.7 Mbit/s (at2x2 MIMO, 64QAM)

l UL cell MAC layer throughput: 6.4 Mbit/s (at2x2 MU-MIMO, 16QAM)



3 MHz l DL cell MAC layer throughput: 22 Mbit/s (at 2x2MIMO, 64QAM)

l UL cell MAC layer throughput: 16 Mbit/s (at 2x2MU-MIMO, 16QAM)

l UL cell MAC layer throughput: 8 Mbit/s (at 1x4SIMO, 16QAM)




230

Item CellBandwidth

Specification









15 MHz l DL cell MAC layer throughput: 110 Mbit/s (at2x2 MIMO, 64QAM)




20 MHz l DL cell MAC layer throughput: 150 Mbit/s (at2x2 MIMO, 64QAM)




Maximumthroughput of aUE

1.4 MHz l Single user DL MAC layer throughput: 8.7 Mbit/s (at 2x2 MIMO, 64QAM)

l Single user UL MAC layer throughput: 3.2 Mbit/s (at 1x2 SIMO/1x4 SIMO, 16QAM)

3 MHz l Single user DL MAC layer throughput: 22 Mbit/s (at 2x2 MIMO, 64QAM)

l Single user UL MAC layer throughput: 8 Mbit/s (at 1x2 SIMO/1x4 SIMO, 16QAM)



231

Item CellBandwidth

Specification





15 MHz l Single user DL MAC layer throughput: 110Mbit/s (at 2x2 MIMO, 64QAM)


20 MHz l Single user DL MAC layer throughput: 150Mbit/s (at 2x2 MIMO, 64QAM)


10.1.3 Signaling SpecificationsThis section describes the signaling specifications of 3900 series base stations.

Signaling Specifications of NodeBs

The following table lists the typical board combinations and the corresponding signalingspecifications of NodeBs.

Table 10-10 Typical board combinations and the corresponding signaling specifications

Combination ofMain ControlBoards andTransmissionBoards

Number ofWBBPb/WBBPdBoards

Number of WBBPfBoards

SignalingSpecifications(CNBAPS)

WMPT 1 0 60

WMPT 2 0 120

WMPT ≥3 0 170

WMPT Not specified ≥1 170

WMPT+UTRP 1 0 60



232





WMPT+UTRP 2 0 120

WMPT+UTRP 3 0 180

WMPT+UTRP 4 0 240

WMPT+UTRP 5 0 250

WMPT+UTRP 0 1 200

WMPT+UTRP ≥1 ≥1 250

WMPT+UTRPc 1 0 400

WMPT+UTRPc 2 0 460

WMPT+UTRPc 3 0 520

WMPT+UTRPc 4 0 580

WMPT+UTRPc 5 0 640

WMPT+UTRPc 6 0 700

WMPT+UTRPc 0 1 500

WMPT+UTRPc 1 1 560

WMPT+UTRPc 2 1 620

WMPT+UTRPc 3 1 680

WMPT+UTRPc 4 1 740

WMPT+UTRPc 5 1 800

WMPT+UTRPc 0 2 700

WMPT+UTRPc 1 2 760

WMPT+UTRPc 2 2 820

WMPT+UTRPc 3 2 880

WMPT+UTRPc 4 2 940

WMPT+UTRPc 0 3 900

WMPT+UTRPc 1 3 960

WMPT+UTRPc 2 3 1020

WMPT+UTRPc 3 3 1080



233





WMPT+UTRPc 0 4 1100

WMPT+UTRPc 1 4 1160

WMPT+UTRPc 2 4 1220

WMPT+UTRPc 0 5 1300

WMPT+UTRPc 1 5 1360

WMPT+UTRPc 0 6 1500

UMPTa1/UMPTb1 1 0 400























234











Signaling Specifications of eNodeBsThe following table describes the signaling specifications of the LMPT.

Table 10-11 Signaling specifications of the LMPT

Board Signaling Specification (CAPS)

LMPT

The following table describes the signaling specifications of the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 workingin LTE mode.

Table 10-12 Signaling specifications

Board Signaling Specifications (CAPS)

UMPTa2/UMPTa6 60

The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LBBP.

NOTE

The signaling specifications for TDD scenarios are the maximum ones for typical scenarios of normal cells.

The signaling specification of an eNodeB is calculated by the following formula:

Signaling specification of an eNodeB = Min (N x LBBP signaling specification, M xSignaling specification of the main control board)

N is the number of LBBPs and M is the number of main control boards. Either the LMPT orUMPT can be the main control board.



235

The following table lists the typical board combinations and the corresponding signalingspecifications of eNodeBs.

Table 10-13 Typical board combinations and the corresponding signaling specifications

Board Combination Signaling Specifications (CAPS)

1 LMPT+1 LBBPc 30

1 LMPT+2 LBBPc 30

1 LMPT+3 LBBPc 30

1 UMPT+1 LBBPd 60

1 UMPT+2 LBBPd 60

1 UMPT+3 LBBPd 60

10.1.4 Transmission Port SpecificationsThis section describes the transmission ports on a BBU.

Table 10-14 lists transmission ports on a single-mode BBU.

Table 10-14 Transmission ports on a single-mode BBU

Mode Transmission Port

GSM GTMU: 4 E1s/T1s, 1 FE electrical port, and 1 FE optical port

UTRPb4: 8 E1s/T1s

UTRPc: 4 FE/GE electrical ports and 2 FE/GE optical ports

UMTS WMPT: 4 E1s/T1s, 1 FE electrical port, and 1 FE optical port

UMPT: 4 E1s/T1s, 1 FE/GE electrical port, and 1 FE/GE optical port

UTRP2: 2 FE/GE optical ports

UTRP3: 8 E1s/T1s

UTRP4: 8 E1s/T1s

UTRP6: 1 STM-1 or OC-3 port

UTRP9: 4 FE/GE electrical ports


UTRPa: 2 E1/T1 ports (8 E1s/T1s)

LTE LMPT: 2 FE/GE electrical ports, 2 FE/GE optical ports, or 1 FE/GE opticalport + 1 FE/GE electrical port



236

Mode Transmission Port

UMPT: 4 E1s/T1s, 1 FE/GE electrical port, and 1 FE/GE optical port


On a multi-mode BBU, transmission ports supported by each mode are functional. For example,on a GU dual-mode BBU, transmission ports supported by a GSM BBU and transmission portssupported by a UMTS BBU are functional.

10.1.5 Engineering SpecificationsThis section describes the engineering specifications of the BBU, including the powerspecifications, size, weight, heat dissipation capability, environmental specifications, and surgeprotection specifications.

Input Power Specifications

The following table lists the input power specifications of the BBU.

Table 10-15 Input power specifications of the BBU

Input Power Voltage Range

-48 V DC (UPEUc) -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications

The following table lists the size and weight of the BBU.

Table 10-16 Size and weight of the BBU

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x Wx D)

86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm

Weight l ≤ 12 kg (full configuration, BBU3900)

l ≤ 7 kg (typical configuration, BBU3900)

Heat Dissipation Capability

The following table lists the heat dissipation capability of the BBU.



237

Configuration Specifications

FAN 350 W

FANc 650 W

Environment Specifications

The following table lists the environment specifications of the BBU.

Table 10-17 Environment specifications of the BBU

Item Specifications

Operatingtemperature

l -20ºC to +55ºC (long term)l +55ºC to +60ºC (short term)

Relative humidity 5% RH to 95% RH

Protection level IP20

AtmosphericPressure

70 kPa to 106 kPa

Surge Protection Specifications

Table 10-18 lists the surge protection specifications of the ports on the BBU.

NOTE

l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs.

l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominaldischarge current.

Table 10-18 Surge protection specifications of the ports on the BBU

Port UsageScenario

SurgeProtectionMode

Specification

-48 V DCport

Applicable tothe scenariowhere the BBUand devicesinterconnectedthrough thisport areinstalledindoors

Differential mode 1 kA

Common mode 2 kA



238

Port UsageScenario

SurgeProtectionMode

Specification

FE/GEport

Applicable tothe scenariowhere the BBUand devicesinterconnectedthrough thisport areinstalledindoors (surge)

Differential mode 0.5 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode 4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Applicable tothe scenariowhere somedevices areconfiguredremotely or thescenario wherethe BBU anddevicesinterconnectedthrough thisport are placedoutdoors(surgeprotectorconfigured)


Common mode 5 kA

GPS port Applicable tothe scenariowhere somedevices areconfiguredremotely or thescenario wherethe BBU anddevicesinterconnectedthrough thisport are placedoutdoors(surgeprotectorconfigured)


Common mode 40 kA

RGPS port Applicable tothe scenariowhere somedevices are




239

Port UsageScenario

SurgeProtectionMode

Specification

configuredremotely or thescenario wherethe BBU anddevicesinterconnectedthrough thisport are placedoutdoors(surgeprotectionmoduleconfigured)

Common mode 5 kA

E1/T1 port Applicable tothe scenariowhere the BBUand devicesinterconnectedthrough thisport areinstalledindoors

Differential mode 250 A

Common mode 250 A

Applicable tothe scenariowhere somedevices areconfiguredremotely or thescenario wherethe BBU anddevicesinterconnectedthrough thisport are placedoutdoors(surgeprotectionboardconfigured)


Common mode 5 kA



240

Port UsageScenario

SurgeProtectionMode

Specification

Drycontact

Applicable tothe scenariowhere the BBUand devicesinterconnectedthrough thisdry contact areinstalledindoors


Applicable tothe scenariowhere somedevices areconfiguredremotely or thescenario wherethe BBU anddevicesinterconnectedthrough thisport are placedoutdoors(surgeprotectionboardconfigured)


Common mode 5 kA

RS485alarm port

Applicable tothe scenariowhere the BBUand devicesinterconnectedthrough thisport areinstalledindoors


Common mode 250 A

Applicable tothe scenariowhere somedevices areconfiguredremotely or thescenario wherethe BBU anddevicesinterconnected




241

Port UsageScenario

SurgeProtectionMode

Specification

through thisport are placedoutdoors(surgeprotectionboardconfigured)

Common mode 5 kA

10.2 Technical Specifications of RFUsThis section describes the technical specifications of radio frequency units (RFUs), includingsupported modes, frequency bands, RF specifications, surge protection specifications, andantenna capabilities.

10.2.1 GRFU Technical SpecificationsThe GSM Radio Frequency Unit (GRFU) is a multi-carrier radio frequency (RF) module, whichsupports a maximum of six carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency Bands

The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a GRFU.

Table 10-19 Modes and frequency bands supported by a GRFU

Type Mode Frequency Band(MHz)

RX FrequencyBand (MHz)

TX FrequencyBand (MHz)

GRFU V1 GSM 1900 1850 to 1890 1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910 1950 to 1990

GRFU V2 GSM 900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960

1800 1710 to 1770 1805 to 1865



242




1725 to 1785 1820 to 1880

GRFU V2a GSM 900 885 to 910 930 to 955

1800 1710 to 1755 1805 to 1850

RF SpecificationsTable 10-20 lists RF specifications of a GRFU.

NOTE

l ATBR in the RX and TX Channels column indicates that this RF module has A transmit channels and Breceive channels.

l C x D W in the Output Power column indicates that this RF module is configured with C transmit channelsand the maximum output power of each transmit channel is D W.

Table 10-20 RF specifications of a GRFU

Type RX andTXChannels

Capacity

Receiver Sensitivity(dBm)

OutputPower

PowerConsumption

ReceiverSensitivitywith OneAntenna

ReceiverSensitivitywith TwoAntennas

GRFUV1

1T2R 6 TRXs -113.0 -115.8 The GRFUV1 supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 1 x 80 W.For typicalconfigurations, see thetableOutputpower forthe GRFUV1 (GSM,1900 MHz).

Powerconsumption (GRFUV1operating in1900 MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



243


Capacity


OutputPower

PowerConsumption



GRFUV2

l 900 MHzEGSM:-113.3

l 900 MHzPGSM/1800MHz:-113.5


l 900 MHzPGSM/1800MHz:-116.3

The GRFUV2 supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 1 x 80 W.The typicalconfigurations are asfollows:l Output

powerfor theGRFUV2/GRFUV2a(GSM,900MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theGRFUV2/GRFUV2a(GSM,1800MHz)

l Powerconsumption(GRFUV2/GRFUV2aoperating in 900MHzfrequency bandconfigured)

l Powerconsumption(GRFUV2/GRFUV2aoperating in 1800MHzfrequency bandconfigured)

l Powerconsumption(GRFUV2/GRFUV2aoperating in 900and 1800MHzfrequency band



244


Capacity


OutputPower

PowerConsumption



GRFUV2a

-113.5 -116.3 configured)

NOTE

For the GRFU V1 operating in the 1900 MHz frequency band: The maximum output power of the RFmodule in S1 configuration is 60 W. To achieve the maximum output power, you need to buy a license.



245

Table 10-21 Output power for the GRFU V1 (GSM, 1900 MHz)

Number ofCarriers

BCCH Carrier Output Power(Power Sharing Disabled)

BCCH Carrier Output Power (PowerSharing Enabled)

1 60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK) 60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)





6 10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK) 16 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

NOTE

For the GRFU V2/GRFU V2a operating in the 900 MHz frequency band:

l The maximum output power of the RF module in S1 configuration is 60 W. To achieve the maximumoutput power, you need to buy a license.

l After design optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimum shift-frequencykeying (GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the the RFmodule when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used.

l When the S4, S5, or S6 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 EnhancedEDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemescannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RF module.

Table 10-22 Output power for the GRFU V2/GRFU V2a (GSM, 900 MHz)

Number ofCarriers











246

NOTE

For the GRFU V2/GRFU V2a operating in the 1800 MHz frequency band:

l The maximum output power of the RF module in S1 configuration is 60 W. To achieve the maximumoutput power, you need to buy a license.

l When the S4, S5, or S6 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 EnhancedEDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemescannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RF module.

Table 10-23 Output power for the GRFU V2/GRFU V2a (GSM, 1800 MHz)

Number ofCarriers









NOTE

In the Table 10-24, Table 10-25, Table 10-26, and Table 10-27:

l The power consumption specifications of a BTS3900 (-48 V DC ) cabinet are obtained when Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Adjustment, TRX Working Voltage Adjustment, DTX, power control,and power sharing are enabled. The power consumption specifications of a BTS3900A (220 V AC)cabinet, BTS3900L (-48 V DC) cabinet, or BTS3900AL (220 V AC) cabinet are obtained when DTXand power control are enabled.

l TOC refers to the cabinet-top power of base stations for which duplex ports are configured.

Table 10-24 Power consumption (GRFU V1 operating in 1900 MHz frequency band configured)

Cabinet Configuration Typical PowerConsumption (W)

Maximum PowerConsumption (W)

BTS3900 (-48 VDC)

S4/4/4, TOC =20 W

792 943

BTS3900A(220V AC)

S4/4/4, TOC =20 W

870 1036



247

Table 10-25 Power consumption (GRFU V2/GRFU V2a operating in 900 MHz frequency bandconfigured)



BTS3900 (-48 VDC)

S4/4/4, TOC =20 W

726 875

BTS3900A(220V AC)

S4/4/4, TOC =20 W

798 961

Table 10-26 Power consumption (GRFU V2/GRFU V2a operating in 1800 MHz frequency bandconfigured)



BTS3900 (-48 VDC)

S4/4/4, TOC =20 W

716 865

BTS3900A(220V AC)

S4/4/4, TOC =20 W

786 950

Table 10-27 Power consumption (GRFU V2/GRFU V2a operating in 900 and 1800 MHzfrequency band configured)



BTS3900L(-48V DC)

900 MHz S4/4/4+ 1800 MHzS8/8/8, TOC =20 W

2072 2518

BTS3900AL(220V AC)

900 MHz S4/4/4+ 1800 MHzS8/8/8, TOC =20 W

1771 2098

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of a GRFU.



248

Table 10-28 Equipment specifications of a GRFU

Type Dimension (H x W x D) Weight (kg)

GRFU V1,GRFU V2, andGRFU V2a

9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

≤12

Table 10-29 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a GRFU.

NOTE



Table 10-29 Surge protection specifications of ports on a GRFU

Port UsageScenario

Surge Protection Mode Specifications

Power port Applicableto allscenarios

Surge Differentialmode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

RF port Applicableto allscenarios

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA

Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals

Applicableto allscenarios

Surge 250 A

Monitoringport


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

250 A

Commonmode

250 A

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on a GRFU.



249

Table 10-30 Specifications of CPRI ports on a GRFU

Type Number ofCPRI Ports



GRFU V1 2 1.25 Star or chain 2

GRFU V2 andGRFU V2a

2 1.25 or 2.5 Star or chain 2

Antenna Capability

The following table shows antenna capability of a GRFU.

Table 10-31 Antenna capability of a GRFU

Type TMA Support RET Antenna Support

GRFU V1 Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

GRFU V2 Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

GRFU V2a Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE

For RF moudles supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

10.2.2 DRFU Technical SpecificationsThe Double Radio Frequency Unit (DRFU) is a dual-transceiver radio frequency (RF) module,which supports a maximum of two carriers.


The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a DRFU.

Table 10-32 Modes and frequency bands supported by a DRFU




DRFU GSM 900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880



250

RF SpecificationsTable 10-33 lists RF specifications of a DRFU.

NOTE

ATBR in the RX and TX Channels column indicates that this RF module has A transmit channels and B receivechannels.

Table 10-33 RF specifications of a DRFU

Type RXandTXChannels

Capacity

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) OutputPower

PowerConsumptionReceiver

Sensitivity withOneAntenna

ReceiverSensitivity withTwoAntennas

ReceiverSensitivity withFourAntennas

DRFU 2T2R 2TRXs

-113.0 -115.8 -118.5 l Outputpowerfor theDRFU(GSM,900MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theDRFU(GSM,1800MHz)

l Powerconsumption(DRFUoperating in900MHzconfigured)

l Powerconsumption(DRFUoperating in1800MHzconfigured)

NOTE

Two DRFU modules are required when four carriers are configured.



251

Table 10-34 Output power for the DRFU (GSM, 900 MHz)

Number of Carriers BCCH Carrier Output Power

1 45 W (GMSK)/30 W (8PSK)

2 45 W (GMSK)/30 W (8PSK)

4 20 W (GMSK)/14 W (8PSK)

1 (PBT) 71 W (GMSK)/41 W (8PSK)

Table 10-35 Output power for the DRFU (GSM, 1800 MHz)


1 40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

2 40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

4 18 W (GMSK)/12 W (8PSK)

1 (PBT) 63 W (GMSK)/42 W (8PSK)

NOTE

In the Table 10-36 and Table 10-37:

l Typical and maximum power consumption are measured when the environment temperature is 25°C.

l The typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 30%.


Table 10-36 Power consumption (DRFU operating in 900 MHz configured)



BTS3900 (-48VDC)

S2/2/2, TOC =45 W

730 1060

BTS3900A (AC) S2/2/2, TOC =45 W

820 1190

Table 10-37 Power consumption (DRFU operating in 1800 MHz configured)



BTS3900 (-48VDC)

S2/2/2, TOC =40 W

730 1050



252



BTS3900A (AC) S2/2/2, TOC =40 W

820 1190

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of a DRFU.

Table 10-38 Equipment specifications of a DRFU


DRFU 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

≤12

Table 10-39 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a DRFU.

NOTE



Table 10-39 Surge protection specifications of ports on a DRFU

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

Port fortransmittingandreceivingsignals


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



253

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on a DRFU.

Table 10-40 Specifications of CPRI ports on a DRFU




DRFU 2 1.25 Star or chain 3

Antenna CapabilityThe following table shows antenna capability of a DRFU.

Table 10-41 Antenna capability of a DRFU


DRFU Not supported AISG1.1

NOTE

l An external bridge tap (BT) is required if a DRFU needs to be configured with a TMA.

l For RF moudles supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

10.2.3 WRFU Technical SpecificationsA WCDMA Radio Filter Unit (WRFU) supports a maximum of four carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFU.



254

Table 10-42 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFU

Type Mode FrequencyBand (MHz)



80 W WRFU UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

850 824 to 835 869 to 880

40 W WRFU 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

RF SpecificationsTable 10-43 lists RF specifications of a WRFU.

NOTE



l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at theantenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001.

l The receiver sensitivity on the UMTS 850 MHz frequency band is measured on its frequency sub-bands.

l Maximum output power = Maximum output power of the PA - Internal loss. The maximum output poweris measured at the antenna port.



255

Table 10-43 RF specifications of a WRFU

Type RX andTXChannel

Capacity


PowerConsumptionReceive

rSensitivitywithOneAntenna



WRFU 1T2R l 80 WWRFU: 4carriers

l 40 WWRFU: 2carriers

l -125.8(2100MHz)

l -125.6(850MHz)

l -128.6(2100MHz)

l -128.4(850MHz)

l -131.3(2100MHz)

l -131.1(850MHz)

l The80 WWRFUsupportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 1 x80 Wandunevenpowerconfigurations.Fortypicalconfigurations,seetheOutputpower fortheWRFU

Powerconsumption(WRFUconfigured)



256


Capacity






(UMTS,850MHz/2100MHz, 80W)table.

l The40 WWRFUsupportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 1 x40 W.Fortypicalconfigurations,seetheOutputpower fortheWRFU



257


Capacity






(UMTS,2100MHz, 40W)table.

Table 10-44 Output power for the WRFU (UMTS, 850 MHz/2100 MHz, 80 W)

Number of Carriers Maximum Output Power per Carrier(W)

1 60

2 40

3 20

4 20

Table 10-45 Output power for the WRFU (UMTS, 2100 MHz, 40 W)

Number of Carriers Maximum Output Power per Carrier(W)

1 40

2 20

NOTE


l UMTS typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 40% and UMTSmaximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.

l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.



258

Table 10-46 Power consumption (WRFU configured)

Cabinet Configuration(SectorxCarrier)

OutputPowerperCarrier(W)

TypicalPowerConsumption(W)

MaximumPowerConsumption(W)

Power Backup DurationEstimated Based on TypicalPower Consumption of NewBatteries (Hours)

50 Ah 92 Ah 184 Ah

BTS3900

3 x 1 20 390 450 5.6 11.3 22.6

3 x 2 20 455 600 4.6 9.5 19.4

3 x 3 20 580 745 3.5 7.2 14.5

3 x 4 20 730 1030 2.5 5.1 15.2

BTS3900A

3 x 1 20 390 450 5.6 11.3 22.6

3 x 2 20 455 600 4.6 9.5 19.4

3 x 3 20 580 745 3.5 7.2 14.5

3 x 4 20 730 1030 2.5 5.1 15.2

BTS3900L

3 x 1 20 410 475 5.2 10.7 21.5

3 x 2 20 480 625 4.3 9 18.4

3 x 3 20 605 770 3.2 6.9 14.6

3 x 4 20 755 1055 2.5 5.2 11.7

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of a WRFU.

Table 10-47 Equipment specifications of a WRFU


WRFU 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

11

Table 10-48 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFU.

NOTE





259

Table 10-48 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFU

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A

Alarm port Applicableto allscenarios

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFU.

Table 10-49 Specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFU




WRFU 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star or chain 2 (serving thesame sector)

Antenna CapabilityThe following table lists the antenna capability of a WRFU.



260

Table 10-50 Antenna capability of a WRFU


WRFU Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.4 WRFUa Technical SpecificationsA WCDMA Radio Filter Unit type A (WRFUa) supports a maximum of four carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUa.

Table 10-51 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUa




WRFUa UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

RF SpecificationsTable 10-52 lists RF specifications of a WRFUa.

NOTE







261

Table 10-52 RF specifications of a WRFUa


Capacity






WRFUa 1T2R 4 carriers -125.8 -128.6 -131.3 TheWRFUasupportsthemaximum powerconfiguration 1 x100 W.andunevenpowerconfigurations.Fortypicalconfigurations,see theOutputpowerfor theWRFUa(UMTS,2100MHz)table.

Powerconsumption(WRFUaconfigured)

Table 10-53 Output power for the WRFUa (UMTS, 2100 MHz)

Mode Total Number of Carriers Output Power per Carrier(W)

UMTS 1 80

2 50

3 33



262


4 25

NOTE



l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one UMPTb1 and one WBBPf3 are configured.

l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, one UMPTb1 and two WBBPf3s are configured.

Table 10-54 Power consumption (WRFUa configured)

Cabinet Configuration(CarrierxSector)





50 Ah 92 Ah 184 Ah

BTS3900(Ver.D)(-48 VDC)

3x1 20 455 520 4.6 9.5 19.4

3x2 20 525 670 3.9 8.2 16.8

3x3 20 700 865 2.8 5.8 12.6

3x4 20 850 1150 2.1 4.4 10.3

BTS3900A(Ver.D)(-48 VDC)

3x1 20 485 550 4.2 8.9 18.2

3x2 20 555 700 3.7 7.8 15.9

3x3 20 730 895 2.6 5.5 12.1

3x4 20 880 1180 2.1 4.3 10.0

BTS3900L(Ver.D)(-48 VDC)

3x1 20 485 550 4.2 8.9 18.2

3x2 20 555 700 3.7 7.8 15.9

3x3 20 730 895 2.6 5.5 12.1

3x4 20 880 1180 2.1 4.3 10.0

BTS3900AL(Ver.A)(-48 VDC)

3x1 20 500 565 4.1 8.6 17.6

3x2 20 570 715 3.6 7.5 15.4

3x3 20 745 910 2.5 5.4 11.8

3x4 20 895 1195 2.0 4.2 9.6



263

Engineering Specifications

The following table lists the equipment specifications of a WRFUa.

Table 10-55 Equipment specifications of a WRFUa


WRFUa 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

11

Table 10-56 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUa.

NOTE



Table 10-56 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUa

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



264


The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFUa.

Table 10-57 Specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFUa




WRFUa 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star or chain 2 (serving thesame sector)

Antenna Capability

The following table lists the antenna capability of a WRFUa.

Table 10-58 Antenna capability of a WRFUa


WRFUa Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.5 WRFUd Technical SpecificationsA WCDMA Radio Filter Unit type D (WRFUd) supports a maximum of six carriers.


The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUd.

Table 10-59 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUd




WRFUd UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

RF Specifications

Table 10-60 lists RF specifications of a WRFUd.



265

NOTE







266

Table 10-60 RF specifications of a WRFUd

Type TX andRXChannel

Capacity






WRFUd 2T2R l WithMIMO: 4carriers

l WithoutMIMO: 6carriers

-126.1 -128.9 -131.6 TheWRFUdsupportsthemaximum powerconfiguration 2 x60 W,configurations ofsingle-output,MIMO,or thecombination of thetwo, andunevenpowerconfigurations.l For

typicalconfigurations insingle-output orMIMOscenarios,seethe

Powerconsumption(WRFUdoperating in the2100MHzfrequency band)



267


Capacity






tableOutputpower fortheWRFUd(UMTS,2100MHz).

l Fortypicalconfigurations inhybridconfigurationscenarios,seethetableCarriercombinationssupportedbyWRFUd in



268


Capacity






hybridconfigurations.Inthisscenario,oneWRFUdsupports amaximumof sixcarriers.Eachtransmitchannelsupports amaximumoffourcarriers andthemaximumoutputpower ofeach



269


Capacity






transmitchannel is60 W.

Table 10-61 Output power for the WRFUd (UMTS, 2100 MHz)

Mode Total Number ofCarriers

Output Power per Carrier(W)

UMTS 1 60

2 l Configured in one PA: 30l Configured in two PAs: 60

3 20


6 Configured in two PAs: 20

1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30

3 (MIMO) 2 x 20

4 (MIMO) 2 x 15

Table 10-62 Carrier combinations supported by WRFUd in hybrid configurations

Number of MIMO Carriers Number of Single-Output Carriers

1 5

2 4

3 2



270

NOTE



l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 10-63 Power consumption (WRFUd operating in the 2100 MHz frequency band)






50 Ah 92 Ah 184 Ah

BTS3900

3 x 1 20 465 540 4.4 9.3 18.9

3 x 2 20 545 680 3.7 7.9 16.2

3 x 3 20 685 880 2.9 5.9 12.8

3 x 4 20 925 1255 2.0 4.1 9.3

BTS3900A

3 x 1 20 465 540 4.4 9.3 18.9

3 x 2 20 545 680 3.7 7.9 16.2

3 x 3 20 685 880 2.9 5.9 12.8

3 x 4 20 925 1255 2.0 4.1 9.3

BTS3900L

3 x 1 20 495 570 4.1 8.7 17.8

3 x 2 20 575 710 3.5 7.3 15.3

3 x 3 20 715 910 2.7 5.6 12.3

3 x 4 20 955 1255 1.9 3.9 9.0

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of a WRFUd.

Table 10-64 Equipment specifications of a WRFUd


WRFUd 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

12



271

Table 10-65 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUd.

NOTE



Table 10-65 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUd

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFUd.

Table 10-66 Specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFUd




WRFUd 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A



272

Antenna CapabilityThe following table lists the antenna capability of a WRFUd.

Table 10-67 Antenna capability of a WRFUd


WRFUd Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.6 WRFUe Technical SpecificationsA WCDMA Radio Filter Unit type E (WRFUe) supports a maximum of six carriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUe.

Table 10-68 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUe




WRFUe UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

RF SpecificationsTable 10-69 lists RF specifications of a WRFUe.

NOTE







273

Table 10-69 RF specifications of a WRFUe


Capacity






WRFUe 2T2R l WithMIMO: 4carriers


-126.1 -128.9 -131.6 TheWRFUesupportsthemaximum powerconfiguration 2 x80 W,configurations ofsingle-output,MIMO,or thecombination of thetwo, andunevenpowerconfigurations.l For

typicalconfigurations insingle-output orMIMOscenarios,seethe

Powerconsumption(WRFUeoperating in the2100MHzfrequency band)



274


Capacity






tableOutputpower fortheWRFUe(UMTS,2100MHz).

l Fortypicalconfigurations inhybridconfigurationscenarios,seethetableCarriercombinationssupportedbyWRFUe in



275


Capacity






hybridconfigurations.Inthisscenario,oneWRFUesupports amaximumof sixcarriers.Eachtransmitchannelsupports amaximumoffourcarriers andthemaximumoutputpower ofeach



276


Capacity






transmitchannel is80 W.

Table 10-70 Output power for the WRFUe (UMTS, 2100 MHz)

Mode Total Number of UMTSCarriers

Output Power per UMTSCarrier (W)

UMTS 1 80

2 l Configured in one PA: 40l Configured in two PAs:

80

3 26


40


1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 40

3 (MIMO) 2 x 26

4 (MIMO) 2 x 20

Table 10-71 Carrier combinations supported by WRFUe in hybrid configurations


1 5



277


2 4

3 2

NOTE





Table 10-72 Power consumption (WRFUe operating in the 2100 MHz frequency band)






50 Ah 92 Ah 184 Ah

BTS3900

3 x 1 20 465 540 4.4 9.3 18.9

3 x 2 20 545 680 3.7 7.9 16.2

3 x 3 20 685 880 2.9 5.9 12.8

3 x 4 20 820 1090 2.3 4.7 10.7

BTS3900A

3 x 1 20 495 570 4.1 8.7 17.8

3 x 2 20 575 710 3.5 7.3 15.3

3 x 3 20 715 910 2.7 5.6 12.3

3 x 4 20 850 1120 2.1 4.4 10.3

BTS3900L

3 x 1 20 495 570 4.1 8.7 17.8

3 x 2 20 575 710 3.5 7.3 15.3

3 x 3 20 715 910 2.7 5.6 12.3

3 x 4 20 850 1120 2.1 4.4 10.3

BTS3900AL

3 x 1 20 510 585 4 8.4 17.3

3 x 2 20 590 725 3.5 7.1 14.9

3 x 3 20 730 925 2.6 5.5 12.1

3 x 4 20 865 1135 2.1 4.3 10.2



278


Table 10-73 lists the engineering specifications of a WRFUe.

Table 10-73 Equipment specifications of a WRFUe


WRFUe 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

12

Table 10-74 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUe.

NOTE



Table 10-74 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUe

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



279


The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFUe.

Table 10-75 Specifications of CPRI ports on a WRFUe




WRFUe 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A

Antenna Capability

The following table lists the antenna capability of a WRFUe.

Table 10-76 Antenna capability of a WRFUe


WRFUe Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.7 MRFU Technical SpecificationsMulti-Mode Radio Frequency Units (MRFUs) are classified into MRFU V1, MRFU V2, andMRFU V2a modules. Using the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, MRFUs can workin different modes with different configurations.


The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFU.

Table 10-77 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFU

Type FrequencyBand (MHz)

ReceiveFrequencyBand (MHz)

TransmitFrequencyBand (MHz)

Mode

MRFU V1 900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960 GSM, UMTS,and GU

1800 1710 to 1755 1805 to 1850 GSM, LTE, andGL

1740 to 1785 1835 to 1880

1900 1850 to 1890 1930 to 1970 GSM and UMTS



280




Mode

1870 to 1910 1950 to 1990

MRFU V2 850 824 to 846.5 869 to 891.5 GSM, UMTS,and GU

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL

900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960


1725 to 1785 1820 to 1880

1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880

MRFUV2a

900 885 to 910 930 to 955 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL


RF SpecificationsTable 10-78 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an MRFU.

NOTE



l EF MSR indicates that E and F data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.

l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band atthe antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) doesnot exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band.


l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channelbandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard.

l The MRFU that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies withthe EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard. The MRFU that works in GSM mode and operates in the 850 or 1900 MHzfrequency band complies with the 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 and 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0 standards.

l The MRFU that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards. TheMRFU that works in UMTS, LTE, or MSR mode and operates in the 850 or 1900 MHz frequency bandcomplies with the 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 and TS 37.141 V10.4.0 standards.



281

Table 10-78 RF specifications of an MRFU

Type

TransmitandReceiveChannels

Capacity




ReceiverSensitivitywithTwoAntennas


MRFUV1

1T2R

GSM: 6TRXsUMTS: 4carriersLTE: 1carrierwith abandwidth of 3, 5,or 10MHz

GSM:-113.0UMTS:-125.5LTE:-106.3

GSM:-115.8UMTS:-128.3LTE:-109.1

GSM:-118.5(theoretical value)UMTS:-131.0LTE:-111.8

The MRFU V1supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 1x 80 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofMRFU V1(900/1800/1900 MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofMRFU V1(900 MHz,GU MSR)

l Outputpower ofMRFU V1(1800 MHz,GL MSR)

Powerconsumption (MRFUV1operating inthe 900MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

MRFUV2

1T2R

GSM: 6TRXsUMTS: 4carriers

GSM:l 850

MHz:

GSM:l 850

MHz:

GSM:l 850

MHz:-118.5

The MRFU V2/MRFU V2asupports themaximumpower

l Powerconsumption(MRFU



282

Type


Capacity






MRFU

LTE:l 900

MHz:1carrier withabandwidthof 1.4,3, 5,10,15, or20MHz

l 1800MHz:1carrier withabandwidthof 5,10,15, or

-113.0

l 900MHzPGSM:-113.5

l 900MHzEGSM:-113.3

l 1800MHz:-113.8

UMTS:l 850

MHz:-125.0

l 900MHzPGSM:-125.5

-115.8

l 900MHzPGSM:-116.3

l 900MHzEGSM:-116.1

l 1800MHz:-116.6

UMTS:l 850

MHz:-127.8

l 900MHzPGSM:-128.3

(theoreticalvalue)

l 900MHzPGSM: -119(theoreticalvalue)

l 900MHzEGSM:-118.8(theoreticalvalue)

l 1800MHz:-119.3(theoreticalvalue)

UMTS:l 850

MHz:-130.5

l 900MHzPGSM

configuration 1x 80 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofMRFU V2/MRFU V2a(850/900/1800 MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofMRFU V2/MRFU V2a(850/900MHz, GUMSR)

l Outputpower ofMRFU V2/MRFU V2a(900/1800

V2/MRFUV2aoperating in the900 MHzfrequency bandconfigured)

l Powerconsumption(MRFUV2/MRFUV2aoperating in the1800MHzfrequency band



283

Type


Capacity






V2a

20MHz

l 900MHzEGSM:-125.3

LTE:l 900

MHzPGSM:-106.3

l 900MHzEGSM:-106.1

l 1800MHz:-106.6

l 900MHzEGSM:-128.1

LTE:l 900

MHzPGSM:-109.1

l 900MHzEGSM:-108.9

l 1800MHz:-109.4

:-131.0

l 900MHzEGSM:-130.8

LTE:l 900

MHzPGSM:-111.8

l 900MHzEGSM:-111.6

l 1800MHz:-112.1

MHz, GLMSR)

configured)



284

NOTE

l If the power sharing feature is activated, assume that UEs in a cell are randomly located.

l If the RF module is placed at an altitude of 3500 to 4500 meters, its power reduces by 1 dB. If the RF moduleis placed at an altitude of 4500 to 6000 meters, its power reduces by 2 dB.

l Station spacing, frequency multiplexing factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model all affect thegains of dynamic power sharing. In most cases, network plans are designed on the basis of powerspecifications of dynamic power sharing.

l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. InGBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharingfeature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currentlycannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation),GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features inGBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.

l For the MRFU working in GSM mode: The maximum output power of the RF module in S1 configurationis 60 W. To achieve the maximum output power, you need to buy a license.

l For the MRFU V2/MRFU V2a working in GSM mode and operating in the 900 MHz frequency band: Afterdesign optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying(GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the the RF module whenthe S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When the S4, S5, or S6 configuration is used, the license controllingthe GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSKmodulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RF module.

l For the MRFU V2/MRFU V2a working in GSM mode and operating in the 1800 MHz frequency band:When the S4, S5, or S6 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGECoverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enablethe same output power for each carrier on the RF module.

Table 10-79 Output power of MRFU V1 (900/1800/1900 MHz, single-mode)

Mode Number ofGSMCarriers

NumberofUMTSCarriers

Numberof LTECarriers

OutputPower ofEachGSMCarrier(W)

OutputSharingPower ofEachGSMCarrier(W)

OutputPower ofEachUMTSCarrier(W)

OutputPower ofEach LTECarrier(W)

GSM

1 0 0 60 60 0 0

2 0 0 40 40 0 0

3 0 0 27 31 0 0

4 0 0 20 27 0 0

5 0 0 12 20 0 0

6 0 0 10 16 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 60 0

0 2 0 0 0 40 0

0 3* 0 0 0 27* 0



285








0 4* 0 0 0 20* 0

LTE 0 0 1 (1T2R) 0 0 0 60

Table 10-80 Output power of MRFU V1 (900 MHz, GU MSR)

Mode Number ofGSM Carriers

Number ofUMTSCarriers

Output Powerof Each GSMCarrier (W)

Output Powerof Each UMTSCarrier (W)

GU 1 1 40 40

1 2 40 20

2 1 20 40

2 2 20 20

3 1 20 10

3 1 16 20

3 2 16 10

3 2 10 20

4 1 12 20

4 2 10 10

5 1 10 10

Table 10-81 Output power of MRFU V1 (1800 MHz, GL MSR)


Number ofLTE Carriers


Output Powerof Each LTECarrier (W)

GL 1 1 40 40

2 1 20 40

3 1 20 10



286





3 1 16 20

4 1 15 10

4 1 12 20

5 1 10 20

NOTE

To implement UMTS MIMO, two MRFU V2/MRFU V2a modules are required.

Table 10-82 Output power of MRFU V2/MRFU V2a (850/900/1800 MHz, single-mode)








GSM

1 0 0 60 60 0 0

2 0 0 40 40 0 0

3 0 0 27 31 0 0

4 0 0 20 27 0 0

5 0 0 16 20 0 0

6 0 0 12 20 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 60 0

01(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 60 0

0 2 0 0 0 40 0

02(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 40 0

0 3* 0 0 0 27* 0



287








0

3(MIMO)*

0 0 0 2 x 27* 0

0 4* 0 0 0 20* 0

0

4(MIMO)*

0 0 0 2 x 20* 0

LTE 0 0 1 (1T2R) 0 0 0 60

Table 10-83 Output power of MRFU V2/MRFU V2a (850/900 MHz, GU MSR)





GU 1 1 40 40

2 1 20 40

2 1 30 20

3 1 20 20

4 1 12 20

5 1 10 20

1 2 40 20

2 2 20 20

3 2 16 10

3 2 10 20

4 2 10 10



288

NOTE

If there are less than 4 GSM carriers, 1.4, 3, 5, 10, or 15 MHz bandwidth can be spared from the 900 MHzfrequency band to set up an LTE network; 5, 10, or 15 MHz bandwidth can be spared from the 1800 MHzfrequency band to set up an LTE network. If there are more than 3 GSM carriers, 1.4, 3, 5, or 10 MHz bandwidthcan be spared from the 900 MHz frequency band to set up an LTE network; 5 or 10 MHz bandwidth can bespared from the 1800 MHz frequency band to set up an LTE network.

Table 10-84 Output power of MRFU V2/MRFU V2a (900/1800 MHz, GL MSR)





GL 1 1 40 30

1 1 30 40

2 1 27 20

2 1 20 40

3 1 20 20

4 1 12 20

4 1 15 10

5 1 10 20

NOTE


l GSM typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 30%, and the power controland DTX functions are enabled. GSM maximum power consumption is measured when the base station loadreaches 100%. GSM power consumption is calculated when the dynamic power sharing function is enabled.


l LTE typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 50% and LTE maximumpower consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.

l LTE power consumption is calculated based on the 2x2 MIMO configuration. Two MRFUs are configuredin each sector.

Table 10-85 Power consumption (MRFU V1 operating in the 900 MHz frequency bandconfigured)

Cabinet Mode Configuration

Output Powerof EachCarrier (W)

TypicalPowerConsumption (W)


BTS3900(Ver.B)(-48 V)

GSMS2/2/2 20 700 900

S4/4/4 27 950 1350



289





S6/6/6 16 840 1180

UMTS 3 x 1 20 540 670

3 x 2 20 800 1020

3 x 3 20 1040 1330

3 x 4 20 1150 1450

GU

GSMS2/2/2 +UMTS 3x 1

l GSM: 20l UMTS: 40

1150 1440


l GSM: 15l UMTS: 10

970 1260


l GSM: 10l UMTS: 10

930 1190

BTS3900A (Ver.B)(AC)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 800 1040

S4/4/4 27 1070 1540

S6/6/6 16 950 1340

UMTS 3 x 1 20 660 840

3 x 2 20 950 1220

3 x 3 20 1210 1560

3 x 4 20 1340 1700

GU GSMS2/2/2 +UMTS 3x 1

l GSM: 20l UMTS: 40

1340 1690


l GSM: 15l UMTS: 10

1140 1490



290






l GSM: 10l UMTS: 10

1100 1410

BTS3900L(Ver.B)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 745 960

S4/4/4 27 995 1410

S6/6/6 16 885 1240

UMTS 3 x 1 20 585 730

3 x 2 20 845 1080

3 x 3 20 1085 1390

3 x 4 20 1195 1510

GU


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 40

1195 1500


l GSM: 15l UMTS: 10

1015 1320


l GSM: 10l UMTS: 10

975 1250

Table 10-86 Power consumption (MRFU V2/MRFU V2a operating in the 900 MHz frequencyband configured)





BTS3900(Ver.B)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 620 730

S4/4/4 20 810 1130

S6/6/6 12 710 1025



291





UMTS3 x 1 20 595 650

3 x 2 20 630 800

LTE 3 x 1 2 x 60 1185 1270


GSM

S2/2/2 20 620 730

S4/4/4 20 810 1130

S6/6/6 12 710 1025

UMTS3 x 1 20 595 650

3 x 2 20 630 800

LTE 3 x 1 2 x 60 1185 1270


GSM

S2/2/2 20 645 755

S4/4/4 20 835 1155

S6/6/6 12 735 1050

UMTS3 x 1 20 620 675

3 x 2 20 655 825

LTE 3 x 1 2 x 60 1210 1295

BTS3900AL(Ver.A)(AC)

GSM

S4/4/4(MRFUV2, 900MHz) +S4/4/4(MRFUV2, 1800MHz)

20 1820 2495



292





GU

GSMS4/4/4(MRFUV2, 900MHz) +GSMS4/4/4(MRFUV2, 1800MHz) +UMTS 3x 2(WRFU,2100MHz)

l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

2300 3125

Table 10-87 Power consumption (MRFU V2/MRFU V2a operating in the 1800 MHz frequencyband configured)





BTS3900(Ver.B)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 640 750

S4/4/4 20 820 1140

S6/6/6 12 685 1100

LTE 3 x 1 2 x 60 1230 1355


GSM

S2/2/2 20 640 750

S4/4/4 20 820 1140

S6/6/6 12 685 1100

LTE 3 x 1 2 x 60 1230 1355


GSM

S2/2/2 20 645 755

S4/4/4 20 835 1155

S6/6/6 12 735 1050

LTE 3 x 1 2 x 60 1210 1295



293





BTS3900AL(Ver.A)(AC)

GSM

S4/4/4(MRFUV2, 900MHz) +S4/4/4(MRFUV2, 1800MHz)

20 1820 2495

GU

GSMS4/4/4(MRFUV2, 900MHz) +GSMS4/4/4(MRFUV2, 1800MHz) +UMTS 3x 2(WRFU,2100MHz)

l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

2300 3125

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of an MRFU.

Table 10-88 Equipment specifications of an MRFU


MRFU V1,MRFU V2, andMRFU V2a

9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

12

Table 10-89 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an MRFU.

NOTE





294

Table 10-89 Surge protection specifications of ports on an MRFU

Port UsageScenario

Surge Protection Mode Specification



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an MRFU.

Table 10-90 Specifications of CPRI ports on an MRFU




MRFU V1 2 1.25 Star or dual-star N/A

MRFU V2 andMRFU V2a

2 1.25 or 2.5

Antenna Capability

The following table provides the antenna capability of an MRFU.



295

Table 10-91 Antenna capability of an MRFU

Type TMA Support Supported RET Antennas

MRFU V1 Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

MRFU V2 and MRFUV2a

Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.8 MRFUd Technical SpecificationsUsing the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit TypeD (MRFUd) modules can work in different modes with different configurations.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUd.

Table 10-92 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUd




Mode

MRFUd 900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL

900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880

RF SpecificationsTable 10-93 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an MRFUd.



296

NOTE




l EF non-MSR indicates that E data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while F data is carriedon the other transmit channel of the RF module.




l The MRFUd that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies withthe EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard .

l The MRFUd that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards.



297

Table 10-93 RF specifications of an MRFUd

Type


Capacity






MRFUd

2T2R

GSM: 8TRXsUMTS:l Witho

utMIMO: 6carriers

l WithMIMO: 4carriers

LTE: 2carriers.Thebandwidth percarrier is1.4, 3, 5,10, 15, or20 MHz.

GSM:l 900

MHz:-113.7

l 1800MHz:-114.0

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-125.8

l 1800MHz:-126.1

LTE:l 900

MHz:-106.3

l 1800MHz:-106.6

GSM:l 900

MHz:-116.5

l 1800MHz:-116.8

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-128.6

l 1800MHz:-128.9

LTE:l 900

MHz:-109.1

l 1800MHz:-109.4

GSM:l 900

MHz:-119.2(theoreticalvalue)


UMTS:l 900

MHz:-131.3

l 1800MHz:-131.6

LTE:l 900

MHz:-111.8

l 1800MHz:-112.1

The MRFUdsupports themaximumpowerconfiguration2 x 80 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofMRFUd(900/1800MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofMRFUd(900/1800MHz, GUnon-MSR)

l Outputpower ofMRFUd(900/1800MHz, GUMSR)

l Outputpower ofMRFUd

l Powerconsumption(MRFUdoperating in the900MHzfrequency bandconfigured)

l Powerconsumption(MRFUdoperating in the1800MHzfrequency bandconfigured)



298

Type


Capacity






(900/1800MHz, GLMSR)

NOTE





l For the MRFUd working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum outputpower of each carrier on the MRFUd is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the relatedlicense must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable thesame output power for each carrier on the MRFUd when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used.When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGECoverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enablethe same output power for each carrier on the MRFUd.



299

Table 10-94 Output power of MRFUd (900/1800 MHz, single-mode)

Mode

Number ofGSMCarriers

Numberof UMTSCarriers





OutputPowerof EachLTECarrier(W)

GSM 1 0 0 80 80 0 0

2 0 0 80 80 0 0

3 0 0 40 40 0 0

4 0 0 40 40 0 0

5 0 0 27 30 0 0

6 0 0 27 30 0 0

7 0 0 20 27 0 0

8 0 0 20 27 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 80 0

0 2 0 0 0 80 0

0 3 0 0 0 40 0

0 4 0 0 0 40 0

0 5 0 0 0 25 0

0 6 0 0 0 25 0

0 1 (MIMO) 0 0 0 2 x 40 0

0 2 (MIMO) 0 0 0 2 x 40 0

0 3 (MIMO) 0 0 0 2 x 25 0

0 4 (MIMO) 0 0 0 2 x 20 0

LTE 0 0 1 (MIMO) 0 0 0 5/10/15/20 MHz:2 x 601.4/3MHz: 2x 40

0 0 2 (MIMO) 0 0 0 2 x 40



300

Table 10-95 Output power of MRFUd (900/1800 MHz, GU non-MSR)





GU 1 1 80 80

2 1 40 80

3 1 27 80

4 1 20 80

5 1 16 80

6 1 12 80

1 2 80 40

2 2 40 40

3 2 27 40

4 2 20 40

5 2 16 40

6 2 12 40

1 3 80 25

2 3 40 25

3 3 27 25

4 3 20 25

5 3 16 25

1 4 80 20

2 4 40 20

3 4 27 20

4 4 20 20

NOTE

* indicates that the configuration is supported only when the MRFUd operates in the 900 MHz frequency band.



301

Table 10-96 Output power of MRFUd (900/1800 MHz, GU MSR)





GU 1* 1* 30* 50*

2* 1* 30* 50*

2 1 40 40

3 1 40 40

4 1 27 40

5 1 27 20

5 1 25 30

5 1 20 40

6 1 20 40

7 1 20 20

7 1 16 30

1* 2* 30* 50*

1 2 40 40

2* 2* 30* 50*

2 2 40 40

3 2 30 20

3 2 25 30

3 2 20 40

4 2 30 20

4 2 25 30

4 2 20 40

5 2 20 20

6 2 20 20

1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 40

1* 1 (MIMO)* 30* 2 x 50*

2 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 40

2* 1 (MIMO)* 30* 2 x 50*



302





3 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

3 1 (MIMO) 25 2 x 30

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

4 1 (MIMO) 25 2 x 30

4 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 20

1 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 30

1 2 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

2 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 30

2 2 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

3 2 (MIMO) 15 2 x 20

4 2 (MIMO) 15 2 x 20

NOTE

** indicates that the configuration is supported only when the MRFUd operates in the 1800 MHz frequencyband.

Table 10-97 Output power of MRFUd (900/1800 MHz, GL MSR)





GL 1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 40

1** 1 (MIMO)** 30** 2 x 50**

2 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 40

2** 1 (MIMO)** 30** 2 x 50**

3 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 25 2 x 30

3 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

4 1 (MIMO) 25 2 x 30

4 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 20



303





5 1 (MIMO) 16 2 x 30

5 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

6 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 20

6** 1 (MIMO)** 16** 2 x 30**

NOTE





l LTE power consumption is calculated based on the 2 x 2 MIMO configuration. The LTE bandwidth is 10MHz.

Table 10-98 Power consumption (MRFUd operating in the 900 MHz frequency bandconfigured)

Cabinet

Mode Configuration OutputPower ofEachCarrier (W)


MaximumPowerConsumption (W)

BTS3900(Ver.C)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 620 715

S4/4/4 20 720 1040

S6/6/6 20 1000 1505

S8/8/8 20 1095 1825

UMTS3 x 1 20 510 570

3 x 2 20 585 750

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 945 1245

GUGSM S2/2/2 +UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

785 965



304

Cabinet




GSM S3/3/3 +UMTS 3 x 1

l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

835 1160


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

1065 1425

GL

GSM S2/2/2 + LTE3 x 10 MHz

l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1260 1635


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1320 1815


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1380 1995

BTS3900L(Ver.C)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 650 755

S4/4/4 20 800 1145

S6/6/6 20 1025 1610

S8/8/8 20 1130 1910

UMTS3 x 1 20 540 600

3 x 2 20 615 780

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 975 1275

GU


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

850 1045


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

895 1195


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

1075 1480

GL


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1290 1665


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1350 1845



305

Cabinet





l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1410 2025

BTS3900A(Ver.C)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 650 755

S4/4/4 20 800 1145

S6/6/6 20 1025 1610

S8/8/8 20 1130 1910

UMTS3 x 1 20 540 600

3 x 2 20 615 780

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 975 1275

GU


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

850 1045


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

895 1195


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

1075 1480

GL


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1290 1665


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1350 1845


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1410 2025



306

Table 10-99 Power consumption (MRFUd operating in the 1800 MHz frequency bandconfigured)

Cabinet




BTS3900(Ver.C)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 635 730

S4/4/4 20 735 1060

S6/6/6 20 1030 1540

S8/8/8 20 1130 1860

UMTS3 x 1 20 510 585

3 x 2 20 600 795

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 960 1275

GU


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

800 985


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

850 1180


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

1090 1455

GL


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1365 1755


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1410 1920


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1425 2070

BTS3900L(Ver.C)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 650 770

S4/4/4 20 800 1160

S6/6/6 20 1115 1640

S8/8/8 20 1145 1985

UMTS3 x 1 20 540 615

3 x 2 20 630 825

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 990 1305



307

Cabinet




GU


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

865 1060


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

910 1225


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

1075 1480

GL


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1395 1785


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1440 1950


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1455 2100

BTS3900A(Ver.C)(-48 V)

GSM

S2/2/2 20 650 770

S4/4/4 20 800 1160

S6/6/6 20 1115 1640

S8/8/8 20 1145 1985

UMTS3 x 1 20 540 615

3 x 2 20 630 825

LTE 3 x 10MHz 40 990 1305

GU


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

865 1060


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

910 1225


l GSM: 20l UMTS:

20

1075 1480



308

Cabinet




GL


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1395 1785


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1440 1950


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1455 2100


The following table lists the equipment specifications of an MRFUd.

Table 10-100 Equipment specifications of an MRFUd


MRFUd 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

12

Table 10-101 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an MRFUd.

NOTE



Table 10-101 Surge protection specifications of ports on an MRFUd

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA



309

Port UsageScenario



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an MRFUd.

Table 10-102 Specifications of CPRI ports on an MRFUd




MRFUd 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star or dual-star N/A

Antenna CapabilityThe following table provides the antenna capability of an MRFUd.

Table 10-103 Antenna capability of an MRFUd


MRFUd Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.9 MRFUe Technical SpecificationsUsing the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit TypeE (MRFUe) modules can work in different modes with different configurations.



310

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUe.

Table 10-104 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUe




Mode

MRFUe 900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880

RF SpecificationsTable 10-105 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an MRFUe.

NOTE







l The MRFUe that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies withthe EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard.

l The MRFUe that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards.



311

Table 10-105 RF specifications of an MRFUe

Type


Capacity



rSensitivity withOneAntenna



MRFUe

1T2R

GSM: 8TRXsUMTS: 4carriersLTE: 2carriers.Thebandwidth percarrier is1.4, 3, 5,10, 15, or20 MHz.

GSM:

l 900MHz:-113.7

l 1800MHz:-114.0

UMTS:

l 900MHz:-125.8

l 1800MHz:-126.1

LTE:

l 900MHz:-106.3

l 1800MHz:-106.6

GSM:l 900

MHz:-116.5

l 1800MHz:-116.8

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-128.6

l 1800MHz:-128.9

LTE:l 900

MHz:-109.1

l 1800MHz:-109.4

GSM:



UMTS:

l 900MHz:-131.3

l 1800MHz:-131.6

LTE:

l 900MHz:-111.8

l 1800MHz:-112.1

The MRFUesupports themaximumpowerconfiguration1 x 125 W.The typicalconfigurations are asfollows:l Output

power ofMRFUe(900/1800MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofMRFUe(900/1800MHz, GUMSR)

l Outputpower ofMRFUe(900/1800MHz, GLMSR)

Powerconsumption(MRFUeoperatingin the 1800MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



312

NOTE





l For the MRFUe working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output powerof each carrier on the MRFUe is 125 W; when the S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output powerof each carrier on the MRFUe is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W, 80 W, or 125 W is required, the relatedlicense must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimumshift-frequency keying (GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on thethe RF module when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the S4 through S8 configurationsis used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained.Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrieron the MRFUe.

Table 10-106 Output power of MRFUe (900/1800 MHz, single-mode)

Mode








GSM 1 0 0 80 80 0 0

1 0 0 125 (900MHz)

125 0 0

2 0 0 60 60 0 0

3 0 0 40 50 0 0

4 0 0 30 40 0 0

5 0 0 25 30 0 0

6 0 0 20 30 0 0

7 0 0 15 20 0 0

8 0 0 10 16 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 80 0



313

Mode








0 2 0 0 0 60 0

0 3 0 0 0 40 0

0 4 0 0 0 30 0

LTE 0 0 1 0 0 0 5/10/15/20 MHz:601.4/3MHz: 40

0 0 2 0 0 0 5/10/15/20 MHz:601.4/3MHz: 40

Table 10-107 Output power of MRFUe (900/1800 MHz, GU MSR)





GU 2 1 40 40

3 1 25 30

4 1 24 20

4 1 20 30

5 1 18 20

5 1 16 30

6 1 13 20

7 1 10 20

1 2 40 40

2 2 20 30

3 2 20 20



314





3 2 15 30

4 2 18 20

5 2 12 20

Table 10-108 Output power of MRFUe (900/1800 MHz, GL MSR)





GL 1 1 60 5/10/15/20MHz: 601.4/3 MHz: 40

2 1 40 40

3 1 25 30

3 1 20 40

4 1 24 20

4 1 20 30

5 1 20 20

5 1 16 30

6 1 13 20

7 1 10 20

NOTE





315

Table 10-109 Power consumption (MRFUe operating in the 1800 MHz frequency bandconfigured)


OutputPower ofEachCarrier(W)



BTS3900(Ver.C) (-48V)

GSM

S9/9/9 20 1715 2750

S10/10/10 20 1880 3035

S11/11/11 20 2000 3230

S12/12/12 20 2120 3425

BTS3900L(Ver.C) (-48V)

GSM

S9/9/9 20 1745 2780

S10/10/10 20 1910 3065

S11/11/11 20 2030 3260

S12/12/12 20 2150 3455

BTS3900A(Ver.C) (-48V)

GSM

S9/9/9 20 1745 2780

S10/10/10 20 1910 3065

S11/11/11 20 2030 3260

S12/12/12 20 2150 3455

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of an MRFUe.

Table 10-110 Equipment specifications of an MRFUe


MRFUe 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with thepanel)

12

Table 10-111 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an MRFUe.

NOTE





316

Table 10-111 Surge protection specifications of ports on an MRFUe

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an MRFUe.

Table 10-112 Specifications of CPRI ports on an MRFUe




MRFUe 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star or dual-star N/A

Antenna CapabilityThe following table provides the antenna capability of an MRFUe.



317

Table 10-113 Antenna capability of an MRFUe


MRFUe Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.10 CRFUd Technical SpecificationsAn CDMA & LTE radio frequency unit type D (CRFUd) works in frequency division duplex(FDD) mode.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an CRFUd.

Table 10-114 Modes and frequency bands supported by an CRFUd




CRFUd LTE AWS (band 4) 1710 to 1755 2110 to 2155

RF SpecificationsTable 10-115 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an CRFUd.

NOTE






318

Table 10-115 RF specifications of an CRFUd

Type TransmitandReceiveChannels

Capacity Receiver Sensitivity(dBm)

OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

CRFUd

2T2R Two carriers.The bandwidthper carrier is1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15,or 20 MHz; thetotal bandwidthbetween themaximumfrequency andthe minimumfrequency ofthe spectrumsfor two carriersdoes not exceed45 MHz.

-106.5 -109.3 The CRFUdsupports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2 x 60 W.For typicalconfigurations, see theOutputpower forthe CRFUd(LTE,AWS)table.

Powerconsumption(CRFUdoperatingin AWSfrequencybandconfigured)

Table 10-116 Output power for the CRFUd (LTE, AWS)


LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

1 (MIMO) 2 x 60

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30

2 (MIMO) l carrier 1: 2 x 20l carrier 2: 2 x 40







319

Table 10-117 Power consumption (CRFUd configured)

Cabinet Configuration

OutputPower ofEach Carrier(W)



BTS3900(Ver.C) (-48V)

3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1190 1595


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1220 1625


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1220 1625

BTS3900AL(Ver.A) (-48V)

3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1235 1640


The following table describes the equipment specifications of the CRFUd.

Table 10-118 Equipment specifications of an CRFUd

Type Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight (kg)

CRFUd 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (withthe panel)

12

Table 10-119 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an CRFUd.

NOTE



Table 10-119 Surge protection specifications of ports on an CRFUd

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)



320

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A

Monitoringport


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an CRFUd.

Table 10-120 Specifications of CPRI ports on an CRFUd




CRFUd 2 1.25, 2.5, or 4.9 Star N/A

Antenna CapabilityThe following table provides antenna capability of an CRFUd.

Table 10-121 Antenna capability of an CRFUd


CRFUd Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1



321

NOTE


10.2.11 LRFU Technical SpecificationsAn LTE radio frequency unit (LRFU) works in frequency division duplex (FDD) mode.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an LRFU.

Table 10-122 Modes and frequency bands supported by an LRFU




LRFU LTE 2600 (band 7) Band C: 2500 to2520

Band C: 2620 to2640

Band D: 2510 to2560

Band D: 2630 to2680

Band E: 2550 to2570

Band E: 2670 to2690

RF SpecificationsTable 10-123 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an LRFU.

NOTE






322

Table 10-123 RF specifications of an LRFU

Type


Capacity ReceiverSensitivity(dBm)

OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

LRFU

2T2R One carrier with abandwidth of 5,10, 15, or 20MHz.

-105.8 -108.6 The LRFUsupports themaximumpowerconfiguration2 x 40 W.

Powerconsumption(LRFUoperating in2600 MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

Table 10-124 Power consumption (LRFU configured)





BTS3900(Ver.C) (-48V)

3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 875 1151


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 897 1174


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 875 1151


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 928 1204


The following table describes the equipment specifications of the LRFU.

Table 10-125 Equipment specifications of an LRFU


LRFU 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (withthe panel)

12



323

Table 10-126 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an LRFU.

NOTE



Table 10-126 Surge protection specifications of ports on an LRFU

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA

Monitoringport


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an LRFU.

Table 10-127 Specifications of CPRI ports on an LRFU




LRFU 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star N/A

Antenna Capability

The following table provides antenna capability of an LRFU.



324

Table 10-128 Antenna capability of an LRFU


LRFU Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.2.12 LRFUe Technical SpecificationsAn LTE radio frequency unit type E (LRFUe) works in frequency division duplex (FDD) mode.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an LRFUe.

Table 10-129 Modes and frequency bands supported by an LRFUe




LRFUe LTE DD 800 (band 20) 832 to 862 791 to 821

RF SpecificationsTable 10-130 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an LRFUe.

NOTE






325

Table 10-130 RF specifications of an LRFUe



OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

LRFUe

2T2R

Two carriers.The bandwidthper carrier is 5,10, 15, or 20MHz; the totalbandwidthbetween themaximumfrequency andthe minimumfrequency of thespectrums fortwo carriers doesnot exceed 30MHz.

-106.3 -109.1 The LRFUesupports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2 x 60W. Fortypicalconfigurations, see theOutputpower forthe LRFUe(LTE, DD800MHz)table.

Powerconsumption (LRFUeoperatingin DD 800MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

Table 10-131 Output power for the LRFUe (LTE, DD 800 MHz)


LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 20

1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

1 (MIMO) 2 x 60

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30



326

Table 10-132 Power consumption (LRFUe configured)





BTS3900(Ver.C) (-48V)

3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1117 1483


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1147 1513


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1147 1513


3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1162 1528


The following table describes the equipment specifications of the LRFUe.

Table 10-133 Equipment specifications of an LRFUe


LRFUe 9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (withthe panel)

12

Table 10-134 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an LRFUe.

NOTE



Table 10-134 Surge protection specifications of ports on an LRFUe

Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA



327

Port UsageScenario


Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA

Monitoringport


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an LRFUe.

Table 10-135 Specifications of CPRI ports on an LRFUe




LRFUe 2 1.25, 2.5, or 4.9 Star N/A

Antenna CapabilityThe following table provides antenna capability of an LRFUe.

Table 10-136 Antenna capability of an LRFUe


LRFUe Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUsThis section provides technical specifications of RRUs, including supported modes, frequencybands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.



328

10.3.1 RRU3004 Technical SpecificationsThe RRU3004 is a double-transceiver Remote Radio Unit, which supports a maximum of twocarriers.

Supported Modes and Frequency BandsThe following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3004.

Table 10-137 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3004




RRU3004 GSM 900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880

RF SpecificationsTable 10-138 lists RF specifications of an RRU3004.

NOTE

ATBR in the RX and TX Channels column indicates that this RF module has A transmit channels and B receivechannels.



329

Table 10-138 RF specifications of an RRU3004


Capacity


Output Power PowerConsumption



RRU3004

2T2R 2 TRXs -113.0 -115.8 l RRU3004(900 MHz)outputpower

l RRU3004(1800 MHz)outputpower

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3004operatingin 900MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3004operatingin1800MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



330

NOTE

Two RRU3004 modules are required when three or four carriers are configured.

Table 10-139 RRU3004 (900 MHz) output power


1 30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

2 30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

3 15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

4 15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)

1 (PBT) 40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

Table 10-140 RRU3004 (1800 MHz) output power


1 20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

2 20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

3 10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)

4 10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)

1 (PBT) 30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)

NOTE


l The typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 30%.


l The following tables use the power consumption of DBS3900 -48 V DC as an example.

Table 10-141 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3004 operating in 900 MHz frequency bandconfigured)

Configuration Typical Power Consumption(W)


S2/2/2, TOC = 30 W 480 700



331

Table 10-142 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3004 operating in 1800 MHz frequency bandconfigured)



S2/2/2, TOC = 20 W 480 720

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists equipment specifications of an RRU3004.

Table 10-143 Equipment specifications of an RRU3004

Type Input PowerSpecifications

Dimensions (H xW x D)

Weight (kg)

RRU3004 -48 V DC, voltagerange: -57 V DC to-36 V DC

l 485 mm x 380mm x 130 mm(with the housing)

l 480 mm x 356mm x 100 mm(without thehousing)

l 17 (with thehousing)

l 15 (without thehousing)

The following table lists environmental specifications of an RRU3004.

Table 10-144 Environmental specifications of an RRU3004

Type OperatingTemperature

RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3004 l Withoutsolarradiation:-40°C to+50°C

l With solarradiation:-40°C to+45°C

5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa

The following table lists compliance standards of an RRU3004.



332

Table 10-145 Compliance standards of an RRU3004

Type OperatingEnvironment

Anti-SeismicPerformance

Protection Rating

RRU3004 l 3GPP TS 45.005l ETSI EN

300019-1-4V2.1.2 (2003-04)Class 4.1: "Non-weatherprotectedlocations"

NEBS GR63 zone4 IP65

Table 10-146 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3004.

NOTE



Table 10-146 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3004

Port UsageScenario


DC powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

AC powersupply port

Applicableto scenarioswhereGRFUs areinstalledindoors


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

5 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Applicableto scenarioswhere


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)



333

Port UsageScenario


GRFUs areinstalledoutdoors

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

40 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A

RET port Applicableto allscenarios

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Dry contactor RS485alarm port


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

250 A

Commonmode

250 A

Port on alocal powermonitoringdevice andan alarm port

Applicableto thescenariowherebatteriesundermonitoringand RRUsare installedback toback or thescenariowhere thedistancebetweenthem iswithin 1 m.

Surge 250 A



334


The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an RRU3004.

Table 10-147 Specifications of CPRI ports on an RRU3004





RRU3004 2 1.25 Star, chain,or ring

6 40

Antenna Capability

The following table lists antenna capability of an RRU3004.

Table 10-148 Antenna capability of an RRU3004


RRU3004 Not supported AISG1.1

NOTE

l An external bridge tap (BT) is required if an RRU3004 needs to be configured with a tower-mountedamplifier (TMA).


10.3.2 RRU3008 Technical SpecificationsThe RRU3008 is a multi-carrier Remote Radio Unit (RRU) applicable to the GSM network,which supports a maximum of eight carriers.


The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3008.





RRU3008V1

GSM 850 824 to 849 869 to 894

900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960

880 to 905 925 to 950



335




900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

900 CMCC 885 to 910 930 to 955

1800 1710 to 1755 1805 to 1850

1740 to 1785 1835 to 1880

1900 1850 to 1890 1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910 1950 to 1990

RRU3008V2

GSM 900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

900 CMCC 885 to 910 930 to 955

RF SpecificationsTable 10-150 lists RF specifications of an RRU3008.

NOTE





336



Capacity





RRU3008 V1

2T2R 8 TRXs -113.0 -115.8 The RRU3008V1 supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 40 W. Fortypicalconfigurations,see thetableRRU3008V1(900/850/1800/1900 MHz)output power.

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3008V1operatingin900/1800MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3008V1operatingin850/1900MHzfrequencyband



337


Capacity





configured)

RRU3008 V2

2T2R 8 TRXs l 900 MHzEGSM:-113.3

l 900 MHzPGSM/900 MHzCMCC:-113.5


l 900 MHzPGSM/900 MHzCMCC:-116.3

The RRU3008V2 supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 40 W. Fortypicalconfigurations,see thetableRRU3008V2 (900 MHz)output power.

DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3008 V2operating in 900MHzfrequency bandconfigured)

Table 10-151 RRU3008 V1 (900/850/1800/1900 MHz) output power

NumberofCarriers


BCCH Carrier Output Power(Power Sharing Enabled)





5 12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK) 12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)

6 10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK) 12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)

7 7.0 W (GMSK)/4.6 W (8PSK) 8.0 W (GMSK)/5.3 W (8PSK)

8 5.5 W (GMSK)/3.6 W (8PSK) 7.0 W (GMSK)/4.6 W (8PSK)



338

NOTE

RRU3008 V2 (GSM, 900MHz):

l After design optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimum shift-frequencykeying (GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3008V2 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used.

l When the S7 or S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 EnhancedEDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemescannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3008 V2.

l RF standard: EN 301 502 V9.2.1.

Table 10-152 RRU3008 V2 (900 MHz) output power

NumberofCarriers


BCCH Carrier Output Power(Power Sharing Enabled)









NOTE

l The typical power consumption is measured with a 30% load and power control and DTX are enabled.The maximum power consumption is reached when the base station works with 100% load.


Table 10-153 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3008 V1 operating in 900/1800 MHzfrequency band configured)



S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W 720 1260

S6/6/6, TOC = 12 W 640 1180



339

Table 10-154 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3008 V1 operating in 850/1900 MHzfrequency band configured)



S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W 700 1220

S6/6/6, TOC = 12 W 620 1130

Table 10-155 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3008 V2 operating in 900 MHz frequencyband configured)



S4/4/4, TOC = 20 W 640 1130

S6/6/6, TOC = 15 W 630 1270

Engineering SpecificationsTable 10-156 lists equipment specifications of an RRU3008.

Table 10-156 Equipment specifications

Type Input PowerSpecifications

Dimensions (H xW x D)

Weight (kg)

RRU3008 -48 V DC, voltagerange: -57 V DC to-36 V DC

l 485 mm x 380mm x 170 mm(with the housing)


l 25 (with thehousing)

l 23 (without thehousing)




340



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3008 V1 l Withoutsolarradiation:-40°C to+50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa

RRU3008 V2 l Withoutsolarradiation:-40°C to+55°C


The following table lists compliance standards of an RRU3008.

Table 10-158 Compliance standards of an RRU3008



Protection Rating




Table 10-159 and Table 10-160 list the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3008.

NOTE





341

Table 10-159 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3008 V1

Port UsageScenario


DC powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

AC powersupply port

Applicableto scenarioswhereGRFUs areinstalledindoors


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

5 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Applicableto thescenariowhereRRU3008V2 modulesareconfiguredremotely orplacedoutdoors


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

40 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA



342

Port UsageScenario


Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

250 A

Commonmode

250 A



Surge 250 A

Table 10-160 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3008 V2

Port UsageScenario


DC powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

AC powersupply port

Applicableto scenarioswhereGRFUs are


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)



343

Port UsageScenario


installedindoors

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

5 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Applicableto scenarioswhereGRFUs areinstalledoutdoors


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

40 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



344

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an RRU3008.






RRU3008V1

2 l 850MHz/1900MHz:1.25

l 1800MHz:1.25 or2.5

Star, chain,or ring

6 40

RRU3008V2

2 1.25 or 2.5

Antenna CapabilityThe following table lists antenna capability of an RRU3008.



345



RRU3008 V1 Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1


NOTE


10.3.3 RRU3804 Technical SpecificationsAn RRU3804, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of four carriers.






RRU3804 (DC) UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

1900 1850 to 1910 1930 to 1990

AWS 1710 to 1755 2110 to 2155

850 824 to 849 869 to 894

835 to 849 880 to 894

RRU3804 (AC) 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

850 824 to 849 869 to 894

RF SpecificationsTable 10-164 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3804.



346

NOTE

l ATBR in the RX and TX Channels column indicates that this RF module has A transmit channelsand B receive channels.

l C x D W in the Output Power column indicates that this RF module is configured with C transmitchannels and the maximum output power of each transmit channel is D W.

l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full bandat the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does notexceed 0.001.


l Maximum output power = Maximum output power of the PA - Internal loss. The maximum outputpower is measured at the antenna port.



347

Table 10-164 RRU3804 RF specifications


Capacity





ReceiverSensitivitywithFourAntennas

RRU3804

1T2R 4 carriers l 2100MHzorAWS:-125.8

l 1900MHz:-125.3

l 850MHz:-125.6

l 2100MHzorAWS:-128.6

l 1900MHz:-128.1

l 850MHz:-128.4

l 2100MHzorAWS:-131.3

l 1900MHz:-130.8

l 850MHz:-131.1

TheRRU3804supportsthemaximum powerconfiguration 1 x60 W.Fortypicalconfigurations,see theOutputpowerfor theRRU3804(UMTS,850MHz/AWS/1900MHz/2100MHz)table.

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3804(DC)configured)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3804(AC)operatingin the2100MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

l DBS3900



348


Capacity






powerconsumption(RRU3804(AC)operatingin the850MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

l BTS3900Cpowerconsumption(RRU3804(DC)configured)



349

Table 10-165 Output power for the RRU3804 (UMTS, 850 MHz/AWS/1900 MHz/2100 MHz)


UMTS 1 60

2 30

3 20

4 15

NOTE

In the Table 10-166, Table 10-167, and Table 10-168:





l In 3 x 4 configuration, antenna port output power per carrier is 15 W in the calculation of typical andmaximum power consumption values.

Table 10-166 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3804 (DC) configured)

Configuration(Sector xCarrier)





24 Ah 50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 20 390 480 2.4 5.7 11.3

3 x 2 20 480 650 1.7 4.3 9.0

3 x 3 20 630 860 1.2 3.1 6.7

3 x 4 15 630 860 1.2 3.1 6.7

Table 10-167 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3804 (AC) operating in the 2100 MHzfrequency band configured)

Configuration(Sector x Carrier)

Output Power perCarrier (W)

Typical PowerConsumption (W)


3 x 1 20 435 540

3 x 2 20 555 740

3 x 3 20 720 980



350





3 x 4 15 720 980

Table 10-168 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3804 (AC) operating in the 850 MHzfrequency band configured)





3 x 1 20 450 560

3 x 2 20 575 780

3 x 3 20 750 1030

3 x 4 15 750 1030

NOTE

In the following table:



l One WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 10-169 BTS3900C power consumption (RRU3804 (DC) configured)






24 Ah 50 Ah 92 Ah

1 x 1 20 190 240 5.5 12.6 23.2

1 x 2 20 220 290 4.5 10.9 20.0

1 x 3 20 260 350 3.8 9.0 16.9

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3804.



351


Type Input Power Dimensions (H xW x D)

Weight

RRU3804 (DC) -48 V DC; voltagerange: -57 V DC to-36 V DC


l 485 mm x 285mm x 170 mm(with thehousing)

l 15 kg (without thehousing)

l 17 kg (with thehousing)

RRU3804 (AC) l 200 V AC to 240V AC single-phase; voltagerange: 176 V ACto 290 V AC

l 100/200 V AC to120/240 V ACdual-phase;voltage range:90/180 V AC to135/270 V AC



l 20.5 kg (withoutthe housing)

l 22.5 kg (with thehousing)

The following table lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3804.



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3804 (DC) l With 1120W/m2 solarradiation:-40°C to+50°C

l Withoutsolarradiation:-40°C to+55°C

5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa

RRU3804 (AC)

The following table lists the compliance standards for an RRU3804.



352

Table 10-172 Compliance standards for an RRU3804


Anti-seismicPerformance

Protection Rating

RRU3804 (DC) l 3GPP TS 25.141l ETSI EN



RRU3804 (AC) IP55


NOTE




Port UsageScenario


DC powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

AC powersupply port

Indoorapplications


2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

5 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Outdoorapplications


2 kV (1.2/50 µs)



353

Port UsageScenario


Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

40 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Local powermonitoringand alarmport

Monitoredpower andRRUs areinstalled inback-to-back modeor within 1m.

Surge 250 A




354







l When therate at theCPRIport is1.25Gbit/s: 4

l When therate at theCPRIport is 2.5Gbit/s: 8

40

Antenna Capability

The following table lists the antenna capability of an RRU3804.



RRU3804 Supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE


10.3.4 RRU3805 Technical SpecificationsAn RRU3805, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of three carriers.







RRU3805 UMTS 1800 1749.9 to1764.9

1844.9 to 1859.9



355




1900 1850 to 1890 1930 to 1970

1870 to 1910 1950 to 1990

850 835 to 849 880 to 894


NOTE







356

Table 10-177 RF Specifications


Capacity






RRU3805

2T2R l 1800MHz:3carriers

l 850MHz/1900MHz:2carriers

l 1800MHz:-125.3

l 850MHz/1900MHz:-125.2

l 1800MHz:-128.1

l 850MHz/1900MHz:-128.0

l 1800MHz:-130.8

l 850MHz/1900MHz:-130.7

TheRRU3805supportsconfigurations ofsingle-output,multiple-inputmultiple-output(MIMO), or thecombination ofthe two.l 1800

MHz:supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration is2 x60W.Fortypicalconfigurat

l DBS3900powerconsumption(1800MHzRRU3805withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(1800MHzRRU3805withMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(1900MHz/



357


Capacity






ions,seethetableOutputpower fortheRRU3805(UMTS,1800MHz).

l 1900MHz/850MHz:supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 30W.Fortypicalconfigurations,

850MHzRRU3805withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(1900MHz/850MHzRRU3805withMIMO)



358


Capacity






seethetableOutputpower fortheRRU3805(UMTS,850MHz/1900MHz).

Table 10-178 Output power for the RRU3805 (UMTS, 1800 MHz)


UMTS 1 60


60


30 + 60

1 (MIMO) 2 x 60

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30

3 (MIMO) 2 x 20



359

Table 10-179 Output power for the RRU3805 (UMTS, 850 MHz/1900 MHz)


UMTS 1 40


1 (MIMO) 2 x 30

2 (MIMO) 2 x 15

Table 10-180 DBS3900 power consumption (1800 MHz RRU3805 without MIMO)


Typical PowerConsumption(W)



50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 540 630 3.3 6

3 x 2 805 1045 2 3.6

3 x 3 1000 1300 1.6 2.9

Table 10-181 DBS3900 power consumption (1800 MHz RRU3805 with MIMO)





50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 735 975 2.1 3.9

3 x 2 1045 1405 1.5 2.7



360

Table 10-182 DBS3900 power consumption (1900 MHz/850 MHz RRU3805 without MIMO)





50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 540 615 3.3 6.1

3 x 2 835 985 2.1 3.8

Table 10-183 DBS3900 power consumption (1900 MHz/850 MHz RRU3805 with MIMO)





50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 540 615 3.3 6.1

3 x 2 835 985 2.1 3.8




Weight

RRU3805 l 1800 MHz: -48 VDC; voltagerange: -57 V DCto -36 V DC

l 1900 MHz or 850MHz: -48 V DC;voltage range: -57V DC to -38.4 VDC








361



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3805 l With 1120W/m2 solarradiation:-40°C to+45°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating




Surge Protection SpecificationsTable 10-187 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3805.

NOTE





362


Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A




363






RRU3805 2 l 850/1900MHz:1.25

l 1800MHz:1.25/2.5

Star, chain,or ring



40

Antenna Capability





NOTE









RRU3806 UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170



364


NOTE







365



Capacity






RRU3806

1T2R 4 carriers -125.8 -128.6 -131.3 TheRRU3806supportsthemaximum powerconfiguration 1 x80 W.Fortypicalconfigurations,see theOutputpowerfor theRRU3806(UMTS,2100MHz)table.

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3806(DC)configured)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3806(AC)configured)

l BTS3900Cpowerconsumption(RRU3806



366


Capacity






(DC)configured)



UMTS 1 80

2 40

3 26

4 20

NOTE

In the Table 10-193 and Table 10-194:







367

Table 10-193 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3806 (DC) configured)

Configuration (Sectorx Carrier)

OutputPower perCarrier (W)



Power Backup DurationEstimated Based onTypical PowerConsumption of NewBatteries (Hours)

50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 20 400 480 5.5 11

3 x 2 20 490 650 4.2 8.8

3 x 3 20 630 860 3.16 6.6

3 x 4 20 710 1030 2.8 5.7

Table 10-194 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3806 (AC) configured)





3 x 1 20 435 540

3 x 2 20 555 740

3 x 3 20 690 950

3 x 4 20 780 1130

NOTE





Table 10-195 BTS3900C power consumption (RRU3806 (DC) configured)






50 Ah 92 Ah

1 x 1 20 190 240 12.6 23.2



368






50 Ah 92 Ah

1 x 2 20 220 290 10.9 20.0

1 x 3 20 260 350 9.0 16.9




Weight

RRU3806 (DC) -48 V DC; voltagerange: -57 V DC to-36 V DC





RRU3806 (AC) l 200 V AC to 240V AC single-phase; voltagerange: 176 V ACto 290 V AC









369



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3806 (DC) l With 1120W/m2 solarradiation:-40°C to+50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa

RRU3806 (AC)





Protection Rating

RRU3806 (DC) l 3GPP TS 25.141l ETSI EN



RRU3806 (AC) IP55


NOTE




Port UsageScenario


DC powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)



370

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

AC powersupply port

Indoorapplications


2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

5 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Outdoorapplications


2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

40 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



371

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A










40

Antenna CapabilityThe following table lists the antenna capability of an RRU3806.






372

NOTE


10.3.6 RRU3808 Technical SpecificationsThe RRU3808 is a type of radio remote unit. An RRU3808 working in UMTS mode supports amaximum of four UMTS carriers. If it works in LTE mode, it supports only one LTE carrier.






Mode

RRU3808 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170 UMTS

AWS 1710 to 1755 2110 to 2155 UMTS and LTE


NOTE








373



Capacity






RRU3808

2T2R UMTS:4 carriersLTE: 1carrierwith abandwidth of:l 1.4,

3, 5,10,15, or20MHzontheAWSband

l 5, 10,15, or20MHzonthe2100MHzband

UMTS:-125.8LTE:-106.5

UMTS:-128.6LTE:-109.3

UMTS:-131.3LTE:-112.0

Themaximum powerconfiguration is 2x 40 W.l UMT

S:supportsconfigurations ofsingle-output,multiple-inputmultiple-output(MIMO),or thecombination ofthetwo,andunevenpowerconfi

UMTS:

l DBS3900powerconsumption(2100MHzUMTSRRU3808withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(2100MHzUMTSRRU3808withMIMO)

l DBS3900power



374


Capacity






gurations.

– Fortypicalconfigurationsinsingle-outputorMIMOscenarios,seethetab

consumption(AWSUMTSRRU3808withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(AWSUMTSRRU3808withMIMO)

LTE:DBS3900 powerconsumption(AWSLTERRU3808 )



375


Capacity






leOutputpowerfortheRRU3808(UMTS,AWS/2100MHz).

– Fortypicalconf



376


Capacity






igurationsinhybridconfigurationscenarios,seethetableCarriercombinationssu



377


Capacity






pportedbyRRU3808(UMTS)inhybridconfigurations.Inthisscenario,one



378


Capacity






RRU3808supportsamaximumoffourcarriers.Eachtransmitchannelsupports



379


Capacity






amaximumoffourcarriersandthemaximumoutputpowerofeachtransmitch



380


Capacity






annelis40W.

l LTE:supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 2 x40 W.

Table 10-204 Output power for the RRU3808 (UMTS, AWS/2100 MHz)



UMTS 1 40


40

3 13


20

1 (MIMO) 2 x 40



381



2 (MIMO) 2 x 20

3 (MIMO) 2 x 13

4 (MIMO) 2 x 10

Table 10-205 Carrier combinations supported by RRU3808 (UMTS) in hybrid configurations


1 3

2 3

3 1

NOTE






Table 10-206 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz UMTS RRU3808 without MIMO)

Mode Configuration(Sector xCarrier)




Power BackupDuration EstimatedBased on TypicalPower Consumptionof New Batteries(Hours)

50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 20 410 490 5.2 10.7

3 x 2 20 510 640 4 8.5

3 x 3 20 740 950 2.6 5.5

3 x 4 20 800 1060 2.4 4.9



382

NOTE




l In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 10-207 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz UMTS RRU3808 with MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 2 x 10 460 570 4.5 9.4

3 x 2 2 x 10 580 730 3.6 7.2

3 x 3 2 x 10 730 950 2.6 5.6

3 x 4 2 x 10 800 1060 2.4 4.9

NOTE








383

Table 10-208 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS UMTS RRU3808 without MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 20 410 482 5.2 10.8

3 x 2 20 518 632 4 8.4

3 x 3 20 721 931 2.7 5.6

3 x 4 20 835 1051 2.3 4.7

NOTE




l In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Table 10-209 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS UMTS RRU3808 with MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 2 x 10 470 572 4.4 9.2

3 x 2 2 x 10 628 766 3.2 6.7

3 x 3 2 x 10 774 975 2.5 5.1

3 x 4 2 x 10 890 1109 2.1 4.3



384

Table 10-210 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS LTE RRU3808)


Output Powerper Carrier(W)



LTE 3 x 1 2 x 40 824 1067


Table 10-211 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3808.



Weight

RRU3808 -48 V DC; voltagerange: -57 V DC to-36 V DC








RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure


l With solarradiatio: -40°C to +50°C

5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa




385




Protection Rating

RRU3808 l 3GPP TS 25.141l 3GPP TS 36.141l 3GPP TS 37.141l ETSI EN




NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



386




387







UMTS:l When the

rate at theCPRIport is1.25Gbit/s: 4


LTE:l When the

rate at theCPRIport is1.25Gbit/s:Cascading is notsupported.

l When therate at theCPRIport is 2.5Gbit/s:

– Threelevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthis lessthanorequal

UMTS: 40LTE:l When the

LBBPcorLBBPd1isconfigured: 20

l When theLBBPd3isconfigured:

– Cellquantity ≤3: 40





388





to 5MHz.

– Twolevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthis 10MHz.

– Cascadingis notrecommended ifthecellbandwidthisgreater thanorequalto 15MHz.







389

NOTE








RRU3824 UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170


NOTE







390



Capacity






RRU3824


l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3824configured)

l BTS3900Cpowerconsumption(RRU3824configured)



UMTS 1 60

2 30

3 20



391


4 15

NOTE






l In 3 x 4 configuration, antenna port output power per carrier is 15 W in the calculation of typical andmaximum power consumption values.

Table 10-220 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3824 configured)






24 Ah 50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 20 390 480 2.4 5.7 11.3

3 x 2 20 480 650 1.7 4.3 9.0

3 x 3 20 630 860 1.2 3.1 6.7

3 x 4 15 630 860 1.2 3.1 6.7

NOTE







392

Table 10-221 BTS3900C power consumption (RRU3824 configured)




Maximum PowerConsumption(W)

Power Backup Duration EstimatedBased on Typical PowerConsumption of New Batteries(Hours)

24 Ah 50 Ah 92 Ah

1 x 1 20 190 240 5.5 12.6 23.2

1 x 2 20 220 290 4.5 10.9 20.0

1 x 3 20 260 350 3.8 9.0 16.9

Engineering SpecificationsThe Table 10-222 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3824.

NOTE

RRU3824 does not have the housing by default.



Weight

RRU3824 -48 V DC; voltagerange: -57 V DC to-36 V DCNOTE

The RRU3824supports ACapplications afterbeing configured withan AC/DC powermodule. For details,see the AC/DC PowerModule User Guide.

400 mm x 300 mm x100 mm (without thehousing)

14 kg (without thehousing)




393



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure


l Withoutsolarradiatio: -40°C to +55°C

5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)



394

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A




395









40

Antenna Capability





NOTE









RRU3826 UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170



396


NOTE







397



Capacity






RRU3826


l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3826configured)

l BTS3900Cpowerconsumption(RRU3826configured)



UMTS 1 80

2 40

3 26



398


4 20

NOTE












50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 20 400 480 5.5 11

3 x 2 20 490 650 4.2 8.8

3 x 3 20 630 860 3.16 6.6

3 x 4 20 710 1030 2.8 5.7

NOTE







399

Table 10-232 BTS3900C power consumption (RRU3826 configured)






50 Ah 92 Ah

1 x 1 20 190 240 12.6 23.2

1 x 2 20 220 290 10.9 20.0

1 x 3 20 260 350 9.0 16.9

Engineering SpecificationsThe Table 10-233 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3826.

NOTE




Weight








400



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure



5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)



401

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A




402









40

Antenna Capability





NOTE


10.3.9 RRU3828 Technical SpecificationsAn RRU3828, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of six carriers.







RRU3828 UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170



403


NOTE







404



Capacity






RRU3828

2T2R l WithMIMO: 4carriers


-126.1 -128.9 -131.6 TheRRU3828supportsthemaximum powerconfiguration 2 x40 W,configurations ofsingle-output,MIMO,or thecombination of thetwo, andunevenpowerconfigurations.l For

typicalconfigurations insingle-output orMIMOscenarios,see

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3828withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3828withMIMO)



405


Capacity






thetableOutputpower fortheRRU3828(UMTS,2100MHz).

l Fortypicalconfigurations inhybridconfigurationscenarios,seethetableCarriercombinationssupportedbyRRU



406


Capacity






3828inhybridconfigurations.Inthisscenario,oneRRU3828supports amaximumof sixcarriers.Eachtransmitchannelsupports amaximumoffourcarriers andthemaximumoutputpowe



407


Capacity






r ofeachtransmitchannel is40 W.


Mode Total Number of Carriers Output Power per Carrier (W)

UMTS 1 40


3 13



1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 20

3 (MIMO) 2 x 13

4 (MIMO) 2 x 10

Table 10-242 Carrier combinations supported by RRU3828 in hybrid configurations


1 5

2 4



408


3 2

NOTE






Table 10-243 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3828 without MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 20 421 493 5.1 10.5

3 x 2 20 520 658 4 8.3

3 x 3 20 785 977 2.5 5

3 x 4 20 854 1109 2.2 4.5

NOTE




l In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

l In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.



409

Table 10-244 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3828 with MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 2 x 10 535 604 3.9 8.1

3 x 2 2 x 10 689 824 2.9 5.9

3 x 3 2 x 10 864 1053 2.1 4.4

3 x 4 2 x 10 1011 1266 1.7 3.8




Weight










410



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure



5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)



411

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A




412









40

Antenna Capability





NOTE









RRU3829 UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170



413


NOTE






414



Capacity






RRU3829





l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3829withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3829withMIMO)



415


Capacity










416


Capacity









417


Capacity









UMTS 1 60


60

3 20


30


1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30

3 (MIMO) 2 x 20

4 (MIMO) 2 x 15



418



1 5

2 4

3 2

NOTE





Table 10-255 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3829 without MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 20 454 529 4.7 9.5

3 x 2 20 550 691 3.8 7.9

NOTE








419

Table 10-256 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3829 with MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 2 20 + 20 932 1214 2.0 4.1

3 x 3 20 + 20 1152 1557 1.5 3.2

Equipment SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3829.



Weight










420



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure



5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)



421

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A




422









40

Antenna Capability





NOTE


10.3.11 RRU3832 Technical SpecificationsThe RRU3832 is a type of radio remote unit. An RRU3832 working in UMTS mode supports amaximum of six UMTS carriers. If it works in LTE mode, it supports two LTE carriers.







Mode

RRU3832 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170 UMTS



423




Mode

AWS 1710 to 1755 2110 to 2155 UMTS, LTE,and UL


NOTE








424



Capacity






RRU3832

2T4R UMTS:



LTE: 2carriers.Thebandwidth percarrier is5, 10, 15,or 20MHz.The totalbandwidthbetweenthemaximumfrequency and theminimumfrequency of twocarrierscannotexceed60 MHz.

UMTS:-126.1LTE:-106.5

UMTS:-128.9LTE:-109.3

UMTS:-131.6LTE:-112.0

Themaximum powerconfiguration is 2x 60 W.l UMT

S:supportsconfigurations ofsingle-output,MIMO, orthecombination ofthetwo,andunevenpowerconfigurations.

– Fortypi

UMTS:

l DBS3900powerconsumption(2100MHzUMTSRRU3832withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(2100MHzUMTSRRU3832withMIMO)

LTE:DBS3900 powerconsum



425


Capacity






calconfigurationsinsingle-outputorMIMOscenarios,seethetableOutputp

ption(AWSLTERRU3832)



426


Capacity






owerfortheRRU3832(UMTS,AWS/2100MHz).

– Fortypicalconfigurationsin



427


Capacity






hybridconfigurationscenarios,seethetableCarriercombinationssupportedb



428


Capacity






yRRU3832inhybridconfigurations.Inthisscenario,oneRRU3832supportsam



429


Capacity






aximumofsixcarriers.Eachtransmitchannelsupportsamaximumoffourca



430


Capacity






rriersandthemaximumoutputpowerofeachtransmitchannelis60W.

l LTE:Fortypical



431


Capacity






configurations,seethetableOutputpower fortheRRU3832(LTE,AWS).

l UL:Fortypicalconfigurations,seethetableOutputpower fortheRRU3832(UL,AWS).



432

Table 10-265 Output power for the RRU3832 (UMTS, AWS/2100 MHz)



UMTS 1 60


3 20



1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30

3 (MIMO) 2 x 20

4 (MIMO) 2 x 15



1 5

2 4

3 2

Table 10-267 Output power for the RRU3832 (LTE, AWS)

Mode Total Number of LTECarriers

Output Power per LTECarrier (W)

LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 20

1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

1 (MIMO) 2 x 60

2 (MIMO) 2 x 20

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30

2 (MIMO) l Carrier1: 2 x 20l Carrier2: 2 x 40



433



2 (MIMO) l Carrier1: 2 x 15l Carrier2: 2 x 45

Table 10-268 Output power for the RRU3832 (UL, AWS)

Mode Total Numberof UMTSCarriers

TotalNumber ofLTE Carriers

Output Powerper UMTSCarrier (W)

Output Powerper LTECarrier (W)

UMTS + LTE 1 (MIMO) 1 (MIMO) 2 x 20 2 x 40

1 (MIMO) 1 (MIMO) 2 x 30 2 x 30

1 (MIMO) 1 (MIMO) 2 x 40 2 x 20

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

1 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) Configured intwo PAs: 20

2 x 40


2 x 30


2 x 20


2 x 20


2 x 20

1 + 1 (MIMO) 1 (MIMO) Configured intwo PAs: 20

2 x 20

NOTE








434

Table 10-269 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz UMTS RRU3832 without MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3x1 20 500 560 4.1 8.6

3x2 20 560 695 3.6 7.7

3x3 20 695 860 2.8 5.8

3x4 20 845 1085 2.1 4.4

NOTE







Table 10-270 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz UMTS RRU3832 with MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 20 + 20 665 785 3.0 6.1

3 x 2 20 + 20 845 1070 2.1 4.4

3 x 3 20 + 20 1040 1370 1.6 3.6



435

Table 10-271 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS LTE RRU3832)


Output Powerper Carrier(W)



LTE 3 x 1 2 x 60 1004 1274

Equipment SpecificationsTable 10-272 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3832.

NOTE




Weight








436



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure



5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating

RRU3832 l 3GPP TS 25.141l 3GPP TS 36.141l ETSI EN




NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)



437

Port UsageScenario


Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A




438






RRU3832 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,ring, or dual-star

UMTS:l When the

rate at theCPRIport is1.25Gbit/s: 4

l When therate at theCPRIport is 2.5Gbit/s or4.9 Gbit/s: 8

LTE:l When the

rate at theCPRIport is1.25Gbit/s:Cascading is notsupported.


– Threelevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthis lessthanor

UMTS: 40LTE:l When the

LBBPcorLBBPd1isconfigured: 20





UL: 40



439





equalto 5MHz.




– Fourlevelsaresupported ifthecellband



440





widthis lessthanorequalto 10MHz.

– Twolevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthisgreater thanorequalto 15MHz.

Antenna Capability





NOTE


10.3.12 RRU3838 Technical SpecificationsThe RRU3838 is a type of radio remote unit. An RRU3838 supports a maximum of six UMTScarriers.



441






RRU3838 UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170


NOTE



l The UMTS receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, is measured at the antenna connectoron condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001.




442



Capacity






RRU3838





l DBS3900powerconsumption(UMTSRRU3838withoutMIMO)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(UMTSRRU3838withMIMO)



443


Capacity










444


Capacity









445


Capacity










UMTS 1 40


40

3 13


20

1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 20

3 (MIMO) 2 x 13

4 (MIMO) 2 x 10



1 5



446


2 4

3 2

NOTE






Table 10-282 DBS3900 power consumption (UMTS RRU3838 without MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 20 420 495 5.0 10.5

3 x 2 20 515 635 4.0 8.4

3 x 3 20 710 890 2.8 5.7

3 x 4 20 770 980 2.4 5.1

NOTE








447

Table 10-283 DBS3900 power consumption (UMTS RRU3838 with MIMO)






50 Ah 92 Ah

UMTS 3 x 1 20 + 20 575 695 3.5 7.3

3 x 2 20 + 20 770 980 2.4 5.1

Equipment SpecificationsTable 10-284 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3838.

NOTE




Weight








448



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure



5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)



449

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A




450






RRU3838 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star, chain orring



40

Antenna Capability





NOTE









RRU3839 UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170



451


NOTE



l The UMTS receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, is measured at the antennaconnector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001.



452



Capacity






RRU3839





DBS3900(Ver.D)(-48 VDC)powerconsumption(RRU3839,UMTS)



453


Capacity










454


Capacity









455


Capacity










UMTS 1 60


60

3 20


30

1 (MIMO) 2 x 60

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30

3 (MIMO) 2 x 20

4 (MIMO) 2 x 15



1 5



456


2 4

3 2

NOTE




l In 3 x 1 and 3 x 2 non-MINO scenarios, one UMPTb1 and one WBBPf3 are configured.

l In 3 x 3 and 3 x 4 non-MIMO scenarios, one UMPTb1 and two WBBPf3s are configured.

l In 3 x 1 MIMO scenarios, one UMPTb1 and one WBBPf3 are configured.

l In 3 x 2 MIMO scenarios, one UMPTb1 and two WBBPf3s are configured.

Table 10-294 DBS3900 (Ver.D) (-48 V DC) power consumption (RRU3839, UMTS)






50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 20 500 565 4.1 8.6

3 x 2 20 580 690 3.5 7.2

3 x 3 20 755 900 2.5 5.2

3 x 4 20 890 1115 2.0 4.2

3 x 1 2 x 20 680 800 2.9 5.9

3 x 2 2 x 20 910 1120 2.0 4.1

Equipment SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3839.



457



Weight








RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure



5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa




458




Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA



459

Port UsageScenario


Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A







RRU3839 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring


l When therate at theCPRIport is 2.5Gbit/s or4.9 Gbit/s: 8

40




460




NOTE


10.3.14 RRU3801E Technical SpecificationsAn RRU3801E, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of two carriers.


The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3801E.

Table 10-301 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3801E




RRU3801E(DC)

UMTS 2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

1900 1850 to 1910 1930 to 1990

850 824 to 835 869 to 880

RRU3801E(AC)

2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170

RF Specifications

Table 10-302 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3801E.

NOTE





l Maximum output power = Maximum output power of the PA - Internal loss. The maximum outputpower is measured at the antenna port.



461

Table 10-302 RRU3801E RF specifications


Capacity






RRU3801E

1T2R 2 carriers l 2100MHz:-125.8

l 1900MHz:-125.3

l 850MHz:-125.6

l 2100MHz:--128.6

l 1900MHz:-128.1

l 850MHz:-128.4

l 2100MHz:-131.3

l 1900MHz:-130.8

l 850MHz:-131.1

TheRRU3801Esupportsthemaximum powerconfiguration 1 x40 W.Fortypicalconfigurations,see theOutputpowerfor theRRU3801E(UMTS,850MHz/1900MHz/2100MHz)table.

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3801E(DC)configured)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3801E(AC)configured)

l BTS3900Cpowerconsumption(RRU3801E



462


Capacity






(DC)configured)

Table 10-303 Output power for the RRU3801E (UMTS, 850 MHz/1900 MHz/2100 MHz)


UMTS 1 40

2 20

NOTE

In the Table 10-304, Table 10-305, and Table 10-306:




Table 10-304 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3801E (DC) configured)






24 Ah 50 Ah 92 Ah

3 x 1 20 390 480 2.4 5.7 11.3

3 x 2 20 480 650 1.7 4.3 9.0



463

Table 10-305 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3801E (AC) configured)





3 x 1 20 390 480

3 x 2 20 480 650

Table 10-306 BTS3900C power consumption (RRU3801E (DC) configured)






24 Ah 50 Ah 92 Ah

1 x 1 20 190 240 5.5 12.6 23.2

1 x 2 20 220 290 4.5 10.9 20.0

Engineering SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3801E.

Table 10-307 Equipment specifications of an RRU3801E


Weight

RRU3801E (DC) -48 V DC; voltagerange: -57 V DC to-36 V DC







464


Weight

RRU3801E (AC) l 200 V AC to 240V AC single-phase; voltagerange: 176 V ACto 290 V AC






The following table lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3801E.

Table 10-308 Environmental specifications of an RRU3801E


RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3801E l With 1120W/m2 solarradiation:-40°C to+50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa

The following table lists the compliance standards for an RRU3801E.

Table 10-309 Compliance standards of an RRU3801E



Protection Rating

RRU3801E (DC) l 3GPP TS 25.141l ETSI EN

300019-1-4V2.1.2 (2003-04)Class 4.1: "Non-




465



Protection Rating

RRU3801E (AC) weatherprotectedlocations"

IP55

Table 10-310 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3801E.

NOTE



Table 10-310 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3801E

Port UsageScenario


DC powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

AC powersupply port

Indoorapplications


2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

5 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Outdoorapplications


2 kV (1.2/50 µs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 µs)



466

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

40 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A

Specifications of CPRI PortsThe following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on an RRU3801E.



467

Table 10-311 Specifications of CPRI ports on an RRU3801E





RRU3801E 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star, chain,or ring



40

Antenna CapabilityThe following table lists the antenna capability of an RRU3801E.

Table 10-312 Antenna capability of an RRU3801E


RRU3801E Supported AISG1.1

NOTE


10.3.15 RRU3908 Technical SpecificationsRRU3908 modules are remote radio units and are classified into RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908V2 modules. With the software-defined radio (SDR) technique, RRU3908 modules can workin different modes with different configurations.




468





Mode

RRU3908V1 (DC/AC)

850 824 to 849 869 to 894 GSM and UMTS

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960 GSM, UMTS,and GU

900 EGSM 880 to 905 925 to 950


1740 to 1785 1835 to 1880

1900 1850 to 1890 1930 to 1970 GSM and UMTS

1870 to 1910 1950 to 1990

RRU3908V2 (DC)

850 824 to 849 869 to 894 GSM, UMTS,and GU


900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960

RRU3908V2 (AC)





469

NOTE








l The RRU3908 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complieswith the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard. The RRU3908 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 850 or1900 MHz frequency band complies with the 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 and 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0standards.

l The RRU3908 that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards. TheRRU3908 that works in UMTS, LTE, or MSR mode and operates in the 850 or 1900 MHz frequency bandcomplies with the 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 and TS 37.141 V10.4.0 standards.



470


Type


Capacity

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Output Power PowerConsumptionReceiv

erSensitivitywithOneAntenna



RRU3908V1

2T2R

GSM: 6TRXsUMTS: 4carriersLTE: 1carrierwith abandwidth of 5, 10,15, or 20MHz

GSM:-113.0UMTS:-125.5LTE:-106.3

GSM:-115.8UMTS:-128.3LTE:-109.1

GSM:-118.5(theoretical value)UMTS:-131.0LTE:-111.8

The RRU3908V1 supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 40 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofRRU3908V1(850/900/1800/1900MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofRRU3908V1 (900MHz, GUnon-MSR)

l Outputpower ofRRU3908V1 (900MHz, GUMSR)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3908 V1operatingin the 900MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3908 V1operatingin the1800MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



471

Type


Capacity





l Outputpower ofRRU3908V1 (1800MHz, GLMSR)



472

Type


Capacity





RRU3908V2

2T2R

GSM: 8TRXsUMTS:l 850

MHz:2carriers

l 900MHz:4carriers

LTE: 1carrierswith abandwidth of 1.4,3, 5, 10,15, or 20MHz

GSM:

l 850/900MHzPGSM:-113.5

l 900MHzEGSM:-113.3

UMTS:

l 850/900MHzPGSM:-125.5

l 900MHzEGSM:-125.3

GSM:

l 850/900MHzPGSM:-116.3

l 900MHzEGSM:-116.1

UMTS:

l 850/900MHzPGSM:-128.3

l 900MHzEGSM:-128.1

LTE:

l 900MHz

GSM:

l 850/900 MHzPGSM:-119.0(theoreticalvalue)

l 900MHzEGSM:-118.8(theoreticalvalue)

UMTS:

l 850/900 MHzPGSM:-131.0

l 900MHzEGSM:-130.8

LTE:

l 900MHz

The RRU3908V2 supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 40 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofRRU3908V2 (850/900MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofRRU3908V2 (850/900MHz, GUnon-MSR)

l Outputpower ofRRU3908V2 (850/900MHz, GUMSR)

l Outputpower ofRRU3908V2 (900

DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3908V2 operatingin the 850 or900 MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



473

Type


Capacity





LTE:l 900

MHzPGSM:-106.3

l 900MHzEGSM:-106.1

PGSM:-109.1

l 900MHzEGSM:-108.9

PGSM:-111.8

l 900MHzEGSM:-111.6

MHz, GLMSR)



474

NOTE





l For the RRU3908 V2 working in GSM mode and operating in the 900 MHz frequency band: After designoptimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier onthe RF module when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration isused, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained.Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrieron the RF module.

Table 10-315 Output power of RRU3908 V1 (850/900/1800/1900 MHz, single-mode)








GSM

1 0 0 40 40 0 0

2 0 0 40 40 0 0

3 0 0 20 20 0 0

4 0 0 15 20 0 0

5 0 0 12 12 0 0

6 0 0 10 12 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 40 0

0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 30 0

0 2 0 0 0 30 0

0 2(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 15 0



475








0 3* 0 0 0 20* 0

0 4* 0 0 0 15* 0

LTE 0 0 1 (MIMO) 0 0 0 2 x 30

Table 10-316 Output power of RRU3908 V1 (900 MHz, GU non-MSR)





GU 1 1 40 30

1 1 30 40

1 2 30 20

2 1 20 30

2 1 15 40

2 2 15 20

3 1 10 30

3 2 10 10

4 1 7.5 20

4 2 7.5 10

5 1 6 20

Table 10-317 Output power of RRU3908 V1 (900 MHz, GU MSR)





GU 1 1 20 20

4 1 12 12



476





4 2 10 10

5 1 10 10

NOTE

LTE bandwidth is 5 or 10 MHz. GSM plus LTE bandwidth must not exceed 15 MHz.

Table 10-318 Output power of RRU3908 V1 (1800 MHz, GL MSR)





GL 1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

1 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

2 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

4 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

NOTE

When operating in the 900 MHz frequency band, RRU3908 V2 supports 3 or 4 UMTS carriers.

Table 10-319 Output power of RRU3908 V2 (850/900 MHz, single-mode)








GSM

1 0 0 40 40 0 0

2 0 0 40 40 0 0

3 0 0 20 20 0 0

4 0 0 20 20 0 0



477








5 0 0 13 15 0 0

6 0 0 13 15 0 0

7 0 0 10 13 0 0

8 0 0 10 13 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 60 0

0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 40 0

0 2 0 0 0 40 0

0 2(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 20 0

0 3 0 0 0 20 0

0 3(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 10 0

0 4 0 0 0 20 0

0 4(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 10 0

LTE 0 0 1 (MIMO,2T2R)

0 0 0 2 x 40

Table 10-320 Output power of RRU3908 V2 (850/900 MHz, GU non-MSR)





GU 1 1 40 40

2 1 20 40

3 1 13 40



478





4 1 10 40

5 1 6 20

1 2 40 20

2 2 20 20

3 2 13 20

4 2 10 20

Table 10-321 Output power of RRU3908 V2 (850/900 MHz, GU MSR)





GU 1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 20 20

3 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

4 1 13 20

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

4 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

5 1 10 30

NOTE

If there are less than 4 GSM carriers, 1.4, 3, 5, 10, or 15 MHz bandwidth can be spared from the 900 MHzfrequency band to set up an LTE network. If there are more than 3 GSM carriers, 1.4, 3, 5, or 10 MHz bandwidthcan be spared from the 900 MHz frequency band to set up an LTE network.

Table 10-322 Output power of RRU3908 V2 (900 MHz, GL MSR)





GL 1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20



479





3 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

4 1 (MIMO) 12 2 x 15

NOTE





Table 10-323 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3908 V1 operating in the 900 MHz frequencyband configured)

Mode Configuration

Output Power ofEach Carrier (W)



GSM S2/2/2 20 760 910

S4/4/4 20 730 1070

S6/6/6 12 730 1070

UMTS 3 x 1 20 490 590

3 x 2 20 640 790

3 x 3 20 880 1100

3 x 4 15 880 1110

GU GSMS2/2/2 x 2 +UMTS 3 x1

l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

870 1090

GSMS4/4/4 +UMTS 3 x1

l GSM: 10l UMTS: 20

820 1050



480

Mode Configuration





l GSM: 10l UMTS: 10

820 1050

Table 10-324 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3908 V1 operating in the 1800 MHzfrequency band configured)

Mode Configuration




GSM S2/2/2 20 615 720

S4/4/4 20 855 1190

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 750 880

Table 10-325 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3908 V2 operating in the 850 or 900 MHzfrequency band configured)

Mode Configuration




GSM

S2/2/2 20 550 650

S4/4/4 20 770 1085

S6/6/6 13 740 1085

UMTS3 x 1 20 450 520

3 x 2 20 565 710

LTE 3 x 1 2 x 20 675 800

GU


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 40

920 1170


l GSM: 13l UMTS: 40

890 1170



481

Mode Configuration





l GSM: 10l UMTS: 40

880 1180



Type Input Power Dimension (H x W xD)

Weight (kg)

RRU3908V1

l -48 V DC; voltagerange: -36 V DC to-57 V DC

l 200 V AC to 240 VAC single-phase;voltage range: 176 VAC to 290 V AC

l 110 V AC dual-phase, voltage range:90/180 V AC to135/270 V AC

l RRU3908 V1 (DC):485 mm x 380 mm x170 mm (with thehousing)

l RRU3908 V1 (AC):485 mm x 380 mm x250 mm (with thehousing)

l RRU3908 V1 (DC):23 (with the housing)

l RRU3908 V1 (AC):29 (with the housing)

RRU3908V2

l -48 V DC; voltagerange: -36 V DC to-57 V DC

l 200 V AC to 240 VAC single-phase;voltage range: 176 VAC to 290 V AC

l 110 V AC dual-phase, voltage range:90/180 V AC to135/270 V AC

l RRU3908 V2 (DC):485 mm x 380 mm x170 mm (with thehousing)

l RRU3908 V2 (AC):485 mm x 380 mm x250 mm (with thehousing)

l RRU3908 V2 (DC):23 (with the housing)

l RRU3908 V2 (AC):29 (with the housing)




482



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3908 V1

l Without solarradiation: -40°C to +50°C

l With solarradiation: -40°C to +45°C

5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3 70 kPa to 106 kPa

RRU3908 V2







Protection Rating

RRU3908V1

l 3GPP TS 45.005l 3GPP TS 25.141l 3GPP TS 36.141l 3GPP TS 37.141l ETSI EN 300019-1-4

V2.1.2 (2003-04)Class 4.1: "Non-weatherprotectedlocations"


RRU3908V2


NOTE





483


Port UsageScenario


DC powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA

AC powersupply port

Applicableto thescenariowhere RFmodules areinstalledindoors


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

5 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Applicableto thescenariowhere RFmodules areinstalledoutdoors


2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

40 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



484

Port UsageScenario




Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA

Local powermonitoringport or alarmport

Applicableto thescenariowhere thepowersupplymodule andthe RRU areinstalledback toback or thescenariowhere thedistancebetweenthem isshorter than1 m

Surge 250 A








RRU3908V1

2 l 850MHz/900MHz/1900MHz:1.25

l 1800MHz:1.25 or2.5

Star or dual-star

N/A 40



485





RRU3908V2

2 1.25 or 2.5






NOTE


10.3.16 RRU3926 Technical SpecificationsRRU3926 modules are remote radio units and can work in different modes with differentconfigurations and the software-defined radio (SDR) technique.






Mode

RRU3926 900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960 GSM, UMTS,and GU

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880




486

NOTE








l The RRU3926 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complieswith the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard .

l The RRU3926 that works in UMTS or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or 1800MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards.



487


Type


Capacity






RRU3926

1T2R

GSM: 8TRXsUMTS: 6carriers

GSM:l 900

MHz:-113.7

l 1800MHz:-114.0

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-125.8

l 1800MHz:-126.1

GSM:l 900

MHz:-116.5

l 1800MHz:-116.8

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-128.6

l 1800MHz:-128.9

GSM:l 900



UMTS:l 900

MHz:-131.3

l 1800MHz:-131.6

TheRRU3926supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 1 x 80 W.The typicalconfigurations are asfollows:l Output

power ofRRU3926(900/1800 MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofRRU3926(900/1800 MHz,GUMSR)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3926operatingin the 900MHzfrequencybandconfigured)




488

NOTE





l For the RRU3926 working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output powerof each carrier on the RRU3926 is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related licensemust be obtained. After design optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the theRF module when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the S4 through S8 configurations isused, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained.Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrieron the RRU3926.

Table 10-334 Output power of RRU3926 (900/1800 MHz, single-mode)




OutputSharingPower of EachGSM Carrier(W)


GSM 1 0 80 80 0

2 0 40 40 0

3 0 27 31 0

4 0 20 27 0

5 0 16 20 0

6 0 12 20 0

7 0 10 16 0

8 0 7 12 0

UMTS 0 1 0 0 80

0 2 0 0 40

0 3 0 0 25

0 4 0 0 20



489




OutputSharingPower of EachGSM Carrier(W)


0 5 (hardwareready)

0 0 16

0 6 (hardwareready)

0 0 12

Table 10-335 Output power of RRU3926 (900/1800 MHz, GU MSR)





GU 1 1 40 40

1 2 40 20

2 1 30 20

2 1 20 40

2 2 20 20

3 1 20 20

3 2 16 10

3 2 13 20

4 1 12 20

4 2 12 10

5 1 10 20

5 2 10 10

6 1 10 10

6 2 8 10

7 1 8 10



490

NOTE




Table 10-336 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3926 operating in the 900 MHz frequencyband configured)

Mode Configuration Output Powerof EachCarrier (W)



GSM S2/2/2 20 535 635

S4/4/4 20 655 960

UMTS 3 x 1 20 445 525

3 x 2 20 555 695


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

725 885


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

795 1045





GSM S2/2/2 20 587 690

S4/4/4 20 725 1020




491



Weight (kg)

RRU3926 -48 V DC; voltage range:-36 V DC to -57 V DCNOTE

The RRU3926 supportsAC applications afterbeing configured with anAC/DC power module.For details, see the AC/DCPower Module UserGuide.

l 400 mm x 240 mm x160 mm (with thehousing)

l 400 mm x 220 mm x140 mm (without thehousing)

l 15 (with the housing)l 13.5 (without the

housing)




RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3926



5% RH to 100%RH






Protection Rating

RRU3926 l 3GPP TS 45.005l 3GPP TS 25.141l 3GPP TS 36.141l 3GPP TS 37.141l ETSI EN 300019-1-4





492


NOTE




Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



493

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A








RRU3926 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star, chain,ring, or dual-star

21NOTE

When thenumber ofRRUcascadinglevels isgreater than6, the datarate ofconfiguredopticalmodulesmust be notlower than2.5 Gbit/s.

40



494





NOTE








Mode

RRU3928 900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880




495

NOTE








l The RRU3928 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complieswith the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard.

l The RRU3928 that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards.



496


Type


Capacity






RRU3928

2T2R

GSM: 8TRXsUMTS: 4carriersLTE: 2carriers,thebandwidth percarrier is1.4, 3, 5,10, 15, or20 MHz

GSM:l 900

MHz:-113.7

l 1800MHz:-114.0

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-125.8

l 1800MHz:-126.1

LTE:l 900

MHz:-106.3

l 1800MHz:-106.6

GSM:l 900

MHz:-116.5

l 1800MHz:-116.8

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-128.6

l 1800MHz:-128.9

LTE:l 900

MHz:-109.1

l 1800MHz:-109.4

GSM:l 900



UMTS:l 900

MHz:-131.3

l 1800MHz:-131.6

LTE:l 900

MHz:-111.8

l 1800MHz:-112.1

The RRU3928supports themaximumpowerconfiguration2 x 40 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofRRU3928(900/1800MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofRRU3928(900/1800MHz, GUnon-MSR)

l Outputpower ofRRU3928(900/1800MHz, GUMSR)

l Outputpower ofRRU3928

l DBS3900 powerconsumption(RRU3928operating in the900MHzfrequency bandconfigured)




497

Type


Capacity







NOTE





l For the RRU3928 working in GSM mode: After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulationschemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RF module when any of the S1 through S6configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemescannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RF module.



498


Mode

NumberofGSMCarriers


Number ofLTECarriers

OutputPower ofEach GSMCarrier (W)

OutputSharingPower ofEach GSMCarrier (W)

OutputPower ofEach UMTSCarrier (W)

OutputPower ofEachLTECarrier(W)

GSM

1 0 0 40 40 0 0

2 0 0 40 40 0 0

3 0 0 20 20 0 0

4 0 0 20 20 0 0

5 0 0 13 15 0 0

6 0 0 13 15 0 0

7 0 0 10 13 0 0

8 0 0 10 13 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 40 0

0 2 0 0 0 40 0

0 3 0 0 0 20 0

0 4 0 0 0 20 0

0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 40 0

0 2(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 20 0

0 3(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 10 0

0 4(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 10 0

LTE

0 0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 40

0 0 2(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 20



499

Table 10-347 Output power of RRU3928 (900/1800 MHz, GU non-MSR)





GU 1 1 40 40

2 1 20 40

3 1 13 40

4 1 10 40

1 2 40 20

2 2 20 20

3 2 13 20

4 2 10 20






GU 3 1 20 20

4 1 13 20

5 1 10 20

6 1 10 20

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

1 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

2 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

3 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

4 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10



500

Table 10-349 Output power of RRU3928 (900/1800 MHz, GL MSR)


Number of LTECarriers



GL 1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

4 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

5 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

6 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

NOTE










GSM S2/2/2 20 560 650

S4/4/4 20 740 1025

UMTS 3 x 1 20 510 585

3 x 2 20 585 720

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 900 1110



501





l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

820 985


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

865 1120

GL GSM S2/2/2 +LTE 3 x 10 MHz

l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

930 1140

GSM S3/3/3 +LTE 3 x 10 MHz

l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

870 1065


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

885 1140


Mode Configuration

Output Powerof Each Carrier(W)



GSM S2/2/2 20 560 665

S4/4/4 20 755 1040

UMTS 3 x 1 20 525 585

3 x 2 20 600 735

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 915 1125


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

835 1000


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

880 1135

GL GSM S2/2/2 +LTE 3 x 10MHz

l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

945 1155

GSM S3/3/3 +LTE 3 x 10MHz

l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

885 1095



502

Mode Configuration





l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

900 1155




Weight (kg)






housing)




RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3928



5% RH to 100%RH





503




Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A



504

Port UsageScenario



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A







RRU3928 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star or dual-star

N/A 40



505





NOTE








Mode

RRU3929 900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880




506

NOTE












507


Type


Capacity






RRU3929

2T2R


utMIMO: 6carriers


LTE: 2carriers,thebandwidth percarrier is1.4, 3, 5,10, 15, or20 MHz

GSM:l 900

MHz:-113.7

l 1800MHz:-114.0

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-125.8

l 1800MHz:-126.1

LTE:l 900

MHz:-106.3

l 1800MHz:-106.6

GSM:l 900

MHz:-116.5

l 1800MHz:-116.8

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-128.6

l 1800MHz:-128.9

LTE:l 900

MHz:-109.1

l 1800MHz:-109.4

GSM:l 900



UMTS:l 900

MHz:-131.3

l 1800MHz:-131.6

LTE:l 900

MHz:-111.8

l 1800MHz:-112.1

The RRU3929supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 60 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofRRU3929(900/1800MHz,single-mode)

l Outputpower ofRRU3929(900/1800MHz, GUnon-MSR)

l Outputpower ofRRU3929(900/1800MHz, GUMSR)

l Outputpower ofRRU3929

DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3929operatingin the 900or 1800MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



508

Type


Capacity







NOTE





l For the RRU3929 working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum outputpower of each carrier on the RRU3929 is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W is required, the related licensemust be obtained.After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the sameoutput power for each carrier on the RF module when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. Whenthe S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coveragefeature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the sameoutput power for each carrier on the RF module..



509


Mode








GSM 1 0 0 60 60 0 0

2 0 0 60 60 0 0

3 0 0 30 30 0 0

4 0 0 30 30 0 0

5 0 0 20 25 0 0

6 0 0 20 25 0 0

7 0 0 15 20 0 0

8 0 0 15 20 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 60 0

0 2 0 0 0 60 0

0 3 0 0 0 30 0

0 4 0 0 0 30 0

0 5 0 0 0 20 0

0 6 0 0 0 20 0

0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 40 0

0 2(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 30 0

0 3(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 20 0

0 4(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 15 0

LTE 0 0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 5/10/15/20MHz: 2 x601.4/3MHz: 2 x40



510

Mode








0 0 2(MIMO)

0 0 0 Carrier1: 2x 30Carrier2: 2x 30

0 0 2(MIMO)


Table 10-361 Output power of RRU3929 (900/1800 MHz, GU non-MSR)





GU 1 1 60 60

1 2 60 30

1 3 60 20

2 1 30 60

2 2 30 30

2 3 30 20

2 4 30 15

3 1 20 60

3 2 20 30

3 3 20 20

3 4 20 15

4 1 15 60

4 2 15 30

4 3 15 20

4 4 15 15



511





5 1 10 60

5 2 10 30

5 3 10 20

6 1 7 60

6 2 7 30






GU 1 2 30 30

1 2 20 40

2 1 40 20

2 1 30 30

2 2 20 40

2 2 30 30

2 2 40 20

3 1 30 30

3 1 20 40

3 2 20 20

3 2 15 30

4 1 20 40

4 2 20 20

4 2 15 30

5 1 20 20

5 1 15 30

5 2 13 20

6 1 15 30



512





6 2 12 20

7 1 10 20

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

1 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

1 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

2 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

2 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

2 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 2 (MIMO) 30 2 x 15

3 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 30

3 2 (MIMO) 15 2 x 15

3 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

3 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 30

4 2 (MIMO) 15 2 x 15

4 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

4 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

NOTE

** indicates that the configuration is supported only when the RRU3929 operates in the 1800 MHz frequencyband.



513

Table 10-363 Output power of RRU3929 (900/1800 MHz, GL MSR)





GL 1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

1 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

2 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

3 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3** 1 (MIMO)** 15** 2 x 30**

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 30

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

5 1 (MIMO) 12 2 x 20

5** 1 (MIMO)** 7.5** 2 x 30**

6 1 (MIMO) 12 2 x 20

6** 1 (MIMO)** 7.5** 2 x 30**

NOTE








514

Table 10-364 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3929 operating in the 900 or 1800 MHzfrequency band configured)




GSM S2/2/2 20 675 795

S4/4/4 20 915 1260

S6/6/6 20 1005 1530

UMTS 3 x 1 20 585 675

3 x 2 20 660 840

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 990 1290


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

850 1030


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

1060 1360


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

1105 1495


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1305 1660


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1155 1525


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1215 1660




515



Weight (kg)






housing)




RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3929



5% RH to 100%RH






Protection Rating






516


NOTE




Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



517

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A








RRU3929 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star or dual-star

N/A 40

Antenna Capability







518

NOTE








Mode

RRU3936 850 824 to 849 869 to 894 GSM, UMTS,and GU

900 EGSM 880 to 915 925 to 960 GSM, UMTS,and GU

900 PGSM 890 to 915 935 to 960

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL

1900 1850 to 1910 1930 to 1990 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, GL,and UL




519

NOTE





l The GSM receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, is measured at the antenna connectoron the condition that the channel rate is 13 kbit/s and the Bit Error Rate (BER) is not higher than 2%.







520


Type


Capacity






RRU3936

1T2R


GSM:

l 850MHz:-113.4

l 900MHz:-113.7

l 1800MHz:-114.0

l 1900MHz:-113.7

UMTS:

l 850MHz:-125.5

l 900MHz:-125.8

l 1800MHz:-126.1

GSM:l 850

MHz:-116.2

l 900MHz:-116.5

l 1800MHz:-116.8

l 1900MHz:-116.5

UMTS:l 850

MHz:-128.3

l 900MHz:-128.6

l 1800MHz:-128.9

l 1900MHz:-128.6

LTE:l 1800

MHz:-109.4

GSM:l 850





UMTS:

TheRRU3936supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 1 x 80 W.The typicalconfigurations are asfollows:l Output

powerfor theRRU3936 (GSM,850MHz/900MHz/1800MHz/1900MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theRRU3936(UMTS,850MHz/900





521

Type


Capacity






l 1900MHz:-125.8

LTE :l 1800

MHz:-106.6

l 1900MHz:-106.6

l 1900MHz:-109.4

l 850MHz:-131.0

l 900MHz:-131.3

l 1800MHz:-131.6

l 1900MHz:-131.3

LTE:l 1800

MHz:-112.1

l 1900MHz:-112.1

MHz/1800MHz/1900MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theRRU3936 (LTE,1800MHz/1900MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theRRU3936 (GUMSR,850MHz/900MHz/1800MHz/1900MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theRRU3936 (GLMSR,



522

Type


Capacity






1800MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theRRU3936 (GLMSR,1900MHz)

l Outputpowerfor theRRU3936 (ULMSR,1900MHz)



523

NOTE





l For the RRU3936 working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output powerof each carrier on the RRU3936 is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related licensemust be obtained. After design optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the theRF module when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the S4 through S8 configurations isused, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained.Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrieron the RRU3936.

Table 10-373 Output power for the RRU3936 (GSM, 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900MHz)

Mode Total Number ofGSM Carriers

Output Power perGSM Carrier (W)

Output Power perGSM Carrier WithDynamic PowerSharing (W)

GSM 1 80 80

2 40 40

3 27 31

4 20 27

5 16 20

6 12 20

7 10 16

8 7 12

NOTE

In the following table, * indicates that the UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.



524

Table 10-374 Output power for the RRU3936 (UMTS, 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900MHz)



UMTS 1 80

2 40

3 25

4 20

5* 16*

6* 12*

Table 10-375 Output power for the RRU3936 (LTE, 1800 MHz/1900 MHz)

Mode Total Number ofLTE Carriers

Output Power perLTE Carrier (W)

Bandwidth of LTECarrier (MHz)

LTE 1 60 5,10,15,20

1 40 1.4,3

2 40 1.4,3,5,10

NOTE

In the following table, * indicates that SRAN7.0 or a later version supports the configuration.

Table 10-376 Output power for the RRU3936 (GU MSR, 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900MHz)

Mode Total Numberof GSMCarriers

Total Numberof UMTSCarriers

Output Powerper GSMCarrier (W)


GSM + UMTS 1 1 40 40

1 2 40 20

2 1 30 20

2 1 20 40

2 2 20 20

3 1 20 20

3 2 16 10



525





3* 2* 13* 20*

4 1 12 20

4 2 12 10

5 1 10 20

5 2 10 10

6 1 10 10

6 2 8 10

7 1 8 10

Table 10-377 Output power for the RRU3936 (GL MSR, 1800 MHz)

Mode TotalNumber ofGSMCarriers

TotalNumber ofLTECarriers

OutputPower perGSMCarrier (W)

OutputPower perLTE Carrier(W)

Bandwidthof LTECarrier(MHz)

GSM + LTE 1 1 40 40 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

2 1 20 40 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

2 1 30 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

3 1 20 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

4 1 12 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

5 1 10 20 1.4,3,5,10,15

6 1 10 10 1.4,3,5,10,15

7 1 8 10 1.4,3,5,10,15



526







GSM + LTE 1 1 40 40 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

2 1 20 40 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

2 1 30 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

3 1 20 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

4 1 12 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

5 1 10 20 1.4,3,5,10,15

6 1 10 10 1.4,3,5,10,15

7 1 8 10 1.4,3,5,10,15

1 2 20 30 1.4,3,5,10

1 2 30 20 1.4,3,5,10

2 2 20 20 1.4,3,5,10

2 2 20 l carrier 1:15

l carrier 2:25

1.4,3,5,10

2 2 20 l carrier 1:10

l carrier 2:30

1.4,3,5,10

3 2 13 20 1.4,3,5,10

3 2 17 10 1.4,3,5,10

4 2 12 10 1.4,3,5,10

5 2 10 10 1.4,3,5,10

6 2 8 10 1.4,3,5,10



527

Table 10-379 Output power for the RRU3936 (UL MSR, 1900 MHz)






UMTS +LTE

1 1 40 40 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

2 1 20 40 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

2 1 30 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

3 1 20 20 1.4,3,5,10,15,20

1 2 20 30 1.4,3,5,10

1 2 30 l carrier 1:20

l carrier 2:40

1.4,3,5,10

2 2 20 20 1.4,3,5,10

NOTE








GSM S2/2/2 20 535 635

S4/4/4 20 655 960

UMTS 3 x 1 20 445 525

3 x 2 20 555 695



528





l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

725 885


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

795 1045





GSM S2/2/2 20 587 690

S4/4/4 20 725 1020




Weight (kg)



400 mm x 300 mm x 100mm (without the shell)

13.5 (without the shell)

NOTERRU3936 does not have the housing by default.




529



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3936



5% RH to 100%RH






Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)



530

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surge 250 A



531








RRU3936 2 1.25 or 2.5 Star or dual-star

N/A 40

Antenna Capability





NOTE









Mode

RRU3938 900 880 to 915 925 to 960 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, and GL

1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880



532


NOTE












533


Type


Capacity






RRU3938

2T2R


GSM:l 900

MHz:-113.7

l 1800MHz:-114.0

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-125.8

l 1800MHz:-126.1

LTE:l 900

MHz:-106.3

l 1800MHz:-106.6

GSM:l 900

MHz:-116.5

l 1800MHz:-116.8

UMTS:l 900

MHz:-128.6

l 1800MHz:-128.9

LTE:l 900

MHz:-109.1

l 1800MHz:-109.4

GSM:l 900



UMTS:l 900

MHz:-131.3

l 1800MHz:-131.6

LTE:l 900

MHz:-111.8

l 1800MHz:-112.1

The RRU3938supports themaximumpowerconfiguration2 x 40 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power fortheRRU3938(GSM, 900MHz/1800MHz)

l Outputpower fortheRRU3938(UMTS,900 MHz/1800MHz)

l Outputpower fortheRRU3938(LTE, 900MHz/1800MHz)





534

Type


Capacity






l Outputpower fortheRRU3938(GU non-MSR, 900MHz/1800MHz)

l Outputpower fortheRRU3938(GU MSR,900 MHz/1800MHz)

l Outputpower fortheRRU3938(GL MSR,900 MHz/1800MHz)



535

NOTE





l For the RRU3938 working in GSM mode: After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulationschemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RF module when any of the S1 through S6configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemescannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RF module.

Table 10-390 Output power for the RRU3938 (GSM, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)




GSM 1 40 40

2 40 40

3 20 20

4 20 20

5 13 15

6 13 15

7 10 13

8 10 13

Table 10-391 Output power for the RRU3938 (UMTS, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)



UMTS 1 40

2 40

3 20



536



4 20

1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 20

3 (MIMO) 2 x 10

4 (MIMO) 2 x 10

Table 10-392 Output power for the RRU3938 (LTE, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)



LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 20

Table 10-393 Output power for the RRU3938 (GU non-MSR, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)





GSM + UMTS 1 1 40 40

2 1 20 40

3 1 13 40

4 1 10 40

1 2 40 20

2 2 20 20

3 2 13 20

4 2 10 20



537

Table 10-394 Output power for the RRU3938 (GU MSR, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)





GSM + UMTS 3 1 20 20

4 1 13 20

5 1 10 20

6 1 10 20

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

1 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

2 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

3 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

4 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

Table 10-395 Output power for the RRU3938 (GL MSR, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)


Total Numberof LTECarriers



GSM + LTE 1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

4 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 10

5 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

6 1 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10



538

NOTE









GSM S2/2/2 20 560 650

S4/4/4 20 740 1025

UMTS 3 x 1 20 510 585

3 x 2 20 585 720

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 900 1110


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

820 985


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

865 1120


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

930 1140


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

870 1065


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

885 1140



539


Mode Configuration




GSM S2/2/2 20 560 665

S4/4/4 20 755 1040

UMTS 3 x 1 20 525 585

3 x 2 20 600 735

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 915 1125


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

835 1000


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

880 1135

GL GSM S2/2/2 +LTE 3 x 10MHz

l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

945 1155


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

885 1095


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

900 1155




540



Weight (kg)



400 mm x 300 mm x 100mm (without thehousing)

13.5 (without thehousing)




RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3938



5% RH to 100%RH






Protection Rating






541


NOTE




Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A

RETa port Applicableto allscenarios

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



542

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A








RRU3938 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star or dual-star

N/A 40

Antenna Capability







543

NOTE








Mode

RRU3939 1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880 GSM, LTE, andGL


NOTE






l The RRU3939 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band complies with theEN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard.

l The RRU3939 that works in LTE or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 1800 MHzfrequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards.



544


Type


Capacity






RRU3939

2T2R

GSM: 8TRXsLTE: 2carriers,thebandwidth percarrier is1.4, 3, 5,10, 15, or20 MHz

GSM:-114.0LTE:-106.6

GSM:-116.8LTE:-109.4

GSM:-119.5(theoretical value)LTE:-112.1

The RRU3939supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 60 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power fortheRRU3939(GSM,1800 MHz)

l Outputpower fortheRRU3939(LTE,1800 MHz)

l Outputpower fortheRRU3939(GL MSR,1800 MHz)

DBS3900(Ver.D)(-48 V DC)powerconsumption(RRU3939operatingin the 1800MHzfrequencybandconfigured).



545

NOTE





l For the RRU3939 working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum outputpower of each carrier on the RRU3939 is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W is required, the related licensemust be obtained.After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the sameoutput power for each carrier on the RF module when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. Whenthe S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coveragefeature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the sameoutput power for each carrier on the RF module..

Table 10-406 Output power for the RRU3939 (GSM, 1800 MHz)




GSM 1 60 60

2 60 60

3 30 30

4 30 30

5 20 25

6 20 25

7 15 20

8 15 20

Table 10-407 Output power for the RRU3939 (LTE, 1800 MHz)




LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 60 5,10,15,20

1 (MIMO) 2 x 40 1.4,3,5,10,15,20



546




2 (MIMO) 2 x 30 1.4,3,5,10,15,20


1.4,3,5,10,15,20



Total Numberof LTECarriers



GSM + LTE 1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

1 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

2 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

3 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 30

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 30

5 1 (MIMO) 12 2 x 20

5 1 (MIMO) 7.5 2 x 30

6 1 (MIMO) 12 2 x 20

6 1 (MIMO) 7.5 2 x 30

NOTE







547

Table 10-409 DBS3900 (Ver.D) (-48 V DC) power consumption (RRU3939 operating in the1800 MHz frequency band configured)




GSM S1/1/1 20 510 510

S2/2/2 20 580 680

S3/3/3 20 655 855

S4/4/4 20 690 1110

S6/6/6 20 955 1455

LTE 3 x 10 MHz, 1carrier

2x20 720 870

3 x 10 MHz, 2carriers

2x20 955 1220

GL GSM S2/2/2 +LTE 3 x 10MHz, 1 carrier

l GSM: 20l LTE: 2x20

995 1230

GSM S3/3/3 +LTE 3 x 10MHz, 1 carrier


1080 1405

GSM S4/4/4 +LTE 3 x 10MHz, 1 carrier


1145 1565




548



Weight (kg)



400 mm x 300 mm x 150mm (without thehousing)

20 (without the housing)




RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3939



5% RH to 100%RH






Protection Rating

RRU3939 l 3GPP TS 45.005l 3GPP TS 36.141l 3GPP TS 37.141l ETSI EN 300019-1-4






549

NOTE




Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



550

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A








RRU3939 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star or dual-star

N/A 40

Antenna Capability







551

NOTE








Mode

RRU3942 1900 1850 to 1910 1930 to 1990 GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, GL,and UL

850 824 to 849 869 to 894 GSM, UMTS,and GU




552

NOTE


l C x D W in the Output Power column indicates that this RF module is configured with C transmit channelsand the maximum output power of each transmit channel is D W. C W + D W in the Output Power columnindicates that this RF module is configured with 2 transmit channels and the maximum output power of thetransmit channel is C W and D W, respectively.






l The RRU3942 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 850 MHz/1900 MHz frequency band complieswith the 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 and 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0 standards.

l The RRU3942 that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 850MHz/1900 MHz frequency band complies with the 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 and TS 37.141 V10.4.0standards.



553


Type


Capacity






RRU3942

2T4R


utMIMO: 6carriers


LTE: 2carriers,thebandwidth percarrier is1.4, 3, 5,10, 15, or20 MHz

GSM:l 850

MHz:-113.4

l 1900MHz:-113.7

UMTS:l 850

MHz:-125.5

l 1900MHz:-125.8

LTE(1900MHz):-106.3

GSM:l 850

MHz:-116.2

l 1900MHz:-116.5

UMTS:l 850

MHz:-128.3

l 1900MHz:-128.6

LTE(1900MHz):-109.1

GSM:l 850



UMTSl 850

MHz:-131

l 1900MHz:-131.3

LTE(1900MHz):-111.8

The RRU3942supports themaximumpowerconfiguration 2x 60 W or 40 W+80 W. Thetypicalconfigurationsare as follows:l Output

power ofRRU3942(850/1900MHz,single-mode, 2 x60 W)

l Outputpower ofRRU3942(850/1900MHz,single-mode, 40W + 80 W)

l Outputpower ofRRU3942(850/1900MHz, GU

DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3942operatingin the 1900MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



554

Type


Capacity






non-MSR,2 x 60 W)

l Outputpower ofRRU3942(850/1900MHz, GUnon-MSR,40 W + 80W)

l Outputpower ofRRU3942(850/1900MHz, GUMSR, 2 x60 W)

l Outputpower ofRRU3942(850/1900MHz, GUMSR, 40 W+ 80 W)

l Outputpower ofRRU3942(1900MHz, GLMSR)

l Outputpower of



555

Type


Capacity






RRU3942(1900MHz, ULMSR)

NOTE





l For the RRU3942 working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output powerof each carrier on the RRU3942 is 80 W; when the S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output powerof each carrier on the RRU3942 is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related licensemust be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the sameoutput power for each carrier on the RF module when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. Whenthe S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coveragefeature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the sameoutput power for each carrier on the RF module..

l The RRU3942 supports 2 x 60 W or 40 W + 80 W configuration. The "40 W + 80 W" configuration doesnot apply to typical scenarios. When this configuration is used, only power of channel B can be 80 W.



556

Table 10-418 Output power of RRU3942 (850/1900 MHz, single-mode, 2 x 60 W)

Mode








GSM 1 0 0 60 60 0 0

2 0 0 60 60 0 0

3 0 0 30 30 0 0

4 0 0 30 30 0 0

5 0 0 20 25 0 0

6 0 0 20 25 0 0

7 0 0 15 20 0 0

8 0 0 15 20 0 0

UMTS

0 1 0 0 0 60 0

0 2 0 0 0 60 0

0 3 0 0 0 30 0

0 4 0 0 0 30 0

0 5 0 0 0 20 0

0 6 0 0 0 20 0

0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 40 0

0 2(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 30 0

0 3(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 20 0

0 4(MIMO)

0 0 0 2 x 15 0

LTE 0 0 1(MIMO)

0 0 0 5/10/15/20MHz: 2 x601.4/3MHz: 2 x40



557

Mode








0 0 2(MIMO)


0 0 2(MIMO)


Table 10-419 Output power of RRU3942 (850/1900 MHz, single-mode, 40 W + 80 W)



OutputPower ofEach GSMCarrier (W)

OutputSharingPower ofEach GSMCarrier (W)

OutputPower ofEachUMTSCarrier (W)

GSM 1 0 80 80 0

2 0 40 40 0

3 0 40 40 0

4 0 27 27 0

5 0 20 20 0

6 0 20 20 0

7 0 16 20 0

8 0 13 15 0

UMTS 0 1 0 0 80

0 3 0 0 40

0 6 0 0 20



558

Table 10-420 Output power of RRU3942 (850/1900 MHz, GU non-MSR, 2 x 60 W)





GU 1 1 60 60

1 2 60 30

1 3 60 20

2 1 30 60

2 2 30 30

2 3 30 20

2 4 30 15

3 1 20 60

3 2 20 30

3 3 20 20

3 4 20 15

4 1 15 60

4 2 15 30

4 3 15 20

4 4 15 15

5 1 10 60

5 2 10 30

5 3 10 20

6 1 7 60

6 2 7 30

Table 10-421 Output power of RRU3942 (850/1900 MHz, GU non-MSR, 40 W + 80 W)





GU 1 1 80 40

1 1 40 80

1 2 80 20



559





1 2 40 40

1 3 80 10

1 3 40 25

1 4 80 10

2 1 40 40

2 1 20 80

2 2 40 20

2 2 20 40

2 3 40 10

2 3 20 25

2 4 40 10

2 4 20 20

3 1 27 40

3 1 13 80

3 2 27 20

3 2 13 40

3 3 27 10

3 3 13 25

3 4 27 10

3 4 13 20

4 1 20 40

4 1 10 80

4 2 20 20

4 2 10 40

4 3 20 10

4 3 10 25

4 4 20 10

4 4 10 20



560





5 1 16 40

5 2 16 20

5 3 16 10

6 1 12 40

6 2 12 20

7 1 6 40

Table 10-422 Output power of RRU3942 (850/1900 MHz, GU MSR, 2 x 60 W)





GU 1 2 30 30

1 2 20 40

2 1 40 20

2 1 30 30

2 2 20 40

2 2 30 30

2 2 40 20

3 1 30 30

3 1 20 40

3 2 20 20

3 2 15 30

4 1 20 40

4 2 20 20

4 2 15 30

5 1 20 20

5 1 15 30

5 2 13 20



561





6 1 15 30

6 2 12 20

7 1 10 20

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

1 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

1 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

2 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

2 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

2 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 2 (MIMO) 30 2 x 15

3 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

3 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 30

3 2 (MIMO) 15 2 x 15

3 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

3 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 15 2 x 30

4 2 (MIMO) 15 2 x 15

4 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10

4 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 20

NOTE

* indicates that the configuration is supported only when the RRU3942 operates in the 1900 MHz frequencyband.



562

Table 10-423 Output power of RRU3942 (850/1900 MHz, GU MSR, 40 W + 80 W)





GU 1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 40

1 2 40 40

1 2 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

1 3 40 20

1 4 40 20

2 1 40 40

2 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 20

2 2 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

2 2 40 20

2* 2* 20* 40*

2 3 30 20

3 1 20 40

3 2 20 30

3* 2* 13* 40*

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

4 2 (MIMO) 10 2 x 10

4 2 10 40

5 1 20 20

6 1 10 20

Table 10-424 Output power of RRU3942 (1900 MHz, GL MSR)





GL 1 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20

1 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

2 1 (MIMO) 40 2 x 20



563





2 1 (MIMO) 30 2 x 30

2 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 40

3 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

4 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 20

5 1 (MIMO) 12 2 x 20

6 1 (MIMO) 12 2 x 20

Table 10-425 Output power of RRU3942 (1900 MHz, UL MSR)

Mode Numberof UMTSNon-MIMOCarriers

Numberof UMTSMIMOCarriers


OutputPower ofEachUMTSNon-MIMOCarrier(W)

OutputPower ofEachUMTSMIMOCarrier(W)


UL 1 0 1 (MIMO) 40 0 2 x 40

0 1 1 (MIMO) 0 2 x 30 2 x 30

0 1 1 (MIMO) 0 2 x 20 2 x 40

0 1 1 (MIMO) 0 2 x 40 2 x 20

2 0 1 (MIMO) 30 0 2 x 30

0 2 1 (MIMO) 0 2 x 20 2 x 20

3 0 1 (MIMO) 20 0 2 x 20

2 1 1 (MIMO) 20 2 x 10 2 x 20

4 0 1 (MIMO) 20 0 2 x 20



564

NOTE









GSM S2/2/2 20 690 800

S4/4/4 20 935 1265

S6/6/6 20 1100 1660

UMTS 3 x 1 20 635 715

3 x 2 20 765 910

LTE 3 x 10 MHz 40 1040 1155


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

1020 1205


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

1100 1405


l GSM: 20l UMTS: 20

1200 1545


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1260 1480


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1305 1630


l GSM: 20l LTE: 40

1350 1775


The following table lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3942.



565



Weight (kg)






housing)




RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3942



5% RH to 100%RH






Protection Rating






566


NOTE




Port UsageScenario




2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA



Surge 250 A


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



567

Port UsageScenario




Surge 250 A








RRU3942 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star or dual-star

N/A 40

Antenna Capability







568

NOTE


10.3.23 RRU3201 Technical SpecificationsAn RRU3201, which is a remote radio unit for LTE, supports one carrier.




ReceiveFrequency Band(MHz)

TransmitFrequency Band(MHz)

RRU3201 LTE 700 (band 13) 777 to 787 746 to 756

2600 (band 7) Band C: 2500 to2520

Band C: 2620 to2640

Band D: 2510 to2560

Band D: 2630 to2680

Band E: 2550 to2570

Band E: 2670 to2690


NOTE






569


Type TXandRXChannel


OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3201

2T2R One carrier with abandwidth of:l 5 or 10 MHz in

the 700 MHzband

l 5, 10, 15, or 20MHz in the2600 MHzband

-105.8 -108.6 Themaximumpowerconfiguration is 2 x40 W.

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3201operating inthe 700MHzfrequencybandconfigured)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3201operating inthe2600MHzfrequencybandconfigured)



570


Configuration Output Power ofEach Carrier (W)



3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 869 1055





3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 968 1271



Type Input Power Dimension (H x W x D) Weight (kg)


l 480 mm x 270 mm x 140mm (18 L, without thehousing)

l 485 mm x 285 mm x 170mm (23.5 L, with thehousing)

l ≤ 17.5 (withoutthe housing)

l ≤ 19 (with thehousing)




571



RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3201 l With solarradiationof 1120 W/m2: -40°Cto +50°C


5% RH to 100% RH 1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3 70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating

RRU3201 l 3GPP TS 36.141l ETSI EN 300019-1-4




NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)



572

Port UsageScenario


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA




573







l When therate at theCPRIport is1.25Gbit/s:Cascading is notsupported.


– Threelevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthis lessthanorequalto 5MHz.


l When theLBBPcorLBBPd1isconfigured: 20







574










NOTE


10.3.24 RRU3203 Technical SpecificationsAn RRU3203, which is a remote radio unit for LTE, supports only one carrier.




575





RRU3203 LTE 700 (band 12) 698 to 716 728 to 746

RF Specifications

Table 10-444 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3203.

NOTE







OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3203

2T2R One carrier with abandwidth of 1.4,3, 5, 10, or 15 MHz

-105.8 -108.6 TheRRU3203supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 2 x 40W.

DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3203configured)





3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 869 1055



576







l 485 mm x 381 mm x 170mm (31.4 L, with thehousing)

l ≤ 21 (without thehousing)





RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3203

l With solarradiation of 1120W/m2: -40°C to+50°C

l Without solarradiation: -40°C to+55°C

5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3 70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating







577

NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA




578


















579










NOTE






580





RRU3220 LTE DD 800 (band 20) 832 to 847 791 to 806

842 to 862 801 to 821


NOTE







OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3220

2T2R One carrier with abandwidth of 5, 10,15, or 20 MHz







3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 773 1013



581







l 400 mm x 240 mm x 160mm (15 L, with thehousing)






RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

Atmospheric Pressure

RRU3220 l With solarradiation of 1120W/m2: -40°C to+50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating







582

NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA




583


















584






Antenna Capability




RRU3220 Not supported AISG2.0 and AISG1.1

NOTE

l When an RRU3220 uses a tower mounted amplifier (TMA), a bias tee (BT) is required.


.

10.3.26 RRU3221 Technical SpecificationsAn RRU3221, which is a remote radio unit for LTE, supports a maximum of two carriers.





585





RRU3221 LTE 2600 (band 7) 2500 to 2570 2620 to 2690


NOTE






586




OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3221

2T2R Two carriers. Thebandwidth percarrier is 5, 10, 15,or 20 MHz; thetotal bandwidthbetween themaximumfrequency and theminimumfrequency of thespectrums for twocarriers does notexceed 40 MHz.

-106.0 -108.8 TheRRU3221supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 2 x 40W. Fortypicalconfigurations, seetheOutputpower fortheRRU3221(LTE,2600MHz)table.




LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 40

2 (MIMO) 2 x 20





3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 968 1253



587













RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity


RRU3221 l With solar radiationof 1120 W/m2: -40°C to +50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa





Protection Rating







588

NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA




589






RRU3221 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring












590







– Fourlevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthis lessthanorequalto 10MHz.

– Twolevelsaresupported ifthecell



591





bandwidthisgreater thanorequalto 15MHz.

Antenna Capability





NOTE









RRU3222 LTE DD 800 (band 20) 832 to 862 791 to 821



592


NOTE







OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3222

2T2R One carrier with abandwidth of 5, 10,15, or 20 MHz







3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 863 1073




593











RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity


RRU3222 l With solarradiation of 1120W/m2: -40°C to+50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa



Type Operating Environment Anti-seismicPerformance

Protection Rating


V2.1.2 (2003-04) Class4.1: "Non-weatherprotectedlocations"





594

NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA




595


















596










NOTE






597





RRU3229 LTE 2600 (band 7) 2500 to 2570 2620 to 2690


NOTE






598




OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3229


-106.0 -108.8 TheRRU3229supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 2 x 60W. Fortypicalconfigurations, seetheOutputpower fortheRRU3229(LTE,2600MHz)table.




LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 60

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30





3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1103 1523



599













RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity


RRU3229 l With solar radiationof 1120 W/m2: -40°Cto +50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa




Protection Rating







600

NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA




601






RRU3229 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring












602







– Fourlevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthis lessthanorequalto 10MHz.

– Twolevelsaresupported ifthecell



603





bandwidthisgreater thanorequalto 15MHz.

Antenna Capability





NOTE









RRU3240 LTE 2600 (band 7) 2500 to 2570 2620 to 2690



604

RF Specifications

Table 10-491 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3240.

NOTE







OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3240


-106.0 -108.8 TheRRU3240supportsthemaximumpowerconfiguration 2 x 40W. Fortypicalconfigurations, seetheOutputpower fortheRRU3240(LTE,2600MHz) table.




LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 40



605


2 (MIMO) 2 x 20





3 x 20 MHz 2 x 40 1073 1343













RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity


RRU3240 l With solar radiation of1120 W/m2: -40°C to+50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3

70 kPa to 106kPa




606



Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

250 A



607

Port UsageScenario


Commonmode

250 A




608






RRU3240 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring



– Twolevelsaresupported ifthecellbandwidthis lessthanorequalto 5MHz.

– Cascadingis notrecommended ifthecellbandwidthisgreater than








609





orequalto 10MHz.






610





NOTE








RRU3841

LTE AWS (band 4) 1710 to 1755 2110 to 2155


NOTE






611




OutputPower

PowerConsumption

1T1R 1T2R

RRU3841


-106.3 -109.1 Outputpower fortheRRU3841(LTE,AWS)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3841with2T4Rconfiguration)

l DBS3900powerconsumption(RRU3841with4T4Rconfiguration)

Table 10-502 Output power for the RRU3841 (LTE, AWS)

TX and RX Mode TX RF Port CombinationMode

Maximum Output Power(W)

1T2R Port A or port B 1 x 60

2T2R Port A is used with port B 2 x 60. For typicalconfigurations, see the Table10-503.

l Port A is used with port Cl port B is used with port D

2 x 30



612

TX and RX Mode TX RF Port CombinationMode

Maximum Output Power(W)

2T2R + 2T2R (two sectors) Port A is used with port C andport B is used with port D

2 x 30 + 2 x 30

2T4R Port A is used with port B 2 x 60

4T4R Ports A, B, C, and D are usedtogether

4 x 30. For typicalconfigurations, see the Table10-504.

Table 10-503 Output power for the RRU3841 (LTE, AWS, 2x60 W)

Mode Total Number of LTE Carriers Output Power per LTE Carrier(W)

LTE 1 (MIMO) 2 x 60

2 (MIMO) 2 x 30


Table 10-504 Output power for the RRU3841 (LTE, AWS, 4x30 W)

Mode Total Number of LTE Carriers Output Power per LTE Carrier(W)

LTE 1 (MIMO) 4 x 30

2 (MIMO) 4 x 15


Table 10-505 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3841 with 2T4R configuration)




3 x 20 MHz 2 x 60 1253 1643



613

Table 10-506 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3841 with 4T4R configuration)




3 x 20 MHz 4 x 30 1373 1823













RelativeHumidity

AbsoluteHumidity

AtmosphericPressure

RRU3841 4T4Rl With solar

radiation of 1120W/m2: -40°C to+45°C


Other configurationsl With solar

radiation of 1120W/m2: -40°C to+50°C


5% RH to 100%RH

1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3 70 kPa to 106kPa



614




Protection Rating





NOTE




Port UsageScenario


Powersupply port



2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Commonmode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

10 kA

Commonmode

20 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA


Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA



615

Port UsageScenario



Surgecurrent

Differentialmode

3 kA

Commonmode

5 kA




616






RRU3841 2 1.25, 2.5, or4.9

Star, chain,or ring




– Cascadingis notrecommended ifthecellbandwidthisgreater than








617





orequalto 10MHz.






618





NOTE


10.4 Technical Specifications of an AAUThis section provides technical specifications of an AAU, including supported modes, frequencybands, RF and antenna specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.

10.4.1 AAU3902 Technical SpecificationsThe AAU3902 is an active antenna unit that integrates the functions of the RF module andantenna. It has a modular structure and supports active and passive modes.

Passive Mode SpecificationsThe AAU3902 passive mode specifications include the following: antenna frequency band,antenna beam width, antenna gain, antenna vertical direction parameters, antenna basicparameters, wind resistance, and environment specifications.

Table 10-513 Antenna frequency band, beam width, and gain of AAU3902 in passive mode

Antenna Type FrequencyBand (MHz)

HorizontalBeam Width

Vertical BeamWidth

Antenna Gain(dBi)

Fixed port (low-band)

790 to 960 65° (-3 dB) 10° (-3 dB) 16

Modular slot 2(high-band)with PU22inserted

1710 to 1880 65° (-3 dB) 5.8° (-3 dB) 17.2

1920 to 2170 62° (-3 dB) 5.4° (-3 dB) 17.8

2500 to 2690 60° (-3 dB) 4.3° (-3 dB) 18.2



619

Table 10-514 Antenna vertical direction parameters of AAU3902 in passive mode

Antenna Type MechanicalDowntilt (°)

ElectricalDowntilt Range (°)

1st UpperSidelobeSuppression (dB)

Fixed port (low-band)

-3 to 3 0 to 10 -15

Modular slot 2 (high-band) with PU22inserted

-3 to 3 2 to 10 -15

Table 10-515 Antenna basic parameters of AAU3902 in passive mode

Parameter Value (All Ports Share the Same Value)

Impedance (Ohm) 50

VSWR Less than 1.5

Isolation between ports (dB) High than 28

IM3 intermodulation (dBc) High than -153

Power capacity per low-band port (W) Maximum of 250

Power capacity per RF port of slot 2 (W) Maximum of 125

Table 10-516 Wind resistance of AAU3902 in passive mode

Wind Direction Specifications (N) Remarks

Front 980 Assume that the wind speedis 150 km/h.

Side 650

Rear 960

Table 10-517 Environment specifications of AAU3902 in passive mode

Item Specifications

Operating temperature l Without solar radiation: -40ºC to +55ºCl With solar radiation: -40ºC to +50ºC


Absolute humidity 1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3



620

Item Specifications

Operating environment Comply with the following standards:l 3GPP TS 25.141l ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04)

Class 4.1: "Non-weather protectedlocations."

Anti-seismic protection ETS300-2-3 4M5

Active Mode Specifications

The AAU3902 active mode specifications include RF specifications and engineeringspecifications.

RF Specifications of AAU3902 in Active Mode

The RF specifications include the following: frequency band, beam width, antenna gain, verticaldirection parameters, capacity, receiver sensitivity, output power, and power consumption.

Table 10-518 Frequency band, beam width, and antenna gain of AAU3902 in active mode

FrequencyBand(MHz)

RXFrequencyBand(MHz)

TXFrequencyBand(MHz)

HorizontalBeamWidth

VerticalBeamWidth

AntennaGain

2100 1920 to 1980 2110 to 2170 62° (-3 dB) 5.6° (-3 dB) 17 dBiequivalent

Table 10-519 Vertical direction parameters of AAU3902 in active mode

Frequency Band(MHz)

MechanicalDowntilt (°)

ElectricalDowntilt Range (°)

1st UpperSidelobeSuppression (dB)

2100 -3 to 3 0 to 12 -15

NOTE

In Table 10-520:


l Typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 50% and maximum powerconsumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.



621

Table 10-520 Capacity, receiver sensitivity, output power, and power consumption of AAU3902in active mode

Scenario

Capacity ReceiverSensitivity

Output Power PowerConsumption(W)

Modular slot1 withRU44-2.1Ginserted

UMTS:l 8 carriers

(non-MIMO1T2R)

l 4 carriers(MIMO2T2R or2T4R)

UMTS: 125.8dBm-17 dBi

Full configuration: 2 x 40W. The typicalconfigurations are asfollows:l Output power for

the AAU3902 (2100MHz, 3 Sectors,1T2R)

l Output power forthe AAU3902 (2100MHz, 3 Sectors,2T2R/2T4R)

l Output power forthe AAU3902 (2100MHz, 6 Sectors,1T2R)

l Output power forthe AAU3902 (2100MHz, 6 Sectors,2T2R)

l Typical powerconsumption:260

l Maximumpowerconsumption:360

NOTE

Rxy indicates a connection port of a virtual RF subunit. Where

l x is a decimal digit, indicating the number of a vertical port. Its value range is 0 to 7.

l y can be set to A or B, indicating the number of a horizontal port. A indicates the +45° polarized radiatorelement and B indicates the -45° polarized radiator element.

Table 10-521 Output power for the AAU3902 (2100 MHz, 3 Sectors, 1T2R)

Mode Number ofUMTSCarriers

OutputPower perUMTSCarrier (W)

VRET

UMTS 1 40 R0A: 40W, R0B: 0W

2 40 R0A: 40W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 40W

3 20 R0A: 20W, R0B: 0W



622



VRET

R1A: 0W, R1B: 20W

R2A: 20W, R2B: 0W

4 20 R0A: 20W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 20W

R2A: 20W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 20W

5 13 R0A: 13W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 13W

R2A: 13W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 13W

R4A: 13W, R4B: 0W

6 13 R0A: 13W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 13W

R2A: 13W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 13W

R4A: 13W, R4B: 0W

R5A: 0W, R5B: 13W

7 10 R0A: 10W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 10W

R2A: 10W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 10W

R4A: 10W, R4B: 0W

R5A: 0W, R5B: 10W

R6A: 10W, R6B: 0W

8 10 R0A: 10W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 10W

R2A: 10W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 10W



623



VRET

R4A: 10W, R4B: 0W

R5A: 0W, R5B: 10W

R6A: 10W, R6B: 0W

R7A: 0W, R7B: 10W

Table 10-522 Output power for the AAU3902 (2100 MHz, 3 Sectors, 2T2R/2T4R)



VRET

UMTS 1 40 + 40 R0A: 40W, R0B: 40W

2 20 + 20 R0A: 20W, R0B: 20W

R1A: 20W, R1B: 20W

3 13 + 13 R0A: 13W, R0B: 13W

R1A: 13W, R1B: 13W

R2A: 13W, R2B: 13W

4 10 + 10 R0A: 10W, R0B: 10W

R1A: 10W, R1B: 10W

R2A: 10W, R2B: 10W

R3A: 10W, R3B: 10W




VRET

UMTS 1 40 R0A: 40W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 40W

2 20 R0A: 20W, R0B: 0W



624



VRET

R1A: 0W, R1B: 20W

R2A: 20W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 20W

3 13 R0A: 13W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 13W

R2A: 13W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 13W

R4A: 13W, R4B: 0W

R5A: 0W, R5B: 13W

4 10 R0A: 10W, R0B: 0W

R1A: 0W, R1B: 10W

R2A: 10W, R2B: 0W

R3A: 0W, R3B: 10W

R4A: 10W, R4B: 0W

R5A: 0W, R5B: 10W

R6A: 10W, R6B: 0W

R7A: 0W, R7B: 10W




VRET

UMTS 1 20 + 20 R0A: 20W, R0B: 20W

R1A: 20W, R1B: 20W

2 10 + 10 R0A: 10W, R0B: 10W

R1A: 10W, R1B: 10W

R2A: 10W, R2B: 10W



625



VRET

R3A: 10W, R3B: 10W

Engineering Specifications of AAU3902 in Active Mode

The engineering specifications of AAU3902 in active mode include the equipmentspecifications, wind resistance specifications, environment specifications, surge protectionspecifications, and CPRI port specifications.

Table 10-525 Equipment specifications of AAU3902 in active mode

Input Power Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight

-48 V DC; voltage range: -57V DC to -36 V DC

l AAU3902: 2000 mm x350 mm x 260 mm(without the attachmentplate)

l RU44-2.1G: 416 mm x310 mm x 132 mm

l Minimum antenna weight(without modules and theattachment plate): 33.5 kg

l When one RU44-2.1G isconfigured (without thehandles, decorating platesand mounting kits): 53 kg

l RU44-2.1G: 10.9 kg

Table 10-526 Wind resistance of AAU3902 in active mode

Wind Direction Specifications (N) Remarks

Front 980 Assume that the wind speedis 150 km/h.

Side 650

Rear 960

Table 10-527 Environment specifications of AAU3902 in active mode

Item Specifications

Operating temperature l Without solar radiation: -40ºC to +55ºCl With solar radiation: -40ºC to +50ºC


Absolute humidity 1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3



626

Item Specifications

Operating environment Comply with the following standards:l 3GPP TS 25.141l ETSI EN 300019-1-4 V2.1.2 (2003-04)

Class 4.1: "Non-weather protectedlocations."

Anti-seismic protection ETS300-2-3 4M5

Table 10-528 Surge protection specifications of AAU3902 in active mode

Port Surge ProtectionMode

Specifications Remarks

DC powerport

Surgecurrent

Differential mode

10 kA NOTEl Unless otherwise

specified, the surgeprotectionspecifications dependon the surge waveformof 8/20 μs.

l All the surge currentitems, unless otherwisespecified as Maximumdischarge current,refer to Nominaldischarge current.

Commonmode

20 kA

Antennaport

Surgecurrent

Differential mode

8 kA

Commonmode

40 kA

Table 10-529 CPRI ports of AAU3902 in active mode

Number ofCPRI Ports



MaximumDistance fromthe BBU (km)

2 1.25, 2.5, 4.9, or6.144

Star or chain 3 40

Antenna CapabilityThe following table lists the antenna capability of an AAU3902.

Table 10-530 Antenna capability of an AAU3902

TMA Support Supported RET Antennas

Passive antennas connected to a TMA AISG2.0



627

NOTE

For AAUs supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

Electrical PropertiesTable 10-531 and Table 10-532 provide the electrical properties of an AAU3902 when itoperates in different frequency bands.

Table 10-531 Electrical properties of an AAU3902 operating in the 790 MHz to 960 MHzfrequency band

Frequencyrange(MHz)

790 to 862 824 to 894 880 to 960

Polarization

+45°, -45°

Electricaldowntilt (°)

0 to 10

Gain(dBi)

0° 5° 10° 0° 5° 10° 0° 5° 10°

15.7 15.9 15.6 16 16.1 15.6 16.1 16.3 15.8

Sidelobesuppressionforfirstsidelobeabovehorizon(Typ.)(dB)

0° 5° 10° 0° 5° 10° 0° 5° 10°

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

Horizontal3 dBbeamwidth(°)

65 64 62



628

Vertical 3dBbeamwidth(°)

10.1 9.8 9.3

VSWR

< 1.5

Isolationbetweenports(dB)

≥ 28

Fronttobackratio,copolar(dB)

Typ.27

Crosspolarratio(dB)

Typ.18 (0°)

Max.powerperinput(W)

250 (at 50°C ambient temperature)

IntermodulationIM3(dBc)

≤ -153 (2 x 43 dBm carrier)

Impedance(Ω)

50



629

Table 10-532 Electrical properties of an AAU3902 operating in the 1710 MHz to 2690 MHzfrequency band

Frequencyrange(MHz)

1710 to 1990 1920 to 2170 2500 to 2690

Polarization

+45°, -45°

Electricaldowntilt (°)

2 to 10

Gain(dBi)

2° 6° 10° 2° 6° 10° 2° 6° 10°

17.5 17.3 17 17.8 17.8 17.3 17.8 18.2 17.7

Sidelobesuppressionforfirstsidelobeabovehorizon(Typ.)(dB)

2° 6° 10° 2° 6° 10° 2° 6° 10°

16 16 17 17 17 17 17 18 18

Horizontal3 dBbeamwidth(°)

65 62 60

Vertical 3dBbeamwidth(°)

5.8 5.4 4.3

VSWR

< 1.5



630

Isolationbetweenports(dB)

≥ 28

Fronttobackratio,copolar(dB)

Typ.28

Crosspolarratio(dB)

Typ.18 (0°)

Max.powerperinput(W)

125 (at 50°C ambient temperature)

IntermodulationIM3(dBc)

≤ -153 (2 x 43 dBm carrier)

Impedance(Ω)

50

10.5 Engineering SpecificationsThis section describes engineering specifications of each base station, including input powerspecifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protectionspecifications, and standards that have been complied with.

10.5.1 BTS3900 Engineering SpecificationsBTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipmentspecifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards thathave been complied with.



631

Input Power Specifications

The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have different powerinput specifications. Table 10-533, Table 10-534, and Table 10-535 describe the power inputspecifications for the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, and BTS3900(Ver.D) cabinet, respectively.

Table 10-533 Input power supported by the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet


-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

+24 V DC +21.6 V DC to +29 V DC

120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC dual-live-wire

105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC


90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC

200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase 176 V AC to 290 V AC

200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC three-phase 176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC

Table 10-534 Input power supported by the BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet


-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC


105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC


90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC



Table 10-535 Input power supported by the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet


-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC





632


The following table provides the sizes and weight of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C),and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets.

Table 10-536 Equipment specifications of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), andBTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets

Cabinet Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight

BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900(Ver.C)

900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm ≤ 135 kg (with one BBU andsix RFUs but without thetransmission equipment)

BTS3900 (Ver.D) 900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm ≤ 135 kg (with one BBU andsix RFUs but without the ACpower module)


The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the sameenvironment specifications, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-537 Environment specifications of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), andBTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets

Item Specification

Operating temperature -20°C to +55°CShort term: +50°C to +55°CNOTE

Short term indicates that a base station does notwork for over 15 days within a year or that a basestation does not continuously work for over 72hours.


Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa


The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surgeprotection specifications, as provided in Table 10-538.

NOTE





633

Table 10-538 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900(Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets


Specification

DC power supply port Differential mode 2 kV (1.2/50 μs)


AC power supply port Differential mode 5 kA

Common mode 5 kA

StandardsThe BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets comply with the samestandards, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-539 Standards with which the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900(Ver.D) cabinets comply

Item Standard

Security standards l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0and later versions

l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions



l RFC 4492: Supported in all versionsl RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/

SRAN8.0 and later versionsl Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions

Protection rating IP20

Operatingenvironment

ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1

Storage ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected,not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transportation ETSI EN300019-1-2 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Publictransportation"



634

Item Standard

Anti-seismicperformance

IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration -Time-history methodYD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performancesof Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard inPeople's Republic of China)

Anti-earthquakeperformance

ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"

Noise ETS 300 753 3.1



635

Item Standard

EMC NOTEThe BTS3900 complies with the following standards. If interference existsbecause the BTS3900 is installed near antennas or other radio receivedevices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust thelocation and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the followingstandards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23l 3GPP TS 25.113l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with thefollowing standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeBmeets the EMC requirements and complies with the followingstandards:l CISPR 22 (1997)l EN 55022 (1998)l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11)l CISPR 24 (1998)l IEC 61000-4-2l IEC 61000-4-3l IEC 61000-4-4l IEC 61000-4-5l IEC 61000-4-6l IEC 61000-4-29l GB 9254-1998l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09)l FCC Part 15



636

Item Standard

The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. The eNodeBmeets the EMC requirements and complies with the followingstandards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl 3GPP TS 36.113l ETSI EN 301489-1/23l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10)l ITU-R SM.329-10

10.5.2 BTS3900L Engineering SpecificationsBTS3900L engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipmentspecifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards thathave been complied with.

Input Power SpecificationsThe BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets support the samepower input, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-540 Input power supported by the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), andBTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets


-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment SpecificationsThe BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the samesize and weight, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-541 Equipment specifications of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), andBTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets

Item Specification

Dimension (H x W x D) 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm

Weight ≤ 235 kg (full configuration, with two BBUand twelve RFUs, and without transmissiondevices)



637

Environment SpecificationsThe BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the sameenvironment specifications, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-542 Environment specifications of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), andBTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets

Item Specification

Operating temperature -20°C to +55°CShort term: +50°C to +55°CNOTE

Short term indicates that a base station does notwork for over 15 days within a year or that a basestation does not continuously work for over 72hours.



Surge Protection SpecificationsThe BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the samesurge protection specifications, as provided in Table 10-543.

NOTE



Table 10-543 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L(Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets


Specification

DC power supply port Differential mode 2 kV (1.2/50 μs)


StandardsThe BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets comply with thesame standards, as provided in the following table.



638

Table 10-544 Standards with which the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L(Ver.D) cabinets comply

Item Standard

Security standards l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions







Operating environment ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1

Storage ETSI EN300019-1-1V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotec-ted, not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transportation ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Publictransportation"


IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -TestFf:Vibration -Time-history methodYD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismicPerformances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecomindustry standard in People's Republic of China)



Noise ETS 300 753 3.1



639

Item Standard

EMC NOTEThe BTS3900L complies with the following standards. If interferenceexists because the BTS3900L is installed near antennas or other radioreceive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them oradjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with thefollowing standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23l 3GPP TS 25.113l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with thefollowing standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeBmeets the EMC requirements and complies with the followingstandards:l CISPR 22 (1997)l EN 55022 (1998)l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11)l CISPR 24 (1998)l IEC 61000-4-2l IEC 61000-4-3l IEC 61000-4-4l IEC 61000-4-5l IEC 61000-4-6l IEC 61000-4-29l GB 9254-1998l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09)l FCC Part 15



640

Item Standard

The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. TheeNodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with thefollowing standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl 3GPP TS 36.113l ETSI EN 301489-1/23l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10)l ITU-R SM.329-10

10.5.3 BTS3900A Engineering SpecificationsBTS3900A engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipmentspecifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards thathave been complied with.

Input Power SpecificationsThe BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets support the samepower input, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-545 Input power supported by the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), andBTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets


-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC


105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC


100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC



Equipment SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A(Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets.



641

Table 10-546 Equipment specifications of the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), andBTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets

Item Cabinet Specification

Dimension (H xW x D)

BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C)/BTS3900A (Ver.D)

1400 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (without base)l APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)/

APM30H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.D): 700 mmx 600 mm x 480 mm

l RFC (Ver.B)/RFC (Ver.C)/RFC (Ver.D): 700mm x 600 mm x 480 mm

Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm

Weight BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C)/BTS3900A (Ver.D)

≤ 194 kg (with boards installed in AC cabinetsbefore delivery)

l ≤ 87 kg (with APM30H in full configuration,without transmission devices and storagebatteries)

l ≤ 107 kg (with RFC in full configuration)

Heat DissipationCapabilities ofthe Cabinet

BTS3900A (Ver.B) 50°C at 700 W

BTS3900A (Ver.C) 50°C at 700 W or 50°C at 1050 W

BTS3900A (Ver.D) 50°C at 700 W or 50°C at 1500 W

Environment SpecificationsThe BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets have the sameenvironment specifications, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-547 Environment specifications of the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), andBTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets

Item Specification

Operating temperature -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/M2 solarradiation); an AC heater assembly unit(HAU) is required if the operatingtemperature is below -20°C.





642

Surge Protection SpecificationsThe BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets have the samesurge protection specifications, as provided in Table 10-548.

NOTE



Table 10-548 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A(Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets

Port UsageScenario

SurgeProtectionMode

Specification

-48 V DC outputremote port

Applicable toall scenarios

Differentialmode

10 kA

Common mode 20 kA

-48 V DC input port Applicable tothe scenariowheretransmissioncabinets,batterycabinets, or aBTS3900A(DC) is used

Differentialmode

10 kA

Common mode 20 kA

Applicable tothe scenariowhere onlyRFC cabinetsare used

Differentialmode

3 kA

Common mode 5 kA

AC power supplyport

Applicable tothe scenariowhere RFmodules areconfiguredremotely orare placedoutdoorstogether withthecorresponding base station

Differentialmode

30 kA

Common mode 30 kA



643

StandardsThe BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets comply with thesame standards, as provided in the following table.

Table 10-549 Standards with which the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), andBTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets comply

Item Standard

Security standards l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions







Operating environment ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1

Storage ETSI EN300019-1-1V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotec-ted, not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transportation ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Publictransportation"


IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -TestFf:Vibration -Time-history methodYD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismicPerformances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecomindustry standard in People's Republic of China)



Noise l ETS 300 753 4.1E (rural area)l ETS 300 753 4.1E (urban area)



644

Item Standard

EMC NOTEThe BTS3900A complies with the following standards. If interferenceexists because the BTS3900A is installed near antennas or other radioreceive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them oradjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with thefollowing standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23l 3GPP TS 25.113l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with thefollowing standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeBmeets the EMC requirements and complies with the followingstandards:l CISPR 22 (1997)l EN 55022 (1998)l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11)l CISPR 24 (1998)l IEC 61000-4-2l IEC 61000-4-3l IEC 61000-4-4l IEC 61000-4-5l IEC 61000-4-6l IEC 61000-4-29l GB 9254-1998l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09)l FCC Part 15



645

Item Standard

The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. TheeNodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with thefollowing standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl 3GPP TS 36.113l ETSI EN 301489-1/23l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10)l ITU-R SM.329-10

10.5.4 BTS3900AL Engineering SpecificationsBTS3900AL engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipmentspecifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards thathave been complied with.

Input Power SpecificationsThe following table lists the input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.

Table 10-550 Input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet





105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC


90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC

-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment SpecificationsThe following table lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.



646

Table 10-551 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

Item Specification

Dimension (H x W x D) 1925 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (with the base)Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm

Weight ≤ 550 kg (full configuration, with the baseand full configuration of storage batteries,and without transmission devices)

Heat Dissipation Capabilities of the Cabinet 50°C at 2200 W


The following table lists the environment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.

Table 10-552 Environment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

Item Specification

Operating temperature l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/M2 solarradiation and without storage batteries);an AC heater assembly unit (HAU) isrequired if the operating temperature isbelow -20°C.

l -40°C to +40°C (with 1120 W/M2 solarradiation and storage batteries); an ACheater assembly unit (HAU) is required ifthe operating temperature is below -20°C.




Table 10-553 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.

NOTE



Table 10-553 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

Port Surge Protection Mode Specification

AC input power port Differential mode 30 kA



647


Common mode 30 kA

Standards

The following table lists the standards with which a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet complies.

Table 10-554 Standards with which a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet complies

Item Standard

Securitystandards

l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and laterversions

l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and laterversions



l RFC 4492: Supported in all versionsl RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later

versionsl Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions

Protection rating

IP55


ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1

Storage ETSI EN300019-1-1V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 1.2 "Weatherprotected, nottemperature-controlled storage locations"

Transportation

ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"


IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57:Tests -Test Ff:Vibration -Time-history methodYD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances ofTelecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republicof China)





648

Item Standard




649

Item Standard

EMC NOTEThe BTS3900AL complies with the following standards. If interference exists because theBTS3900AL is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised toextend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)requirements and complies with the following standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23l 3GPP TS 25.113l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the followingstandards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeB meets theEMC requirements and complies with the following standards:l CISPR 22 (1997)l EN 55022 (1998)l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11)l CISPR 24 (1998)l IEC 61000-4-2l IEC 61000-4-3l IEC 61000-4-4l IEC 61000-4-5l IEC 61000-4-6l IEC 61000-4-29l GB 9254-1998l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09)l FCC Part 15The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. The eNodeB meets theEMC requirements and complies with the following standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC



650

Item Standard

l 3GPP TS 36.113l ETSI EN 301489-1/23l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10)l ITU-R SM.329-10

10.5.5 DBS3900 Engineering SpecificationsDBS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipmentspecifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards thathave been complied with.

Input Power SpecificationsThe following table lists the input power specifications of a DBS3900.

Table 10-555 Input power specifications of a DBS3900

Item Input Power Voltage Range

baseband unit (BBU) -48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

remote radio unit (RRU) -48 V DC -36 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment SpecificationsThe equipment specifications of a DBS3900 include the following:

l BBU equipment specifications (for details, see 10.1 Technical Specifications of theBBU3900)

l RRU equipment specifications (for details, see 10.3 Technical Specifications of RRUs)l Related cabinet equipment specifications (for details, see DBS3900 Hardware

Description)

Environment SpecificationsThe environment specifications of a DBS3900 include the following:

l BBU environment specifications (for details, see 10.1 Technical Specifications of theBBU3900)

l RRU environment specifications (for details, see 10.3 Technical Specifications ofRRUs)

Surge Protection SpecificationsThe surge protection specifications of ports on a DBS3900 include the following:



651

l Surge protection specifications of ports on the BBU (for details, see 10.1 TechnicalSpecifications of the BBU3900)

l Surge protection specifications of ports on a remote radio unit (RRU) (for details, see 10.3Technical Specifications of RRUs)

StandardsThe following table lists the standards with which a DBS3900 complies.

Table 10-556 Standards with which a DBS3900 complies

Item Standard

Securitystandards








ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1


Transportation








652

Item Standard

EMC NOTEThe DBS3900 complies with the following standards. If interference exists because theDBS3900 is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extendthe distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)requirements and complies with the following standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23l 3GPP TS 25.113l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the followingstandards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeB meets the EMCrequirements and complies with the following standards:l CISPR 22 (1997)l EN 55022 (1998)l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11)l CISPR 24 (1998)l IEC 61000-4-2l IEC 61000-4-3l IEC 61000-4-4l IEC 61000-4-5l IEC 61000-4-6l IEC 61000-4-29l GB 9254-1998l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09)l FCC Part 15The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. The eNodeB meets theEMC requirements and complies with the following standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC



653

Item Standard

l 3GPP TS 36.113l ETSI EN 301489-1/23l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10)l ITU-R SM.329-10

10.5.6 BTS3900C Engineering SpecificationsBTS3900C engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipmentspecifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards thathave been complied with.

Input Power SpecificationsThe BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets support the same power input, as provided inthe following table.

Table 10-557 Input power specifications of the BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets


-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC



90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC

Equipment SpecificationsTable 10-558 and Table 10-559 list the equipment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet anda BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, respectively.

Table 10-558 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet

Item Specification

Dimension (H x W x D) 600 mm x 400 mm x 390 mml OMB: 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mml RRU subrack: 600mm x 160 mm x 390

mm



654

Item Specification

Weight l AC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBUand RRU)

l DC cabinet: ≤ 26 kg (excluding the BBUand RRU)

Table 10-559 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet

Item Specification

Dimension (H x W x D) 600 mm x 420 mm x 430 mml OMB (Ver.C): 600 mm x 240 mm x 430

mml RRU subrack: 600mm x 180 mm x 430

mm

Weight l AC cabinet: ≤ 32 kg (excluding the BBUand RRU)

l DC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBUand RRU)

Heat Dissipation Capabilities of the Cabinet 50°C at 650 W


Table 10-560 and Table 10-561 list the environment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet anda BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, respectively.

Table 10-560 Environment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet

Item Specification

Operating temperature l With solar radiation: -40°C to +45°Cl Without solar radiation: -40°C to +50°C



Table 10-561 Environment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet

Item Specification

Operating temperature -33°C to +50°C



655

Item Specification




Table 10-562 and Table 10-563 list the surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900Ccabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, respectively.

NOTE



Table 10-562 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C cabinet


DC port Surge current Differentialmode

10 kA

Common mode 15 kA

AC port Surge current Differentialmode

40 kA

Common mode 40 kA

Table 10-563 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet


DC port Surge current Differentialmode

10 kA

Common mode 20 kA

AC port Surge current Differentialmode

40 kA

Common mode 40 kA

Standards

The BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets comply with the same standards, as providedin the following table.



656

Table 10-564 Standards with which the BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets comply

Item Standard

Securitystandards







Protection rating

IP55


ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1


Transportation









657

Item Standard

EMC NOTEThe BTS3900C complies with the following standards. If interference exists because theBTS3900C is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised toextend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)requirements and complies with the following standards:l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/ECl R&TTE Directive 89/336/EECl ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23l 3GPP TS 25.113l ETSI EN 301908-1l ITU-T SM 329-10l FCC PART15The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeB meets theEMC requirements and complies with the following standards:l CISPR 22 (1997)l EN 55022 (1998)l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11)l CISPR 24 (1998)l IEC 61000-4-2l IEC 61000-4-3l IEC 61000-4-4l IEC 61000-4-5l IEC 61000-4-6l IEC 61000-4-29l GB 9254-1998l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09)l FCC Part 15



658

11 Reliability

About This Chapter

3900 series base stations use the Huawei SingleBTS platform, support hardware sharing, andprovide mature communications technologies and stable transmission reliability.

11.1 GBTS ReliabilityThis section describes GBTS reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

11.2 NodeB ReliabilityThis section describes NodeB reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

11.3 eNodeB ReliabilityThis section describes eNodeB reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

11.4 MBTS ReliabilityThis section describes MBTS reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description 11 Reliability


659

11.1 GBTS ReliabilityThis section describes GBTS reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

System Reliability

The GBTS features a reliability design, including load sharing, redundancy configuration, andoptimized fault detection and isolation technologies for the boards and system, greatly enhancingsystem reliability.

l Redundancy design

– The main control board, transmission board, power unit, and FAN unit in the GBTS allsupport redundancy. The baseband unit (BBU) supports load sharing. The radiofrequency (RF) module supports backup.

– The CPRI ports between the BBU and the RF modules supports the ring topology. Whenone CPRI link is faulty, the GBTS automatically switches to the other CPRI link.

– Important data in the GBTS, such as software versions and data configuration files,supports redundancy.

l Reliability design

The GBTS can automatically detect and diagnose faults in the software and hardware, reportalarms, and take self-healing measures. If the faults cannot be rectified, the systemautomatically isolates the faulty NEs.

Hardware Reliabilityl Anti-misinsertion design of boards

If a board of one type is inserted into a slot for another type of board, the board cannot fitinto the backplane.

l Overtemperature protection

When the temperature near the power amplifier (PA) in an RF module is too high, thesystem reports an over-temperature alarm and immediately shuts down the PA.

l Reliable power supply

– Support for wide-range voltages and surge protection

– Power failure protection for programs and data

– Protection of power supply against overvoltage, overcurrent, and reversed connectionof positive and negative poles on boards

l Comprehensive surge protection design

Surge protection applies to alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC) power portsand various input and output signal ports (such as E1 port, interconnection port, and Booleanalarm port), antenna connectors, and GPS port of the GBTS.

Software Reliability

Software reliability is guaranteed through data redundancy and high error tolerance.



660

l Data redundancy

To ensure normal operation of a GBTS when errors occur in important files or data, theGBTS provides the following redundancy functions:

– Redundancy of software versions: The GBTS stores software versions, including theBootROM version, in different partitions to provide redundancy. If the active versionis abnormal, the GBTS switches to the backup version.

– Redundancy of data configuration files: The GBTS stores data configuration files indifferent partitions to provide redundancy. If the current file is damaged, the GBTS cancontinue working properly by loading the backup file.

l Error tolerance capability

When software errors occur, the self-healing capability prevents the system from collapse.The software error tolerance capability covers the following aspects:

– Scheduled checks of key resources: The GBTS checks software resource usageperiodically. If resource cannot be released because of software errors, the GBTS canrelease the unavailable resources in time and export logs and alarms.

– Task monitoring: When software is running, monitoring processes check for internalsoftware errors or certain hardware faults. If a fault is detected, an alarm is reported andself-healing measures are taken to restore the task.

– Data check: The GBTS performs scheduled or event-triggered data consistency checksand restores data consistency selectively or preferentially. In addition, the GBTSgenerates related logs and alarms.

– Watchdog: When a software error occurs in the GBTS, the GBTS detects the error usingthe software and hardware watchdogs and automatically resets.

11.2 NodeB ReliabilityThis section describes NodeB reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

System Reliability

The NodeB features a reliability design, including load sharing, redundancy configuration, andoptimized fault detection and isolation technologies for the boards and system, greatly enhancingsystem reliability.

l Redundancy design

– The main control board, transmission board, power unit, and FAN unit in the NodeBall support redundancy. The baseband unit (BBU) supports load sharing. The radiofrequency (RF) module supports backup.

– The CPRI ports connecting the BBU and the RF modules support the ring topology.When one CPRI link is faulty, the NodeB automatically switches to the other CPRI link.

– Important data in the NodeB, such as software versions and data configuration files,supports redundancy.




661

The NodeB can automatically detect and diagnose faults in the software, hardware, andenvironment, report alarms, and take self-healing measures. If the faults cannot be rectified,the system automatically isolates the faulty NEs.


If a board of one type is inserted into a slot for another type of board, the board cannot fitinto the backplane. This prevents boards from damage.


When the temperature near the power amplifier (PA) in an RF module is too high, thesystem reports an overtemperature alarm and immediately shuts down the PA.





l Comprehensive surge protection design

Surge protection applies to alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC) power portsand various input and output signal ports (such as E1 port, interconnection port, and Booleanalarm port), antenna connectors, and GPS port on the NodeB.

Software Reliability

Software reliability is guaranteed through data redundancy and high error tolerance.

l Data redundancy

To ensure normal operation of a NodeB when errors occur in important files or data, theNodeB provides the following redundancy functions:

– Redundancy of software versions: The NodeB stores software versions, including theBootROM version, in different partitions to provide redundancy. If the active versionis abnormal, the NodeB switches to the backup version.

– Redundancy of data configuration files: The NodeB stores data configuration files indifferent partitions to provide redundancy. If the current file is damaged, the NodeB cancontinue working properly by loading the backup file.

l Error tolerance capability

When software errors occur, the self-healing capability prevents the system from collapse.The software error tolerance capability covers the following aspects:

– Scheduled checks of key resources: The NodeB checks software resource usageperiodically. If resource cannot be released because of software errors, the NodeB canrelease the unavailable resources in time and export logs and alarms.

– Task monitoring: When software is running, monitoring processes are started to checkfor internal software errors or certain hardware faults. If a fault is detected, an alarm isreported and self-healing measures are taken to restore the task.



662

– Data consistency check: The NodeB performs scheduled or event-triggered dataconsistency checks and restores data consistency selectively or preferentially. Inaddition, the NodeB generates related logs and alarms.

– Watchdog: When a software error occurs in the NodeB, the NodeB detects the errorusing the software and hardware watchdogs and automatically resets.

11.3 eNodeB ReliabilityThis section describes eNodeB reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

System Reliabilityl Intra-board baseband resource pool

Intra-board baseband resource pools are designed to enable dynamic allocation of basebandresources based on the specifications and load status of an LTE baseband processing unit(LBBP). This increases the usage of baseband resources and improves system reliability.

l Inter-board cell reestablishmentInter-board cell reestablishment is designed to enable mutual backup between LBBPboards.

l Cold redundancy of main control boardsIn a BBU3900, two UMPT/LMPT boards are configured and work in active/standby mode.(UMPT is short for universal main processing and transmission unit. LMPT is short forLTE main processing and transmission unit.) If the active UMPT/LMPT board experiencesa major fault, an active/standby switchover is automatically performed. An active/standbyswitchover can also be performed if a user runs the switchover command.

l Redundancy of common public radio interface (CPRI) ports– Hot redundancy: A remote radio unit (RRU) is connected to two CPRI ports on different

LBBP boards to form a ring topology. If a CPRI port is faulty, the service interruptiontime does not exceed 500 ms. If the LBBP board where the cell is established is faulty,the cell is reestablished on the other LBBP board, with a service interruption time shorterthan 20s.

– Cold redundancy: RRUs are connected to two CPRI ports to form a ring topology. Thetwo CPRI ports are provided by either one or two LBBP boards. If a CPRI port or LBBPboard is faulty, the cell is reestablished, with a service interruption time shorter than20s.

l RRU channel cross-connection under multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO)RRU channel cross-connection under MIMO is implemented by cross-connections of radiofrequency (RF) jumpers between RRUs/RFUs and antennas and data switching in theconnected LBBP board. (RFU is short for radio frequency unit.) This function improvesreliability of the entire network without adding hardware. It prevents faults in a single RRUor RFU from causing permanent failures in providing services in cells that are served bythe RRU or RFU. This function partially achieves self-healing.

l Operation and maintenance (O&M) channel backupThe M2000 detects channel connectivity by employing the handshake mechanism at theapplication layer. If detecting that the active channel is disconnected, the M2000 instructsthe eNodeB through the standby channel to perform a channel switchover. The eNodeB



663

automatically switches from the route for the active channel to the route for the standbychannel.

l Route backupRoute backup enhances transmission reliability by using a pair of primary and secondaryroutes to the same destination. The routes are prioritized: A higher priority is set for theprimary route, and a lower priority for the secondary route.


If a board of one type is inserted into a slot for another type of board, the board cannot fitinto the backplane. This function protects boards.

l Over-temperature protectionWhen the temperature near the power amplifier (PA) in an RF module is too high, theeNodeB reports an over-temperature alarm and immediately shuts down the PA. Thisfunction protects the PA from damage caused by over-temperature.

l Reliable power supplyReliable power supply is achieved using the following techniques:




– Support for a maximum configuration of two UPEUs in an eNodeB to provide 1+1redundancy

l Surge protection designAn eNodeB takes surge protection measures on AC and DC power sockets, input and outputsignal ports (E1/T1 port, FE/GE port, interconnection port, and Boolean alarm port),antenna connectors, and GPS port.

Software Reliabilityl Redundancy

To ensure normal operation of an eNodeB when errors occur in important files or data, theeNodeB provides the following redundancy functions:

– Redundancy of software versions: The eNodeB stores software versions, including theBootROM version, in different partitions to provide redundancy. If the active versionis abnormal, the eNodeB switches to the backup version.

– Redundancy of data configuration files: The eNodeB stores data configuration files indifferent partitions to provide redundancy. If the current file is damaged, the eNodeBcan continue working properly by loading the backup file.

– Redundancy of boards: Two boards of the same type can work in active/standby mode.If the active board fails or is faulty, the standby board takes over, ensuring normaloperation of the eNodeB.

l Error tolerance capabilityWhen software errors occur, the self-healing capability prevents eNodeBs from collapse.The software error tolerance capability of an eNodeB covers the following aspects:



664

– Scheduled checks of key resources: The eNodeB checks usage of software resourcesand generates related logs and alarms. In this way, the eNodeB can release unavailableresources.

– Task monitoring: eNodeBs monitor the running status of every task for all types oferrors and faults, if any. When an error or a fault occurs in a task, an alarm is reportedand self-healing measures are taken to restore the task.

– Data check: The eNodeB performs scheduled or event-triggered data consistencychecks and restores data consistency selectively or preferentially. In addition, theeNodeB generates related logs and alarms.

– Watchdog: eNodeBs detect system faults through the software and hardware watchdogs.When an error occurs in an eNodeB, the eNodeB automatically resets to restore itselfto a normal running status.

11.4 MBTS ReliabilityThis section describes MBTS reliability, which includes system reliability, hardware reliability,and software reliability.

System Reliability

The MBTS features a reliability design, including load sharing, redundancy configuration, andoptimized fault detection and isolation technologies for the boards and system, greatly enhancingsystem reliability.

l Redundancy design

– The power unit and FAN unit in the MBTS both support redundancy. The basebandunit (BBU) supports load sharing.

– The CPRI ports between the BBU and the RF modules supports the ring topology. Whenone CPRI link is faulty, the MBTS automatically switches to the other CPRI link.

– Important data in the MBTS, such as software versions and data configuration files,supports redundancy.


The MBTS can automatically detect and diagnose faults in the software and hardware,report alarms, and take self-healing measures. If the faults cannot be rectified, the systemautomatically isolates the faulty NEs.


If a board of one type is inserted into a slot for another type of board, the board cannot fitinto the backplane.


When the temperature near the power amplifier (PA) in an RF module is too high, thesystem reports an over-temperature alarm and immediately shuts down the PA.





665



l Comprehensive surge protection designSurge protection applies to alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC) power portsand various input and output signal ports (such as E1 port, interconnection port, and Booleanalarm port), antenna connectors, and GPS port of the MBTS.

Software ReliabilitySoftware reliability is guaranteed through data redundancy and high error tolerance.

l Data redundancyTo ensure normal operation of an MBTS when errors occur in important files or data, theMBTS provides the following redundancy functions:

– Redundancy of software versions: The MBTS stores software versions in differentpartitions to provide redundancy. If the active version is abnormal, the MBTS switchesto the backup version.

– Redundancy of data configuration files: The MBTS stores data configuration files indifferent partitions to provide redundancy. If the current file is damaged, the MBTS cancontinue working properly by loading the backup file.

l Error tolerance capabilityWhen software errors occur, the self-healing capability prevents the system from collapse.The software error tolerance capability covers the following aspects:

– Scheduled checks of key resources: The MBTS checks software resource usageperiodically. If resource cannot be released because of software errors, the MBTS canrelease the unavailable resources in time and export logs and alarms.

– Task monitoring: When software is running, monitoring processes check for internalsoftware errors or certain hardware faults. If a fault is detected, an alarm is reported andself-healing measures are taken to restore the task.

– Data check: The MBTS performs scheduled or event-triggered data consistency checksand restores data consistency selectively or preferentially. In addition, the MBTSgenerates related logs and alarms.

– Watchdog: When a software error occurs in the MBTS, the MBTS detects the errorusing the software and hardware watchdogs and automatically resets.



666

Index

3900 Series Base StationTechnical Description Index


667

Documents

3900 Series Base Station Technical Description (13)(PDF)-En